Novel lipids and compositions for the delivery of therapeutics.
Abstract
The present invention provides lipids that are advantageously used in lipid particles for the in vivo delivery of therapeutic agents to cells. In particular, the invention formula (I) provides lipids having the following structure XXXIII wherein: R1 and R2 are each independently for each occurrence optionally substituted C10-C30 alkyl, optionally substituted C10-C30 alkenyl, optionally substituted C10-C30 alkynyl, optionally substituted C10-C30 acyl, or -linker-ligand; R3 is H, optionally substituted C1- C10 alkyl, optionally substituted C2-C10 alkenyl, optionally substituted C2-C10 alkynyl, alky lhetro cycle, alkylphosphate, alkylphosphorothioate, alkylphosphorodithioate, alkylphosphonates, alkylamines, hydroxyalkyls, Ï-aminoalkyls, Ï - (substituted)aminoalkyls, Ï -phosphoalkyls, Ï -thiophosphoalkyls, optionally substituted polyethylene glycol (PEG, mw 100-40K), optionally substituted mPEG (mw 120-40K), heteroaryl, heterocycle, or linker-ligand; and E is C(O)O or OC(O).

Term
3.1 yearsleft in the term
Expires 10 November 2029.
- Priority
- Filed
- Granted
- Today
- Expires
21 claims: 2 independent, 19 dependent
- 1REIVINDICACIONES 1. Un lípido que posee la estructura R 3-E^r K 2 XXXIII o una sal o isómero del mismo, en donde:Ri y R 2 son cada uno independientemente para cada aparición alquenilo Ci O -C 2 o opcionalmente sustituido o alquinilo Ci O -C 2 o opcionalmente sustituido;R 3 es ω-aminoalquilo o ω-aminoalquilo(sustitutido);y E es C(O)O;con la condición de que cuando R 3 es 2-(dimetilamino) etilo, Ri y R 2 no son cada uno linoleilo.
- 2El lípido de conformidad con la reivindicación 1, en donde R 3 es ω-aminoalquilo
- 3El lípido de conformidad con la reivindicación 1, en donde R 3 es ω-aminoalquilo (sustituido).
- 4El lípido de conformidad con la reivindicación 1, en donde R 3 es 2-(dimetilamino) etilo', 3(diisopropilamino)propilo, o 3- (N-etil-n-isopropilamino)-1metílpropilo.
- 5El lípido de conformidad con la reivindicación 1, en donde R 3 es alquiloaminoalquilo, dialquiloaminoalquil o alquílheterociclo. 324 IMPI INSTITUTO MEXICANO OE LA ΡΗΟΗΙΕΟΛΡ
- 6El lípido de conformidad con la reivihcíicacioñ en donde Ri y R 2 son cada uno alquenilo Cio'-C^o δρό'1 ι δ'Μ1ϊ¥ίδ ι 1ΤΓ<?' sustituido.
- 7El lípido de conformidad con la reivindicación 1, en donde Ri y R 2 son cada uno linoleilo.
- 8Una partícula lipídica que comprende un lípido de la reivindicación 1.
- 9La partícula lipídica de conformidad con la reivindicación 8, en donde la partícula además comprende un lípido neutral y un lípido capaz de reducir la agregación.
- 10La partícula lipídica de conformidad con la reivindicación 9, en donde el lípido capaz de reducir la agregación es un lípido PEG.
- 11La partícula lipídica de conformidad con la reivindicación 8, que comprende además un agente terapéutico.
- 12La partícula lipídica de conformidad con la reivindicación 11, en donde el agente terapéutico es un ácido nucléico.
- 13La partícula lipídica de conformidad con la reivindicación 12, en donde el ácido nucleico es seleccionado del! grupo que consiste de un siRNA y un oligonucleótido antisentido.
- 14La partícula lipídica de conformidad con la reivindicación 13, en donde el ácido nucléico es un siRNA
- 15Una composición farmacéutica qué comprende una 325 ΙΜΡΙ INSTITUTO Μ EXíCANO OCLA WWOAO fNrXíSTBLAL partícula lipídica de la reivindicación 11 y un excipiente farmacéuticamente aceptable, un portador o diluyente.
- 16Un método in vitro para modular la expresión de un gen , objetivo en una célula que comprende proveer a una célula la partícula lipídica de la reivindicación 11.
- 17El método in vitro de conformidad con la reivindicación 16, en donde el aqente terapéutico es seleccionado de un siRNA y un oligonucleótido antisentido.
- 18El uso de la composición farmacéutica como la que se reclama en la reivindicación 15, en la fabricación de un medicamento para el tratamiento de una enfermedad o desorden caracterizado por la sobreexpresión de un polipéptido en un sujeto, en donde el agente terapéutico es selccionado de un siRNA y un oligonucleótido antisentido, y en donde el siRNA, u oligonucleótido antisentido, comprende un polinucleotido que específicamente se une a un polinucleotido que codifica el polipéptido, o un complemento del mismo.
- 19La partícula lipídica de conformidad con la reivindicación 8, que comprende un lípido de la reivindicación 1, un lípido neutral, colesterol, y un lípido PEGf en donde el lípido de la reivindicación 1, el lípido neutral, el colesterol y el lípido PEG están presentes en rangos de molaridad de 20-70%:5-45%: 20-55%: 0.5-15% respectivamente.
- 20El uso de la partícula lipídica como la que se 326 INSTITUTO MEXICANO CE LA EtiOWETjAD INDUSTRIAL reclama en la reivindicación 11, en la fabricación de un medicamento para la modulación de la expresión de un gen objetivo en una célula.
- 21El uso de la reivindicación 20, en donde el agente terapéutico es seleccionado de un siRNA y un oligonucleótido antisentido. 327
Independent claims21
2,561 paragraphs in 294 sections, as filed
(54) Title: LIPIDS AND NEW COMPOSITIONS FOR THE SUPPLY OF THERAPEUTICS. (54) Title: NOVEL LIPIDS AND COMPOSITIONS FOR THE DELIVERY OF THERAPEUTICS.
(57) Summary
The present invention relates to lipids that are advantageously used in lipid particles for the in vivo delivery of therapeutic agents to cells. In particular, formula (I) of the invention provides lipids having the following structure XXXIII, wherein: R1 and R2 are each for each occurrence 10 to 30 optionally substituted carbon atom, 10 to 30 atom alkenyl of optionally substituted carbon, optionally substituted 10 to 30 carbon alkynyl, optionally substituted 10 to 30 carbon acyl, a linker-ligand; R3 is H, optionally substituted C 1 to 30 carbon alkyl, optionally substituted C 2 to 10 carbon alkenyl, optionally substituted C 2 to 10 carbon alkynyl, alkyl heterophosphate, alkyl phosphorothioate, alkyl phosphorodithioate, alkyl phosphonates, alkylamines, hydroxyalkyl,? -aminoalkyl,? (substituted) aminoalkyl,? -phosphoalkyl,? -thiophosphoalkyl, optionally substituted polyethylene glycol (PEG, mw 100-40K), optionally substituted mPEG (mw 120-40K), heteroaryl, heterocycle, or an -linker-ligand; and E is C (O) O, or OC (O).
(57) Abstract
The present invention provides lipids that are advantageously used in lipid partiols for the in vivo delivery of therapeutic agents to cells. In particular, the invention formula (I) provides lipids having the following structure XXXIII wherein: R1 and R2 are each independently for each occurrence optionally substituted C10-C30 alkyl, optionally substituted C10-C30 alkenyl, optionally substituted C10-C30 alkynyl, optionally substituted C10-C30 acyl, or -linkerligand; R3 is H, optionally substituted C1- C10 alkyl, optionally substituted C2-C10 alkenyl, optionally substituted C2-C10 alkynyl, alky Ihetro cycle, alkylphosphate, alkylphosphorothioate, alkylphosphorodithioate, alkylphosphonates, alkylamines, hydroxyalkyls, l # -aminoalkyls, # substituted) aminoalkyls, I # -phosphoalkyls, I # -thiophosphoalkyls, optionally substituted polyethylene glycol (PEG, mw 100-40K), optionally substituted mPEG (mw 120-40K), heteroaryl, heterocycle, or linker-ligand; and E is C (O) O or OC (O).
Institute
Mexican Property
Industrial _SE__
Μ
Ρ
„..Β
Number:
61/113,179
61/154,350
61/171,439
61/185,438
61/225,898
61/234,098
Country:
US
US
US
US
US
US
PATENT TITLE NO. 338780
Owner (s): ALNYLAM PHARMACEUTICALS, INC O
Address: 300 Third Street, Cambridge, Massachusetts, 02142, USA
Name: LIPIDS AND NOVELTY COMPOSITIONS FOR THE SUPPLY OF THERAPEUTICS.
Classification: IC.8: A61K31 / 7088; A61K31 / 7105; A61K47 / 44; C07C229 / 30; C07D203 / 08;
C12N15 / 85; C12N5 / 071 Inventor (s): MUTHIAH MANOHARAN; MUTHUSAMY JAYARAMAN; KALLANTHOTTATHIL G.
RAJEEV; LAXMAN ELTEPU; STEVEN ANSELL; JIANXIN CHEN
I APPLICATION feather duster: International filing date:
ΜΧφ / 2011/004973 November 10, 2009
PRIORITY
Date:
November 2008 February 20, 2009 April 21, 2009 June 9, 2009 July 15, 2009 August 14, 2009,
Validity: Twenty years <sup>1</sup>
Expiration Date: November 10, 2029
The reference patent is granted based on articles 1 ·, 2nd fraction V, 6th fraction III, and 59 of the Industrial Property Law.
In accordance with article 23 of the Industrial Property Law, this patent has a non-renewable term of twenty years, counted φ from the date of filing of the international application and will be subject to the payment of the fee to maintain the rights in force. ,
Whoever subscribes to this title does so based on the provisions of articles 6 fractions III and 7 bis 2 of the Industrial Property Law (Official Gazette of the Federation (DOF) 06/27/1991, amended on 02 / 08/1994, 10/25/1996, 12/26/1997, 05/17/1999, 01/26/2054, 06/16/2005, 01/25/2006, 06/05/2009 / 06/06 / 2010, 06/18/2010, 06/28/2010, 01/27/2012 and 04/09/2012); Articles 1, 3, fraction V, subsection a), sub subsection i), 4th and 12th fractions I and III of the Regulations of the Mexican Institute of Industrial Property (DOF 14/12/1999, amended on 07/01/19 2002, 07/15/2004. 07/28/2004 and 09/07/2007); Articles 4, 3, 4, 5, section V, subsection a), sub subsection iii), 16 sections I and III and 30 of the Organic Statute of the Mexican Institute of Industrial Property (DO / F. 12/27/1999, amended on 10/10/2002, 07/29/2004, 08/04/2004 and 09/13/2007); 1st, 3rd and 5th subsection a) and antepenultimate paragraph of the Agreement that delegates powers to the Deputy Directors General, Coordinator, Divisional Directors, Heads of Regional Offices, Divisional Deputy Directors, Departmental Coordinators and other subordinates of the Mexican Institute of Property Industrial. (DOF 12/15/1999, amended on 02/04/2000, 07/29/2004, 08/04/2004 and 09/13/2007).
Issue Date: May 2, 2016
DIVISIONAL DEPUTY DIRECTOR OF EXAMINATION OF PATENT FUND, ICA AREAS, ELECTRICAL AND INDUSTRIAL DESIGN RECORDS AND
<img file="MX338780B_D0001.tif" />
<img file="MX338780B_D0002.tif" />
<img file="MX338780B_D0003.tif" />
Sand! No. 550, Floor
Pueblo Sania María Tepepan,
XocrtüTúlco. CP 16020.
Mexico City
Tei (55) 53 34 07 00 www.impi qob.mx
MX / 2016/34867
<img file="MX338780B_D0004.tif" />
/0//
LIPIDS AND NEW COMPOSITIONS FOR EL-SllMINISIBQ_gE__
THERAPEUTIC AGENTS _ _ <sub>r</sub>
I jML pi
Yt-'í & MEXICAN INSTITUTE
FROM OWNERSHIP ..<sup>1</sup> .^'7
INDUSTRIAL · -.!
Government support
The work described herein was carried out, at least in part, using funds from the United States Government under grant number HHSN266200600012C issued by the
National Institute of Allergy and Infectious Diseases.
Accordingly, the government may have some rights regarding the invention.
Priority claim
The present application claims priority from USSN
<td> 61/113,179,</td><td>filed on November 10,</td><td> 2008;</td><td>USSN</td>
<td> 61/154,350,</td><td>filed on February 20,</td><td> 2009;</td><td>USSN</td>
<td> 61/171,439,</td><td>filed on April 21,</td><td> 2009;</td><td>USSN</td>
<td> 61/185,438,</td><td>filed on June 9,</td><td> 2009;</td><td>USSN</td>
<td> 61/225,898,</td><td>filed on July 15,</td><td> 2009;</td><td>USSN</td>
<td> 61/234,098,</td><td colspan="2">filed on August 14, 2009</td><td>G whose</td>
Contents are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.
Background of the Invention
Technical field
The present invention relates to the field of administration of therapeutic agents using particles
<img file="MX338780B_D0005.tif" />
<img file="MX338780B_D0006.tif" />
lipidic. In particular, the present invention provides cationic lipids and lipid particles comprising these lipids, which are advantageous for in vivo administration of nucleic acids, as well as nucleic acid-lipid particle compositions suitable for therapeutic use in vivo. Additionally, the present invention provides methods for making these compositions, as well as methods for introducing nucleic acids into cells using these compositions, eg, for the treatment of various disease states.
Brief description of the invention
Therapeutic nucleic acids include, eg, small interfering RNA (siRNA), microRNA (miRNA), antisense oligonucleotides, ribozymes, plasmids, immunostimulatory nucleic acids, antisense, antagomir, antimir, microRNA mimetic, supermir, ül adapter, and aptamer. These nucleic acids act through various mechanisms. In the case of siRNA or miRNA, these nucleic acids can down-regulate the intracellular levels of specific proteins through a process called RNA interference (iRNA). Following the introduction of siRNA or miRNA into the cell cytoplasm, these double-stranded RNA constructs can bind to a protein called RISC. The siRNA coding chain
I vi p 1
MEXICAN INSTITUTE} »
CE LA? RO? C: t, ad X '. ~ go -¾)
INDUSTRIAL or miRNA shifts from the RISC complex providing a template within RISC that can recognize and bind mRNA with a sequence complementary to that of the bound siRNA or miRNA. Once the complementary RNA is bound, the RISC complex cleaves the mRNA and releases the cleaved chains. IRNA can provide down-regulation of specific proteins by targeting the specific destruction of the corresponding mRNA encoding protein synthesis.
The therapeutic applications of iRNA are extremely broad, since the siRNA and miRNA constructs can be synthesized with any nucleotide sequence targeting a target protein. To date, siRNA constructs have shown the ability to specifically down-regulate target proteins in both in vitro and in vivo models. Furthermore, siRNA constructs are currently being evaluated in clinical studies.
However, two problems currently faced by siRNA or miRNA constructs are, first, their propensity for plasma nuclease digestion and, second, their limited ability to access the intracellular compartment where they can bind to RISC when administered. systemically as free siRNA or miRNA. These double-stranded constructs can be stabilized by incorporating nucleotide linkages chemically
<img file="MX338780B_D0007.tif" />
<img file="MX338780B_D0008.tif" />
TUTO MEXICANO 'T LA F. TOPICDAD
INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX338780B_D0009.tif" />
modified within the molecule, eg, phosphothioate groups. However, these chemical modifications provide only limited protection from nuclease digestion and may decrease construction activity. Intracellular administration of siRNA or miRNA can be facilitated by the use of carrier systems such as polymers, cationic liposomes or by chemical modification of the construct, for example by covalently binding cholesterol molecules. However, improved delivery systems are required to increase the potency of the siRNA and miRNA molecules and to reduce or eliminate the need for chemical modification.
Ribozymes and antisense oligonucleotides can also inhibit mRNA translation into protein. In the case of antisense constructs, these single chain deoxynucleic acids have a sequence complementary to that of the target protein mRNA and can bind to the mRNA by Watson-Crick base pairing. This binding prevents translation of the target mRNA and / or causes RNase H-mediated degradation of the mRNA transcripts. Accordingly, antisense oligonucleotides possess an enormous potential for action specificity (i.e., down-regulation of a specific disease-related protein). To date, these compounds hold promise for
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE Ϊ OF THE PROPERTY. INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX338780B_D0010.tif" />
various in vitro and in vivo models, including models of inflammatory disease, cancer and HIV (discussed in Agrawal, Trends in Biotech. 14: 376-387 (1996)). Antisense can also affect cellular activity through hybridization
Today there are humans of various
The targets of these specific with chromosomal DNA.
Advanced clinical evaluations of antisense drugs are ongoing.
Drugs include the apolipoprotein B and bcl2 genes and mRNA products.
Immunostimulatory nucleic acids include deoxyribonucleic acids and ribonucleic acids. In the case of deoxyribonucleic acids, some sequences or motifs have been shown not to allow immune stimulation in mammals. These sequences or motifs include the CpG motif, pyrimidine rich sequences, and palindromic sequences. The CpG motif in deoxyribonucleic acids is believed to be specifically recognized by an endosomal receptor, toll-like receptor 9 (TLR-9), which then causes both the innate and the acquired immune stimulation pathway. Some immunostimulatory ribonucleic acid sequences have also been recorded. These RNA sequences are believed to elicit immune activation by binding to toll-like receptors 6 and 7 (TLR-6 and TLR-7). Furthermore, it was also observed that double-stranded RNA is stimulating the immune system and is believed to activate
<img file="MX338780B_D0011.tif" />
I.
ΜΡΙ by binding to TLR-3.
A known problem with the use of therapeutic nucleic acids concerns the stability of the internucleotide phosphodiester linkage and the propensity of this linkage to nucleases. The presence of exonucleases and endonucleases in serum results in the rapid digestion of nucleic acids possessing phosphodiester bonds, and therefore therapeutic nucleic acids can have very short half-lives in the presence of serum or within cells. (Zelphati, O., et al., Antisense. Res. Dev. 3: 323338 (1993); and Thierry, AR, et al., ppl47-161 in Gene Regulation: Biology of Antisense RNA and DNA (Eds. Erickson, RP and Izant, JG; Raven Press, NY (1992)). The therapeutic nucleic acid currently being developed does not employ the basic phosphodiester chemistry found in natural nucleic acids, due to these and other known problems.
This problem has been partially overcome by chemical modifications that reduce serum or intracellular degradation. Modifications to the internucleotide phosphodiester bridge (eg, using phosphorothioate, methylphosphonate, or phosphoramidate linkages), at the nucleotide base (eg, 5-propynyl-pyrimidines), or in sugar (eg, modified sugars) have been tested 2 ') (Uhlmann E., et al. Antisense: Chemical Modifications. Encyclopedia of
Cancer, Vol. X., pp 64-81 Academic Press Inc. (1997)). Others
<img file="MX338780B_D0012.tif" />
have attempted to improve stability by using 2'-5 'sugar linkages (see, eg, US Patent No. 5,532,130). Other changes have been attempted. However, none of these solutions has been completely satisfactory and free therapeutic nucleic acids in vivo still have only limited efficacy.
Furthermore, as noted above in relation to siRNA and miRNA, problems persist regarding the limited ability of therapeutic nucleic acids to cross cell membranes (see, Vlassov, et al., Biochlm. Biophys. Acta 1197: 95-1082 ( 1994)) and in problems associated with systemic toxicity, such as complement-mediated anaphylaxis, altered coagulatory properties, and cytopenia (Galbraith, et al., Antisense Nucí. Acid Drug
Des. 4: 201-206 (1994)).
To try to improve efficacy, researchers have also employed lipid-based carrier systems to deliver modified or unmodified therapeutic nucleic acids. In Zelphati, O and Szoka, FC, J. Contr. I laughed 41: 99-119 (1996), the authors refer to the use of (conventional) anionic liposomes, pH-sensitive liposomes, immunoliposomes, fusogenic liposomes, and cationic / antisense lipid aggregates. Similarly, siRNA has been administered systemically in cationic liposomes, and these nucleic acid particles have been reported to be JL JL JL r
MEXICAN INSTITUTE t - ÍÁ
OF THE PROPERTY ' . _. '.. ./-.//
INDUSTRIAL -¾¾ ' <sup>i</sup> · Lipids provide improved down-regulation of target proteins in mammals, including non-human primates (Zimmermann et al., Nature 441: 111-114 (2006)).
Despite this progress, there remains a need in the art for improved therapeutic lipid-nucleic acid compositions suitable for general therapeutic use. Preferably, these compositions would encapsulate nucleic acids with high efficacy, would have high drug: lipid ratios, protect encapsulated nucleic acid from degradation and clearance in serum, would be suitable for systemic administration, and would provide intracellular administration of encapsulated nucleic acid. Furthermore, these lipid-nucleic acid particles should be well tolerated and provide an adequate therapeutic index, so that treatment of the patient at an effective dose of nucleic acid is not associated with considerable toxicity and / or risk to the patient. The present invention provides such compositions, methods of making the compositions, and methods of using the compositions to introduce nucleic acids into cells, including for the treatment of disease.
Brief description of the invention
The present invention provides novel cationic lipids, as well as lipid particles that ϊ
I
THE MEXICAN INSTITUTE EU LA PROPILOaO
INDUSTRIAL Does your f
AO. · Understand them. These lipid particles can further comprise an active agent and be used according to related methods of the invention to deliver the active agent to a cell.
In one aspect, the invention provides lipids that possess the structure <sup>R</sup>3-E- ^ 2<sup>1</sup>
K<sub>2</sub>
XXXIII, salts or isomers thereof, where:
Ri and R<sub>2</sub> are each independently for each occurrence optionally substituted C10-C30 alkyl, Ci alkenyl<sub>0</sub>-C<sub>30 </sub>optionally substituted, Cio-C alkynyl<sub>30</sub> optionally substituted, Cio ~ C acyl<sub>3</sub>or optionally substituted or linker-ligand;
R<sub>3</sub> is H, optionally substituted C1-C10 alkyl, C alkenyl<sub>2</sub>-Ci<sub>0</sub> optionally substituted, alkynyl C<sub>2</sub>-Optionally substituted Cio, alkylheterocycle, alkylphosphate, alkylphosphorothioate, alkylphosphorodithioate, alkylphosphonates, alkylamines, hydroxyalkyl, ω-aminoalkyl, ω aminoalkyl (substitute), optionally-P, -glyglyl, polyurethane, polyurethane, polyurethane, -glyl, polyurethane, -glyl, polyurethane, -glyl, polyurethane, -glyl, polyurethane, -glyl, polyurethane, -glyl, substituted (mw 12040K), heteroaryl, heterocycle or linker-ligand; and
E is C (O) O or 0C (0).
In another aspect, the invention provides a particle
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF PROPERTY
INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX338780B_D0013.tif" />
lipid comprising lipids of the present invention. In some embodiments, the lipid particle further comprises a neutral lipid and a lipid capable of reducing particle aggregation. In one embodiment, the lipid particle consists essentially of (i) at least one lipid of the present invention; (ii) a neutral lipid that is selected from DSPC, DPPC, POPC, DOPE and SM; (iii) sterol, eg. cholesterol; and (iv) peg-lipid, eg. PEG-DMG or PEG-DMA, in a molar ratio of about 20-60% cationic lipid: 5-25% neutral lipid: 25-55% sterol; 0.5-15% PEG-lipid. In one embodiment, the lipid of the present invention is optically pure.
In further related embodiments, the present invention includes lipid particles of the invention that further comprise a therapeutic agent. In one embodiment, the therapeutic agent is a nucleic acid. In one embodiment, the nucleic acid is a plasmid, an immunostimulatory oligonucleotide, a single-stranded oligonucleotide, eg. an antisense oligonucleotide, an antagomir; a double-stranded oligonucleotide, eg. a siRNA; an aptamer or a ribozyme.
In yet another related embodiment, the present invention includes a pharmaceutical composition comprising a lipid particle of the present invention and a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient, carrier or diluent.
..•IS U
IMPI
Mexican Institute of Industrial Property
The present invention further includes, in other related embodiments, a method of modulating the expression of a target gene in a cell, which comprises providing a cell with a lipid particle or pharmaceutical composition of the present invention. The target gene can be a wild type gene. In another embodiment, the target gene contains one or more mutations. In a particular embodiment, the method specifically comprises modulating the expression of a target gene that contains one or more mutations. In particular embodiments, the lipid particle comprises a therapeutic agent that is selected from an immunostimulatory oligonucleotide, a single chain oligonucleotide, eg. an antisense oligonucleotide, an antagomir; a double-stranded oligonucleotide, eg. a siRNA, an aptamer, a ribozyme. In one embodiment, the nucleic acid is a plasmid encoding a siRNA, an antisense oligonucleotide, an aptamer, or a ribozyme.
In one aspect of the invention, the target gene is selected from the group consisting of Factor VII, Eg5, PCSK9, TPX2, apoB, SAA, TTR, RSV, PDGF beta gene, Erb-B gene, Src gene, CRK gene, gene GRB2, RAS gene, MEKK gene, JNK gene, RAF gene, Erkl / 2 gene, PCNA gene (p21), MYB gene, JUN gene, FOS gene, BCL-2 gene, cyclin D gene, VEGF gene, EGFR gene , cyclin A gene, cyclin E gene, WNT-1 gene, beta-catenin gene, c-MET gene, PKC gene, NFKB gene, gene
<img file="MX338780B_D0014.tif" />
STAT3, survivin gene, Her2 / Neu gene, SORTTJ “'' gene XBPl gene, topoisomerase I gene, topoisomerase II alpha gene, gene p73, gene p21 (WAF1 / CIP1), gene p27 (KIPl), gene PPMlD, RAS gene, caveolin I gene, MIB I gene, MTAI gene, M68 gene, mutations in tumor suppressor genes, tumor suppressor gene p53, and combinations thereof.
In another embodiment, the nucleic acid is a plasmid that encodes a polypeptide or a functional fragment or variant thereof, so as to increase the expression of the functional polypeptide or fragment or variant thereof.
In a still further related embodiment, the present invention includes a method of treating a disease or disorder characterized by overexpression of a polypeptide in a subject, which comprises providing the subject with a lipid particle or pharmaceutical composition of the present invention, wherein the therapeutic agent is selected from a siRNA, a microRNA, an antisense oligonucleotide and a plasmid capable of expressing a siRNA, a microRNA or an antisense oligonucleotide, and where the siRNA, microRNA, or antisense RNA comprise a polynucleotide that specifically binds to a polynucleotide encoding the polypeptide or a complement thereof.
In another related embodiment, the present invention includes a method of treating a disease or disorder characterized by underexpression of a polypeptide in a
<img file="MX338780B_D0015.tif" />
l. \; T! TÍ'TC MEX'í Γΐ LA Pf.OPI
INDUS '
<img file="MX338780B_D0016.tif" />
subject, which comprises providing the subject with the pharmaceutical composition of the present invention, wherein the therapeutic agent is a plasmid encoding the polypeptide or a fragment or functional variant thereof.
In a further embodiment, the present invention includes a method of inducing an immune response in a subject which comprises providing the subject with a pharmaceutical composition of the present invention where the therapeutic agent is an immunostimulatory oligonucleotide. In particular embodiments, the pharmaceutical composition is provided to the patient in combination with a vaccine or antigen.
In a related embodiment, the present invention includes a vaccine comprising the lipid particle of the present invention and an antigen associated with a disease or pathogen. In one embodiment, the lipid particle comprises an immunostimulatory nucleic acid or an oligonucleotide. In a particular embodiment, the antigen is a tumor antigen. In yet another embodiment, the antigen is a viral antigen, a bacterial antigen, or a parasitic antigen.
The present invention further includes methods for preparing the lipid particles and pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention as well as kits useful in the preparation of these lipid particles and., I.
in:
ΜΡΙ
ITUTO MEXICANO OT LA, 'λΟ, ΊΤ.ΟΑΰ
INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX338780B_D0017.tif" />
pharmaceutical compositions.
In another aspect, the invention provides a method of evaluating a composition that includes an agent, eg, a therapeutic agent or a diagnostic agent and a lipid of the present invention.
Brief description of the figures
Figure 1. Schematic representation of an optically pure lipid with target conjugated ligands.
Figure 2. Schematic representation of elements of the lipids of the present invention.
Figure 3. Shows a table representing the EC50 and pKa values of lipid examples tested using a method described in the Examples.
Detailed description of the investment
The present invention is based, in part, on the discovery of cationic lipids that provide advantages when used in lipid particles for in vivo administration of a therapeutic agent. In particular, as illustrated in the accompanying Examples, the present invention provides nucleic acid-lipid particle compositions comprising a cationic lipid in accordance with the present invention. In some embodiments, a composition described herein provides a
<img file="MX338780B_D0018.tif" />
increased nucleic acid activity and / or improved tolerance of the compositions in vivo, which can result in a significant increase in the therapeutic index compared to the lipid-nucleic acid particle compositions described above. Additionally, the described compositions and methods of use can provide the improvement in toxicity observed with some nucleic acid-lipid therapeutic particles.
In some embodiments, the present invention specifically provides improved compositions for delivery of siRNA molecules. These compositions are shown herein to be effective in down-regulation of protein levels and / or mRNA levels of target proteins. Furthermore, it is shown that the activity of these improved compositions depends on the presence of some cationic lipids and that the molar ratio of the cationic lipid in the formulation can influence the activity.
The particles and lipid compositions of the present invention can be used for various purposes, including the administration of associated or encapsulated therapeutic agents to cells, both in vitro and in vivo. Accordingly, the present invention provides methods of treating diseases or disorders in a subject in need, by contacting the subject with a particle.
IMPI
<img file="MX338780B_D0019.tif" />
; The PTC, l'IX lipid of the present invention associated with a suitable therapeutic agent.
As described herein, the lipid particles of the present invention are particularly useful for the administration of nucleic acids, including, eg, plasmids and siRNA molecules. Accordingly, the lipid particles and compositions of the present invention can be used to modulate the expression of target genes and proteins both in vitro and in vivo by contacting cells with a lipid particle of the present invention associated with a nucleic acid that reduces the expression of the target gene (eg, a siRNA) or a nucleic acid that can be used to increase the expression of a desired protein (eg, a plasmid that encodes the desired protein).
Various examples of cationic lipid modalities of the present invention are described below in more detail, as well as lipid particles and compositions comprising the same and their use for administering therapeutic agents and modulating gene and protein expression.
Lipids
The present invention provides novel lipids possessing some design elements As shown in
ΙΜΡΪ
ZgXjCANO INSTITUTE OF THE PSOPUDAñ
IhOUSTi'JAl
<img file="MX338780B_D0020.tif" />
Figure 2 lipid design features include at least one of the following: a major group with variant pKa, a monoamine, 1st, 2nd and 3rd cationic di and triamine, oligoamine / polyamine, low pKa major groups Pyridine, guanidinium, anionic, zwitterionic and hydrophobic imidazoles and tails can include symmetrical and / or asymmetric chains, long and shorter chain, saturated and unsaturated; the main chain includes main chain glyceride and other acyclic analogs, cyclic, spiro, bicyclic and polycyclic linkages with ethers, esters, phosphate and analogs, sulfonate and analogs, disulfides, pH-sensitive bonds such as acetals and ketals, imines and hydrazones and oximes .
The present invention provides lipids that are advantageously used in lipid particles of the present invention for in vivo administration of therapeutic agents to cells, including lipids possessing the following structure. In one aspect, the lipid is a compound of the formula XXXIII
XXXIII, salts or isomers thereof, where:
Rl and R2 are each independently for each alkyl occurrence Ci<sub>0</sub>-C<sub>30</sub> optionally substituted, alkenyl
Optionally substituted C10-C30, alkynyl
Cio<sup>_</sup>C3O
Cl0 "C30
ΜΕΧΚ-ΑΝΟ INSTITUTE OF THE I TOflíOAD «
INl> U3i R.ÍAL optionally optionally substituted, substituted acyl or linker-ligand;
R3 is H, optionally substituted C1-C10 alkyl, optionally substituted C2-C10 alkenyl, c-alkynyl<sub>2</sub>-c<sub>10 </sub>optionally substituted, alkylheterocycle, alkylphosphate, alkylphosphorothioate, alkylphosphorodithioate, alkylphosphonates, alkylamines, hydroxyalkyl, ω-aminoalkyl, ωaminoalkyl- (optionally), ω-phosphoalkyl, ω-glyphosyl, myethyl-poly, m-, 12040K), heteroaryl, heterocycle or -linker-ligand; and
E is C (O) O or 0C (0).
In one embodiment, Ri and R2 are each independently for each occurrence optionally substituted C10-C30 alkyl, optionally substituted C10-C30 alkoxy, optionally substituted C10-C30 alkenyl, optionally substituted C10-C30 alkenyloxy, Ci alkynyl<sub>0</sub>-C<sub>30</sub> optionally substituted, alkynyloxy Ci<sub>or</sub>-C<sub>3</sub>or optionally substituted or Cio-C acyl<sub>3rd </sub>optionally substituted.
In another modality, R<sub>3</sub> is H, optionally substituted C1-C10 alkyl, optionally substituted C2-C10 alkenyl, optionally substituted C2-C10 alkynyl, optionally substituted alkylheterocycle, optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted alkylphosphate, optionally substituted phosphoalkyl, alkylphosphorothioate
<img file="MX338780B_D0021.tif" />
optionally substituted, optionally substituted phosphorothioalkyl, optionally substituted alkylphosphorodithioate, optionally substituted phosphorodithioalkyl, optionally substituted alkylphosphonate, optionally substituted phosphonoalkyl, optionally substituted amino, optionally substituted alkylamino, optionally substituted alkylalkyl, aminoalkyl optionallyalkylalkyl , substituted, substituted, optionally substituted hydroxyalkyl, optionally optionally optionally substituted substituted polyethylene glycol, (PEG, mw 100-40K), mPEG (mw 120-40K), optionally substituted heterocyclic heteroaryl or -linker-ligand.
In one embodiment, where the lipid is a compound of formula XXXIII, provided that when E is C (0) 0 and R is z
In
XXXIII,
R<sup>1</sup> and R<sup>2</sup> they are not both linoleyl. one embodiment, the lipid is a compound of formula where R<sub>3</sub> is H, optionally substituted C2-C10 alkenyl, C-alkynyl<sub>2</sub>-Ci<sub>0</sub> optionally substituted, alkylheterocycle, alkylphosphate, alkylphosphorothioate, alkylphosphorodithioate, alkylphosphonates, alkylamines, hydroxyalkyl, ω-aminoalkyl, ωaminoalkyl (substituted), ω-phosphoalkyl, ω20
<img file="MX338780B_D0022.tif" />
thiophosphoalkyl, optionally substituted polyethylene glycol (PEG, mw 100-40K), optionally substituted mPEG (mw 12040K), heteroaryl, heterocycle or linker-ligand.
In yet another embodiment, the lipid is a compound of formula XXXIII, where Ri and R<sub>2</sub> are each independently for each occurrence Cio-C alkyl<sub>3rd</sub> optionally substituted, Cio-C alkynyl<sub>3</sub>or optionally substituted, optionally substituted C10-C30 acyl or linker-ligand;
In one aspect, the invention features a lipid of formula XXXVIII:
XXXVIII, salts or isomers thereof, where
E is C (O) O or OC (O);
Ri and R2 and Rx are each independently for each occurrence H, optionally substituted C1-C10 alkyl, optionally substituted C10-C30 alkyl, optionally substituted C10-C30 alkenyl, Cio-C alkynyl<sub>3</sub>or optionally substituted, acyl Ci<sub>OR</sub>-C<sub>3</sub>or optionally substituted or linker-ligand, provided that at least one of R<sub>x</sub>, R<sub>2</sub> and Rx is not H;
R<sub>3</sub> is H, optionally substituted C1-C10 alkyl, C alkenyl<sub>2</sub>-Optionally substituted Cio, C-alkynyl<sub>2</sub>-Optionally substituted Cio, alkylheterocycle, alkylphosphate,
Λ jLV ± JL JL
INSTITUTO MEXICANA Dt LA PROPIEDAD industrial
<img file="MX338780B_D0023.tif" />
alkylphosphorothioate, alkylphosphorodithioate, alkylphosphonates, alkylamines, hydroxyalkyl, ω-aminoalkyl, ωaminoalkyl (substituted), ω-phosphoalkyl, ωthiophosphoalkyl, optionally substituted polyethylene glycol (PEG, mw 100-40K), m) -ligando;
n is 0, 1, 2 or 3.
In one embodiment, where the lipid is a compound of formula XXXVIII, provided that when E is C (0) 0, R<sup>3</sup> is, and one of Ri, R<sub>2</sub> or R<sub>x</sub> is H, then the remaining Ri, R<sub>2</sub>, or R<sub>x</sub> they are not both linoleyl.
In some modalities, each of Ri and R<sub>2</sub> It is independently for each occurrence optionally substituted C10-C30 alkyl, optionally substituted Cxo-Cao alkenyl, optionally substituted C10-C30 alkynyl, optionally substituted C10-C30 acyl, or linker-ligand.
In some modalities, R<sub>x</sub> it is H or optionally substituted C1-C10 alkyl.
In some modalities, R<sub>x</sub> is optionally substituted C10-C30 alkyl, Cio alkenyl<sup>-</sup>Optionally substituted C3o, optionally substituted C10-C30 alkynyl, optionally substituted Cio ~ C3o acyl or linker-ligand.
In one modality, R<sub>x</sub> and R<sub>2</sub> is each independently for each occurrence optionally substituted C10-C30 alkyl,
IMPIOS
MEXICAN INSTITUTE
OF PROPERTY V
INDUSTRIAL C10-C30 alkoxy optionally substituted, C-alkenyl<sub>the</sub>-C3o optionally substituted, optionally substituted C10-C30 alkenyloxy, optionally substituted C10-C30 alkynyl, optionally substituted C10-C30 alkynyloxy or Ci acyl<sub>0</sub>-C3<sub>0</sub> optionally substituted or linker-ligand.
In one embodiment, R3 is independently for each occurrence H, optionally substituted C1-C10 alkyl, optionally substituted C2-C10 alkenyl, optionally substituted C2-C10 alkynyl, optionally substituted alkylheterocycle, optionally substituted alkylcyclophosphate, optionally substituted phosphoalkyl, alkylphosphorium optionally substituted, optionally substituted phosphorothioalkyl, optionally substituted alkylphosphorodithioate, optionally substituted phosphorodithioalkyl, optionally substituted alkylphosphonate, optionally substituted phosphonoalkyl, optionally substituted amino, optionally substituted alkylamino, optionally substituted di (alkyl) amino, optionally substituted amino (alkyl) aminoalkyl, optionally substituted, substituted, hydroxyalkyl, optionally optionally substituted substituted polyethylene glycol substituted, (PEG, mw 100-40K), mPEG (mw 120-40K), optionally heterocyclic heteroaryl
-'J
IMPI
INSTITUTE MEASURES THE 'S' substituted or linker-ligand.
In one embodiment, E is -C (O) O- or -0C (0) -.
In one embodiment, Z 'is -0-, -S-, -N (Q) -, or alkylene.
In some circumstances, R<sub>3</sub> is ω-aminoalkyl, ωaminoalkyl (substituted), ω-phosphoalkyl or ω-thiophosphoalkyl;
each of which is optionally substituted.
Examples of ω-aminoalkyl (substituted) groups include 2 (dimethylamino) ethyl, 3- (diisopropylamino) propyl, or 3- (Nethyl-N-isopropylamino) -1-methylpropyl.
Cationic lipids comprising unsaturated alkyl chains have been found to be particularly useful for forming nucleic acid-lipid particles with increased membrane fluidity. In one embodiment, at least one of Ri or R2 comprises at least one, at least two, or at least three unsaturation sites, eg. double bond or triple bond.
In one embodiment, only one of Ri or R2 comprises at least one, at least two, or at least three unsaturation sites.
In one modality, both Ri and R<sub>2</sub> they comprise at least one, at least two or at least three unsaturation sites.
In one embodiment, Ri and R2 comprise different unsaturation numbers, eg, one of Ri and R2 has one unsaturation site and the other has two or three unsaturation sites.
<img file="MX338780B_D0024.tif" />
<img file="MX338780B_D0025.tif" />
In one modality, both R<sub>x</sub> and R<sub>2</sub> they comprise the same number of unsaturation sites.
In one modality, Ri and R<sub>2</sub> comprise different types of unsaturation, eg unsaturation in one of Ri and R<sub>2</sub> it is of double bond and in the other the unsaturation is of triple bond.
In one modality, both Ri and R<sub>2</sub> comprise the same type of unsaturation, eg. double bond or triple bond.
In one modality, at least one of Ri or R<sub>2</sub> it comprises at least one double bond and at least one triple bond.
In one modality, only one of Ri or R<sub>2</sub> it comprises at least one double bond and at least one triple bond.
In one modality, both Ri and R<sub>2</sub> they comprise at least one double bond and at least one triple bond.
In one modality, R<sub>x</sub> and R<sub>2</sub> are both the same, eg. both Ri and R<sub>2</sub> are linoleyl (C18) or Ri and R<sub>2</sub> they are both heptadeca-9-enyl.
In one modality, R<sub>x</sub> and R<sub>2</sub> they are different from each other.
In one modality, at least one of Ri and R<sub>2</sub> is cholesterol.
In one modality, one of Ri and R<sub>2</sub> it is a linker-ligand.
In one modality, one of Ri and R<sub>2</sub> it is a linker-ligand and the ligand is a lipophilic.
In one modality, at least one of Ri or R<sub>2</sub> comprises at least one CH group<sub>2</sub> with one or both H replaced by F, by e j. CHF or CF<sub>2</sub>. In one modality, both Ri or R<sub>2</sub> understand the
<img file="MX338780B_D0026.tif" />
minus one CH group<sub>2</sub> with one or two Hs replaced by F, eg.
CHF or CF<sub>2</sub>.
In one modality, only one of R<sub>x</sub> and R<sub>2</sub> comprises at least one CH group<sub>2</sub> with one or both Hs replaced by F.
<td></td><td>In a</td><td>modality, at least one of</td><td>Ri</td><td>or</td><td>R<sub>2</sub> ends</td>
<td>ch<sub>2</sub>F,</td><td>CHF<sub>2</sub> or</td><td>CF<sub>3</sub>. In one modality, both</td><td>Ri</td><td>and</td><td>R<sub>2</sub> end</td>
<td>ch<sub>2</sub>F,</td><td>CHF<sub>2</sub> or</td><td>cf<sub>3</sub>.</td><td></td><td></td><td></td>
<td></td><td>In a</td><td>modality, at least one of R<sub>x</sub></td><td>or</td><td>r<sub>2</sub></td><td>is - (CF<sub>2</sub>)<sub>and</sub>-</td>
(CH<sub>2</sub>)<sub>and</sub>-CH<sub>3</sub>, where each y is independently 1-10 and Z '' is O, S, or N (Q).
In one modality, both R<sub>x</sub> and R<sub>2</sub> are - (CF<sub>2</sub>) <sub>and</sub>-Z- (CH<sub>2</sub>) <sub>and</sub>-CH<sub>3</sub>, where each y is independently 1-10 and Z '' is O, S, or N (Q).
In one modality, at least one of R<sub>x</sub> or R<sub>2</sub> is - (CH<sub>2</sub>)<sub>and</sub>-Z (CF<sub>2</sub>)<sub>and</sub>-CF<sub>3</sub>, where each y is independently 1-10 and Z '' is O, S, or N (Q).
In one modality, both R<sub>x</sub> and R<sub>2</sub> are - (CH<sub>2</sub>) <sub>and</sub>-Z- (CF<sub>2</sub>) <sub>and</sub>-CF<sub>3</sub>, where each y is independently 1-10 and Z is O, S or N (Q).
In one modality, at least one of R<sub>x</sub> or R<sub>2</sub> is - (CF<sub>2</sub>)<sub>and</sub>(CF<sub>2</sub>)<sub>and</sub>-CF<sub>3</sub>, where each and is independently 1-10.
In one modality, both R<sub>x</sub> and R<sub>2</sub> are - (CF<sub>2</sub>) <sub>and</sub>- (CF<sub>2</sub>) <sub>and</sub>-CF<sub>3</sub>, where each and is independently 1-10.
In one modality, R<sub>3</sub> is chosen from a group consisting of methyl, ethyl, polyamine, - (CH<sub>2</sub>) h<sup>_</sup>heteroaryl, - (CH2) h<sup>_ </sup>N (Q) 2, -ON (Q)<sub>2</sub>, - (CH<sub>2</sub>) <sub>h</sub>-2 '- (CH<sub>2</sub>) h-heteroaryl, linker-linker, - (CH<sub>2</sub>) h<sup>_</sup>hetercycle, and - (CH2) h<sup>_</sup>Z '' - (CH2) <sub>h</sub>-heterocycle,
<img file="MX338780B_D0027.tif" />
where each h is independently 0-13 and Z '' is O, So N (Q).
In one embodiment, where Z is C (R<sub>3</sub>), at least one R<sub>3</sub> it is ωaminoalkyl or ω -aminoalkyl (substituted).
In one embodiment, where Z 'is O, So alkyl, at least one R3 is ω-aminoalkyl or ω-aminoalkyl (substituted).
In one embodiment, Q is a linker-ligand.
In one embodiment, the ligand is a fusogenic peptide.
In one embodiment, the lipid is a racemic mixture.
In one embodiment, the lipid is enriched in a diastereomer, eg. the lipid has at least 95%, at least 90%, at least 80% or at least 70% of diastereomeric excess.
In one embodiment, the lipid is enriched in an enantiomer, eg. the lipid has at least 95%, at least 90%, at least 80% or at least 70% of enantiomeric excess.
In one embodiment, the lipid is chirally pure, eg. it is a unique optical isomer.
In one embodiment, the lipid is enriched for an optical isomer.
When a double bond is present (eg, carbon-carbon double bond or carbon-nitrogen double bond), there may be isomerism in the configuration about the double bond (ie, cis / trans or E / Z isomerism). When the configuration of a double bond is illustrated in a chemical structure, it is understood that the corresponding isomer may also be present. The amount of isomer present can
<img file="MX338780B_D0028.tif" />
<img file="MX338780B_D0029.tif" />
vary, depending on the relative stabilities of the isomers and the energy required to convert between the isomers. Therefore, some double bonds are, for practical purposes, present only in a single configuration, while others (eg, when relative stabilities are similar and conversion energy is low) may be present as an inseparable balanced mixture of configurations.
The present invention encompasses the lipid synthesis described herein in both racemic and optically pure form.
In one embodiment, the cationic lipid is chosen from the group consisting of lipids shown in Table 1 below.
Table 1: Some cationic lipids of the present invention.
<td></td><td>one N = \ N. „</td><td></td>
<td>N = \ <sub>n</sub></td><td>N = \,</td><td></td>
<td> °</td><td></td><td>n = 1-10</td>
<td>or _</td><td>one HjN. -k xr 1 oo.</td><td></td>
<img file="MX338780B_D0030.tif" />
<img file="MX338780B_D0031.tif" />
IMPÍ @>
MEXICAN INSTITUTE << * · - * ··; .. *. / OF PROPERTY C '-r ..-. - .- / - (
INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX338780B_D0032.tif" />
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY
<img file="MX338780B_D0033.tif" />
<img file="MX338780B_D0034.tif" />
<img file="MX338780B_D0035.tif" />
<img file="MX338780B_D0036.tif" />
Q is O
Q is O
<img file="MX338780B_D0037.tif" />
Q is O
Q is O \
<img file="MX338780B_D0038.tif" />
<img file="MX338780B_D0039.tif" />
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF PROPERTY
INDUSTRIAL
<td></td><td>ΐ</td>
<td> 1</td><td></td>
<td></td><td>-TO one</td>
<td> 1 <sup>0</sup></td><td> ^'<sup>N</sup>x / * '- Λ, - ^ 20700 - ^ / ^ 2 ^^ == / ^ === / ^ / ^ /</td>
<td>^ orcccc ^ c?</td><td> 0</td>
<td><sub>and</sub>0 /<sup>N</sup></td><td> /<sup>N</sup>N / V<sup>/</sup>\ z ° \ /<sup>x</sup>v<sup>/</sup>V ^<sup>/</sup>^<sup>=</sup>\/<sup>= s</sup>V ^<sup>TO</sup>\ 0 ^ / \ ^ Ν ^ / = \ / = \ / \ / \</td>
<td>Z \ z<sub>s</sub>/ K> kx \ / \ / ^ \ /<sup>!</sup>=\/=\<sub>z</sub>· '' - X * X 0 k / s / x / \ / = \ / = \ y * x / \</td><td> <<sub>Ν</sub>^ Ζ \ ζΧγ ·<sup>Ο</sup>'γΧ / ΧΧν // =<sup>:</sup>\ Ζ = ΧΖ \ Ζ \<sup>1 0</sup> N ^ z ^ v = ^ = vv \</td>
<img file="MX338780B_D0040.tif" />
i .0.
MEXICAN PROPERTY INSTITUTE
INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX338780B_D0041.tif" />
<td>/ * x °</td><td>Λ / \ χγ<sup>ο</sup>/ ΧΧ / '/' / = Χ / = \ / Χ / Χ ° k ^ s ^ s ^ s ^ == X ^ === X / X ^ X.</td>
<td>'^ orXCCC ^ CCC</td><td></td>
<td>/ jVx / x ^ / v ^ / x / w</td><td></td>
<td>> V ^> As / X / -X / X / '= X / - = X / X / ^ V<sub>0</sub>A / X / X / X / "X = / X = / X / X /</td><td>^ p <JCCCCCCCC</td>
<td>\ k / \ x * s / \ / = \ / =<sup>=</sup>X / '= \ /</td><td> 1 <sup>χΝ</sup>'-'<sup>ζ</sup>Χ / Λ / χ ^ -χ = / χ ^ ~ \ = ^ χ == / χ = / χ</td>
<td></td><td>^ o<sup>N</sup>\</td>
<td>1 Π / X / x ^ k / x / ^^ / x //</td><td>^ κ / Χ / X ι Π VX / X / X / Vr / ZX / X / X<sup>1</sup> 0</td>
<td>x¿vz ^ A<sub>n</sub></td><td>Γ / j ° X / x / ^ / x ^ A ^ / ^ //</td>
<td>x<sub>[4</sub>/ \ /X/Qy/X/X/X./X _ / X / \ _ / \ /</td><td></td>
<td>| 0 v / ^ / \ / \ /<sup>=</sup>\/<sup>=</sup>\/<sup>=</sup>\/\</td><td></td>
<td>p / xcxxxx</td><td></td>
<img file="MX338780B_D0042.tif" />
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE
DELAP RO ΡIE OAO 00
INO'JSTR
<td>I'</td><td></td>
<td></td><td>or</td>
<td>W-3CCOOOCC</td><td>OOOOC ^ CZX / O eg, X = Me, OH, Cl, etc.</td>
<td> \<sub>Ν</sub>Χ \ / \ ζ<sup>α</sup>\ Λ \ ζ<sup>ζ</sup>\ χ<sup>χ</sup>\<sub>=</sub>Χ ^^ / \ ^ ζ<sup>/</sup>\ Ζ ^ Ζ | or ν<sup>χ</sup>-Α / ^ \ ζ<sup>/=</sup>Λ /<sup>=</sup>\ Ζ \ ζ<sup>/</sup>\</td><td> --^000=0=0=00:</td>
<td>/ 0 ^ / - ^^^ / - ^ / ^ / = ^ / = ^ / ^ / - ^. I'</td><td></td>
<td>-oXcccccLP /</td><td>^ XRCÍRSOCSÍR</td>
<td>I<sub>2</sub>N <sup>0</sup></td><td></td>
<td></td><td><sup>h</sup>^ Y<sup>n</sup>^ -O ^ c ^^<sub>x</sub>^<sub>Xs / Xz</sub>^==<sub>XkX</sub>=== x ^^<sup>NH</sup> k / x / '· --- ^ / 0 / ^ / 0 == / ^ / - ^ /</td>
Although not all diastereomers for a lipid are shown, one aspect of the present invention is to provide all diastereomers, and as such lipids chirally
<img file="MX338780B_D0043.tif" />
pure and diastereomerically enriched are also part of the present invention.
In one modality, R<sub>3</sub> it is a linker-ligand.
In particular embodiments, the lipids of the present invention are cationic lipids. As used herein, the term cationic lipid is intended to include those lipids that have one or two fatty acids or fatty alkyl chains and a major amino group (including an alkylamino or dialkylamino group) that can be protonated to form a cationic lipid at Physiological pH. In some embodiments, a cationic lipid is known as an amino lipid.
Other cationic lipids would include those that have alternative fatty acid groups or other dialkylamino groups, including those in which the alkyl substituents are different (eg, N-ethyl-N-methylamino-, N-propyl-N-ethylamino- and the like) . For those modalities where Ri and R2 are both acyl or long chain alkyl groups, these can be the same or different. In general, lipids (eg, a cationic lipid) that have fewer saturated acyl chains are more easily sized, particularly when complexes are sized below 0.3 microns, for the purpose of filter sterilization. Cationic lipids containing unsaturated fatty acids are typical * 7
<img file="MX338780B_D0044.tif" />
ÍNSTí'P.íTú; o
FROM LA? K'.j, \! NU'j7í \: AL
<img file="MX338780B_D0045.tif" />
with carbon chain length in the range of Cio to C<sub>2</sub>o Other scaffolds can also be used to separate the amino group (eg, the amino group from the cationic lipid) and the fatty acid or fatty alkyl portion of the cationic lipid. Suitable scaffolds are known to those of skill in the art.
In some embodiments, the cationic lipids of the present invention have at least one protonable or unprotonable group, for the lipid to be positively charged at or below physiological pH (eg pH 7.4), and neutral at a second pH, preferably at or above physiological pH. Such lipids are also known as cationic lipids. It will be understood, of course, that the addition or removal of protons as a function of pH is an equilibrium process, and that the reference to a charged or neutral lipid refers to the nature of the predominant species and does not require that all lipid is present in charged or neutral form. Lipids that have more than one protonable or deprotonatable group or that are zwitterionic are not excluded from use in the invention.
In some embodiments, the protonatable lipids (i.e., cationic lipids) according to the invention have a pKa of the protonatable group in the range of about 4 to about 11. Typically, the lipids will have a pKa of about 4 to about 7, eg between about 5
<img file="MX338780B_D0046.tif" />
<img file="MX338780B_D0047.tif" />
and 7, such as between about 5.5 and 6.8, when incorporated into lipid particles. Such lipids will be cationic at a lower pH formulation stage, while the particles will largely (but not completely) neutralize at the surface at physiological pH around pH
7.4. One of the benefits of a pKa in the range of around 4 and 7 is that at least some nucleic acid associated with the outer surface of the particle will lose its electrostatic interaction at physiological pH and will be removed by simple dialysis; thereby greatly reducing the particle's susceptibility to purification. Measurements of lipid pKa within lipid particles can be carried out, for example, using the 2- (p-toluidino) -6-naphthalene (TNS) sulfonic acid fluorescent probe, using methods described in Cullis et al., ( 1986) Chem Phys Lipids 40, 127-144.
In one embodiment, the formulations of the invention are trapped by at least 75%, at least 80%, or at least
90%.
In one embodiment, the formulations of the invention additionally comprise an apolipoprotein. As used herein, the term apolipoprotein or lipoprotein refers to apolipoproteins known to those skilled in the art, and variants and fragments thereof, and apolipoprotein agonists, analogs
<img file="MX338780B_D0048.tif" />
fragments thereof described below.
Suitable apolipoproteins include, but are not limited to, ApoA-I, ApoA-II, ApoA-IV, ApoA-V, and ApoE and active polymorphic forms, isoforms, variants, and mutants as well as fragments or truncated forms thereof. In some embodiments, apolipoprotein is a thiol-containing apolipoprotein. Thiol-containing apolipoprotein refers to an apolipoprotein, variant, fragment, or isoform that contains at least one cysteine residue. The most common thiol-containing apolipoproteins are ApoA-I Milano (ApoA-I<sub>M</sub>) and ApoA-I Paris (ApoA-I<sub>P</sub>) containing a cysteine residue (Jia et al., 2002, Biochem.
Biophys. Res. Comm. 297: 206-13; Bielicki and Oda, 2002,
Biochemistry 41: 2089-96). ApoA-II, ApoE2 and ApoE3 are also thiol-containing apolipoproteins. Isolated ApoE and / or active fragments and polypeptide analogs thereof, including recombinantly produced forms thereof, are described in US Patent Nos. 5,672,685; 5,525,472; 5,473,039; 5,182,364; 5,177,189; 5,168,045;
5,116,739; the descriptions of which are incorporated herein by reference. ApoE3 is described in Weisgraber, et al., Human E apoprotein heterogeneity: cysteine-arginine interchanges in the amino acid sequence of the apo-E isoforms, J. Biol. Chem. (1981) 256: 9077-9083; and Rail, et al., Structural basis for receptor binding heterogeneity of
IMPI
ΙΝ: Τ; -; 'ΤΠ ΜΚΙΓΛΝ' i PE LA f lid, '11 i
INUU.I IIIAL apolipoprotein E from type III hyperlipoproteinemic subjects, Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. (1982) 79: 4696-4700. See also GenBank accession number K00396.
In some embodiments, the apolipoprotein may be in its mature form, as a preproapolipoprotein, or as a proapolipoprotein. The homo- and heterodimers (when possible) of mature ApoA-I (Duverger et al., 1996, Arterioscler. Thromb. Vaso. Biol. 16 (12): 1424-29),
<td>ΑροΑ-I</td><td>Milano</td><td>(Klon</td><td>et</td><td>al., 2000,</td><td>Biophys. J. 79: (3</td><td> )1679-87;</td>
<td colspan="2">10 Franceschini</td><td>et al.</td><td>t</td><td colspan="2">1985, J. Biol. Chem. 260:</td><td> 1632-35),</td>
<td>ΑροΑ-I</td><td>Paris</td><td>(Daum</td><td>et</td><td>al., 1999,</td><td>J. Mol. Med. 77</td><td> :614-22),</td>
ApoA-II (Shelness et al., 1985, J. Biol. Chem. 260 (14): 863746; Shelness et al., 1984, J. Biol. Chem. 259 (15): 9929-35), ApoA-IV (Duverger et al., 1991, Euro. J. Biochem. 201 (2): 37315 83), and ApoE (McLean et al., 1983, J. Biol. Chem.
258 (14): 8993-9000) can also be used within the scope of the invention.
In some embodiments, the apolipoprotein may be a fragment, variant, or isoform of the apolipoprotein. The term "fragment" refers to any apolipoprotein that has a shorter amino acid sequence than that of a native apolipopoprotein and whose fragment retains the activity of the native apolipoprotein, including lipid binding properties. By variant is meant substitutions or alterations in the amino acid sequences of the
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF PROPERTY
INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX338780B_D0049.tif" />
apolipoprotein, whose substitutions or alterations, eg, additions and deletions of amino acid residues do not suppress the activity of native apolipoprotein, including lipid binding properties. Accordingly, a variant may comprise a protein or peptide having an amino acid sequence substantially identical to a native apolipoprotein provided herein in which one or more amino acid residues have been conservatively replaced with chemically similar amino acids. Examples of conservative substitutions include substitution of at least one hydrophobic residue such as isoleucine, valine, leucine, or methionine for another. In the same way, the present invention contemplates, for example, the substitution of at least one hydrophilic residue such as, for example, between arginine and lysine, between glutamine and asparagine and between glycine and serine (see US Patent Nos. 6,004,925, 6,037,323 and 6,046,166). The term isoform refers to a protein that has the same function, major or partial and similar, identical or partial sequence, and may or may not be the product of the same gene and usually tissue-specific (see Weisgraber 1990, J. Lipid Res. 31 (8): 1503-11; Hixson and Powers 1991, J. Lipid Res. 32 (9): 1529-35; Lackner et al., 1985, J. Biol. Chem. 260 (2): 703-6; Hoeg et al., 1986, J. Biol. Chem. 261 (9): 3911-4, - Gordon et al., 1984, J. Biol.
Chem. 259 (l): 468-74; Powell et al., 1987, Cell 50 (6): 831-40;
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF PROPERTY
INDUSTRY*
<img file="MX338780B_D0050.tif" />
Aviram et al., 1998, Arterioscler. Thromb. Go Biol.
18 (10): 1617-2 4, - Aviram et al., 1998, J. Clin. Invest. 101 (8): 1581-90, - Billecke et al., 2000, Drug Metab. Dispos. 28 (11): 1335-42, - Draganov et al., 2000, J. Biol. Chem.
275 (43): 33435-42, - Steinmetz and Utermann 1985, J. Biol. Chem.
260 (4): 2258-64, - Widler et al., 1980, J. Biol. Chem.
255 (21): 10464-71, - Dyer et al., 1995, J. Lipid Res. 36 (1): 808; Sacre et al., 2003, FEBS Lett. 540 (1-3): 181-7, - Weers, et al., 2003, Biophys. Chem. 100 (1-3): 481-92, - Gong et al., 2002,
J. Biol. Chem. 277 (33): 29919-26, - Ohta et al., 1984, J. Biol. Chem. 259 (23): 14888-93 and US Patent No. 6, 372,886).
In some embodiments, the methods and compositions of the present invention include the use of an apolipoprotein chimeric construct. For example, a chimeric construct of an apolipoprotein may be comprised of an apolipoprotein domain with high lipid binding capacity associated with an apolipoprotein domain that contains ischemic reperfusion protective properties. A chimeric construct of an apolipoprotein can be a construct that includes separate regions within an apolipoprotein (i.e., homologous construct) or a chimeric construct can be a construct that includes separate regions between different apolipoproteins (i.e., constructs
ΙΜΡΙ
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF PROPERTY
INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX338780B_D0051.tif" />
heterologous). Compositions comprising a chimeric construct may also include segments that are apolipoprotein variants or segments designed to have a specific character (eg, lipid binding, receptor binding, enzymatic, enzyme activation, antioxidant, or reduction-oxidation property. ) (see
Weisgraber 1990, J. Lipid Res. 31 (8): 1503-11, - Hixson and
Powers 1991, J. Lipid Res. 32 (9): 1529-35; Lackner et al., 1985, J. Biol. Chem. 260 (2): 703-6; Hoeg et al, 1986, J. Biol.
Chem. 261 (9): 3911-4, - Gordon et al., 1984, J. Biol. Chem.
259 (1): 468-74, - Powell et al., 1987, Cell 50 (6): 831-40; Aviram et al., 1998, Arterioscler. Thromb. Cup. Biol. 18 (10): 161724; Aviram et al., 1998, J. Clin. Invest. 101 (8): 1581-90, Billecke et al., 2000, Drug Metab. Dispos. 28 (11): 1335-42; Draganov et al., 2000, J. Biol. Chem. 275 (43): 33435-42, Steinmetz and Utermann 1985, J. Biol. Chem. 260 (4): 2258-64, Widler et al., 1980, J Biol. Chem. 255 (21): 10464-71; Dyer et al., 1995, J. Lipid Res. 36 (1): 80-8, - Sorenson et al., 1999, Arterioscler. Thromb. Cup. Biol. 19 (9): 2214-25, - Palgunachari 1996, Arterioscler. Throb. Cup. Biol. 16 (2): 328-38: Thurberg et al., J. Biol. Chem. 271 (11): 6062-70, - Dyer 1991, J. Biol. Chem. 266 (23): 150009-15, - Hill 1998, J. Biol. Chem.
273(47):30979-84).
The apolipoproteins used in the invention also include synthetic, recombinant apolipoproteins,
Λ,
IMPI ·, -MEXICAN INSTITUTE
OF THE PROPERTY L 'λ
INDUSTRIAL '·' semi-synthetic or purified. The methods for obtaining apolipoproteins or equivalents thereof used in the invention are well known in the art. For example, apolipoproteins can be separated from plasma or natural products by, for example, density gradient centrifugation or immunoaffinity chromatography, or produced synthetically, semi-synthetically, or using recombinant DNA techniques known to those skilled in the art (see, eg, Mulugeta et al., 1998, J. Chromatogr. 798 (12): 83-90; Chung et al., 1980, J. Lipid Res. 21 (3): 284-91; Cheung et al., 1987, J. Lipid Res. 28 (8): 913-29; Persson, et al., 1998, J. Chromatogr. 711: 97-109; US Patent Nos. 5,059,528, 5,834,596, 5,876,968 and 5,721,114; and PCT publications WO 86/04920 and WO 87/02062).
The apolipoproteins used in the invention additionally include apolipoprotein agonists such as peptides and peptide analogs that mimic the activity of ApoA-I, ApoA-I Milano (ApoA-I<sub>M</sub>), ApoA-I Paris (ΑροΑ-Ip), ApoA-II, ApoA-IV and ApoE. For example, the apolipoprotein may be any of those described in US Patent Nos. 6,004,925, 6,037,323, 6,046,166 and 5,840,688, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.
The peptides or peptide analogs of apolipoprotein agonists can be synthesized or manufactured using
<img file="MX338780B_D0052.tif" />
any technique for peptide synthesis known in the art including, eg, the techniques described in US Patent Nos. 6,004,925, 6,037,323, and 6,046,166. For example, peptides can be prepared using the solid phase synthesis technique initially described in Merrifield (1963, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 85: 21492154). Other peptide synthesis techniques can be found in Bodanszky et al., Peptide Synthesis, John Wiley & Sons, 2<sup>to</sup> Ed., (1976) and other references available to those skilled in the art. A summary of polypeptide synthesis techniques can be found in Stuart and Young, Solid Phase Peptide. Synthesis, Pierce Chemical Company, Rockford, lll., (1984). Peptides can also be synthesized by solution methods described in The
Proteins, Vol. II, 3d Ed., Neurath et. al., Eds., p. 105-237,
Academic Press, New York, NY (1976). Suitable protecting groups for use in different peptide syntheses are described in the aforementioned texts as well as in McOmie, Protective Groups in Organic Chemistry, Plenum Press, New York, NY (1973). The peptides of the present invention can also be prepared by chemical or enzymatic cleavage from larger portions of, for example, apolipoprotein AI. In certain embodiments, the apolipoprotein can be a mixture of apolipoproteins. In one embodiment, the apolipoprotein can be a homogeneous mixture, that is, a single type of apolipoprotein. In another embodiment, the apolipoprotein may be a heterogeneous mixture of
ΙΜΡΙ ^> ^
INSTITUTO MS UTA D £ LA POCA l.'ÍJL ',;
V · apolipoproteins, that is, a mixture of two more different apolipoproteins.
Modalities of heterogeneous mixtures of apolipoproteins can comprise, for example, a mixture of an apolipoprotein from an animal source and an apolipoprotein from a semi-synthetic source. In some embodiments, a heterogeneous mixture may comprise, for example, a mixture of ApoA-I and ApoA-I Milano. In some embodiments, a heterogeneous mixture may comprise, for example, a mixture of ApoA-I Milano and ApoA-I Paris. Mixtures suitable for use in methods and compositions of the invention will be apparent to one skilled in the art.
If apolipoprotein is obtained from natural sources, it can be obtained from an animal plant source.
If the apolipoprotein is obtained from an animal source, the apolipoprotein can be of any species. In some embodiments, the apolipoprotein can be obtained from an animal source. In some embodiments, apolipoprotein can be obtained from a human source. In preferred embodiments of the invention, the apolipoprotein comes from the same species as the individual to whom the apolipoprotein is administered.
ΙΜΡΪ
MEXICAN INSTITUTE Y-> DE LA PROPIEDAD, V-χ.
INDUSTRIAL '*' n® Ull — vy
Lipid particles
The present invention also provides lipid particles comprising one or more of the cationic lipids described above. Lipid particles include, but are not limited to, liposomes. As used herein, a liposome is a structure that has lipid-containing membranes that enclose an aqueous interior. Liposomes can have one or more lipid membranes. The invention contemplates both unilamellar liposomes, termed unilamellar and multilamellar liposomes, termed multilamellar. By complexing with nucleic acids, the lipid particles can also be lipopled, which are composed of cationic lipid bilayers interspersed between layers of DNA, as described, eg, in Felgner, Scientific American.
The lipid particles of the present invention may additionally comprise one or more additional lipids and / or other components such as cholesterol. Other lipids can be included in the liposome compositions of the present invention for various effects, such as to prevent lipid oxidation or to bind ligands to the liposome surface. Any amount of lipids can be present in liposomes of the present invention, including unfriendly, neutral, cationic and anionic lipids. Such lipids can be used alone or in
IMPI
MIXICAN INSTITUTE OF THE fXOPIÜJAO
INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX338780B_D0053.tif" />
combination. Specific examples of additional lipid components that may be present are described below.
Additional components that may be present in a lipid particle of the present invention include bilayer stabilizing components such as polyamide oligomers (see, eg, US Patent No. 6,320,017), peptides, proteins, detergents, lipid derivatives, such as PEG coupled to phosphatidylethanolamine and PEG conjugated to ceramides (see, US Patent No. 5,885,613).
In particular embodiments, the lipid particles include one or more than a second amino lipid or cationic lipid, a neutral lipid, a sterol, and a lipid that is selected to reduce the aggregation of lipid particles during formation, which may result from spherical stabilization. of particles that prevents charge-induced aggregation during formation.
Examples of lipids that reduce particle aggregation during formation include polyethylene glycol (PEG) modified lipids, Gml monosialoganglioside, and polyamide (PAO) oligomers such as (described in US Patent No. 6,320,017). Other hydrophilic and spherical barrier uncharged portion compounds that prevent aggregation during formulation, such as PEG, Gml '> I!<sup>;</sup> UT U .MEXICANO CE IA INDUSTRIAL PROFISDAD or ATTA, can also be coupled to lipids for use as in the methods and compositions of the invention. ATTA lipids are described, eg, in US Patent No. 6,320,017, and PEG lipid conjugates are described, eg, in US Patent Nos. 5,820,873, 5,534,499, and 5,885,613. Typically, the concentration of the lipid component selected to reduce aggregation is around 1 to 15% (per lipid mole percent).
Specific examples of PEG-modified lipids (or lipid-polyoxyethylene conjugates) that are useful in the present invention may have various anchoring lipid portions to secure the PEG portion to the surface of the lipid vesicle. Examples of suitable PEG-modified lipids include PEG-modified phosphatidylethanolamine and phosphatidic acid, PEG-ceramide conjugates (eg. , PEG-CerC14 or PEG-CerC20) described in USSN 08 / 486,214 co-pending, incorporated herein by reference, PEG-modified dialkylamines and PEG-modified 1,2-diacyloxypropane-3-amines. PEG-modified diacylglycerols and dialkylglycerols are particularly preferred.
In embodiments where a spherically large portion such as PEG or ATTA is conjugated to a lipid anchor, the selection of the lipid anchor depends on what type of association the conjugate will have with the lipid particle.
EU MEXICAN INSTITUTE JA PROPERTY
INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX338780B_D0054.tif" />
(mw2 000) will remain
It is well known that mPEG diastearoylphosphatidylethanolamine (PEG-DSPE) associated with a liposome until the particle is removed from circulation, possibly within days. Other conjugates, such as PEG-CerC20 have resistance capabilities. However, PEG-CerC14 rapidly exchanges from the formulation after exposure to serum, with Ti / 2 less than 60 min. in some trials. As illustrated in US Patent Application SN 08 / 486,214, at least three characteristics influence the rate of change: acyl chain length, acyl chain saturation, and size of the spherical barrier major group. Compounds having suitable variations of these characteristics can be useful for the invention. For some therapeutic applications it may be preferred that the PEG-modified lipid rapidly disappear from the nucleic acid-lipid particle in vivo and therefore the PEG-modified lipid will possess relatively short lipid anchors. In other therapeutic applications, it may be preferred that the nucleic acid-lipid particle exhibit a longer plasma circulation life and therefore the PEG-modified lipid will possess relatively longer lipid anchors.
It should be noted that compounds that prevent aggregation do not necessarily require lipid conjugation.
MP<sup>1</sup>
<img file="MX338780B_D0055.tif" />
INDUSTRIAL free or ATTA free to prevent aggregation.
to function properly. PEG solution may be sufficient to
If the particles are stable after formulation, PEG or ATTA can be dialyzed prior to administration to a subject.
The neutral lipids, being present in the lipid particle, can be any of a number of lipid species that exist either in neutral or uncharged zwitterionic form at physiological pH. Such lipids include, for example, diacylphosphatidylcholine, diacylphosphatidylethanolamine, ceramide, sphingomyelin, dihydrosphingomyelin, cephalin, and cerebrosides. The selection of neutral lipids for use in the particles described herein is generally guided by taking into account, eg, the size of the liposome and the stability of the liposomes in the bloodstream. Preferably, the neutral lipid component is a lipid having two acyl groups (ie, diacylphosphatidylcholine and diacylphosphatidylethanolamine). Lipids having different acyl chain groups of various chain lengths and degree of saturation are available or can be isolated or synthesized by well known techniques. In one group, lipids containing saturated fatty acids with carbon chain lengths in the range of Cio to C20 are preferred · In another group, lipids with acids are used
<img file="MX338780B_D0056.tif" />
INJTIT'JTO MEXICANO OÉ IA
IfOUSTíMt with string lengths of
C20 · Additionally, mixtures of carbon mono or diunsaturated fatty acid chains in the Cio range can be used to use lipids that have saturated and unsaturated fats. Preferably, the neutral lipids used in the present invention are DOPE, DSPC, POPC, DPPC or any related phosphatidylcholine. The neutral lipids useful in the present invention can also be composed of sphingomyelin, dihydrosphingomyelin, or phospholipids with other major groups, such as serine and inositol.
The sterol component of the lipid mixture, when present, can be any of those sterols conventionally used in the preparation of liposomes, lipid vesicles or lipid particles. A preferred sterol is cholesterol.
Other cationic lipids having a net positive charge of around physiological pH, in addition to those specifically described above, can also be included in lipid particles of the present invention. Such cationic lipids include, but are not limited to, N, N-dioleyl-N, N-dimethylammonium chloride (DODAC); N- (2,3-dioleyloxy) propyl-N, NN-triethylammonium chloride (DOTMA); N, N-distearyl-N, N-dimethylammonium bromide (DDAB); N- (2,3-dioleoyloxy) propyl) -N, N, N-trimethylammonium chloride (DOTAP); 1,2-Dioleyloxy-3-trimethylaminopropane chloride salt ί ΜΡΙ 0 ^ 2 ^
MÍXÍCAW INSTITUTE Κί -'- ϊίΒ *? ' "O / tS
FROM THE i'Ha.'IEOAJ '<«> -' industry :, (DOTAP.Cl); 3Q- (N- (N ', N'-dimethylaminoethane) carbamoyl) cholesterol (DC-Chol), N- (l (2,3-dioleyloxy) propyl) -N-2- (sperminecarboxamido) ethyl) -N trifluoroacetate , Ndimethylammonium (DOSPA), carboxyperm
1,2-dyleoyl-sn-31,2-dioleoyl-3N-dimethyl-2,35 dioctadecylamidoglycyl (DOGS), phosphoethanolamine (DOPE), dimethylammonium propane (DODAP), N, dioleyloxy) propylamine (DODMA) and ammonium bromide N (1,2-dimyristyloxyprop-3-yl) -N, N-dimethyl-N-hydroxyethyl (DMRIE). Additionally, a number of commercial cationic lipid preparations such as, for example, LIPOFECTIN (including DOTMA and DOPE, available from GIBCO / BRL) and LIPOFECTAMINE (comprising DOSPA and DOPE, available from GIBCO / BRL) can be used. In particular embodiments, a cationic lipid is an amino lipid.
Anionic lipids suitable for use in lipid particles of the present invention include, but are not limited to, phosphatidylglycerol, cardiolipin, diacylphosphatidylserine, diacylphosphatidyl acid, N-dodecanoylolyl-phosphatidylethanoyl-phosphatidylethanolamine, phosphatidylethanolamine, phosphatidylethanolamine, phosphatidylethanolamine. neutral lipid-bound anion modifying groups.
In numerous embodiments, amphipathic lipids are included in lipid particles of the present invention.
ΜΡΙ
-UT'TUTO MEXICANO
OF INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY
<img file="MX338780B_D0057.tif" />
sphingolipids. sphingomyelin, phosphatidylserine, palmitoyloleoyl lysophosphatidylethanolamine, dioleoylphosphatidylcholine, dilinoleoylphosphatidi1choline.
Unfriendly lipids refer to any suitable material, where the hydrophobic portion of the lipid material is routed to the hydrophobic phase, while the hydrophilic portion is routed to the aqueous phase. Such compounds include, but are not limited to, representative phospholipids, aminolipids, and phospholipids include phosphatidylcholine, phosphatidylethanolamine, phosphatidylinositol, phosphatidic acid, phosphatidylcholine, lysophosphatidylcholine, distearoylphosphatylcholine.
Other phosphorous-free compounds can also be used, such as sphingolipids, families of glycosphingolipids, diacylglycerols, and acyloxy acids. Additionally, such unfriendly lipids can be easily mixed with other lipids, such as triglycerides and sterols.
Programmable fusion lipids are also suitable for inclusion in the lipid particles of the present invention. Such lipid particles have little tendency to fuse with cell membranes and manage their payload until a certain signal event occurs. This allows the lipid particle to distribute more evenly after injection into an organism or disease site before it begins to fuse with cells.
<img file="MX338780B_D0058.tif" />
* iX! CAi <; r- Hi
LA rs-T'IEDAj Industrial CV K.Í'-tÁ '- «V
The signal event may be, for example, a change in pH, temperature, ionic environment, or time. In the latter case, a hidden or fusion-retardant component, such as an ATTA-lipid conjugate or a PEG-lipid conjugate, may simply be exchanged from the lipid particle membrane over time. By the time the lipid particle is properly distributed in the body, it has lost enough hidden agent to be fusogenic. With other signal events, it is desired to choose a signal that is associated with the target cell or disease site, such as increased temperature at the site of inflammation. In certain embodiments, it is desired to target the lipid particles of the present invention using target portions that are specific for a tissue or cell type. Targeting of lipid particles using various target portions, such as ligands, cell surface receptors, glycoproteins, vitamins (eg, riboflavin), and monoclonal antibodies has been previously described (see eg, US Patent Nos. 4,957,773 and 4,603,044). . The target portions may comprise the entire protein or fragments thereof. Target mechanisms generally require the target agents to position themselves on the surface of the lipid particle such that the target moiety is available to interact with the target, eg, a receptor for
IΜ Ρ ϊ „
ΙΝΪΓ, Γ., ΎΟ Μ? ·.-ΧΛΝΟ ^. <* »» »£ 5» * DE ÍA? .! EDAP V
INbUS I X1AL cell surface. Various target agents and methods are known and available in the art, including those described, eg, in Sapra, P. and Alien, TM, Prog. Lipid Res. 42 (5): 439-62 (2003); and Abra, RM et al., J. Liposome Res. 12: 1-3, (2002).
The use of lipid particles, i.e. liposomes, with a surface coating of hydrophilic polymer chains, such as polyethylene glycol (PEG) chains, has been proposed for targeting (Alien, et al., Biochimica et Biophysica Acta 1237: 99-108 (1995); DeFrees, et al., Journal of the American Chemistry Society 118: 61016104 (1996); Blume, et al., Biochimica et Biophysica Acta
1149: 180-184 (1993); Klibanov, et al., Journal of Liposome Research 2: 321-334 (1992); US Patent No. 5,013,556; Zalipsky, Bioconjugate Chemistry 4: 296-299 (1993); Zalipsky, FEBS Letters 353: 71-74 (1994); Zalipsky, in Stealth Liposomes Chapter 9 (Lasic and Martin, Eds) CRC Press, Boca Raton Fl (1995). In one approach, a ligand, such as an antibody, to direct the lipid particle binds to a major polar group of lipids that form the lipid particle. In another approach, the target ligand binds to the distal ends of the PEG chains to form the hydrophilic polymeric coating (Klibanov, et al., Journal of Liposome Research 2: 321-334 (1992); Kirpotin et al., FEBS Letters 388: 115-118 (1996)).
<img file="MX338780B_D0059.tif" />
Standard methods can be used for coupling of target agents. For example, phosphatidylethanolamine, which can be activated for binding of target agents, or derivatized lipophilic compounds, such as a lipid derivatized bleomycin, can be used. Antibody-directed liposomes can be constructed using, for example, liposomes incorporating protein A (see,
Renneisen, et al., J. Bio. Chem., 265: 16337-16342 (1990) and
Leonetti, et al., Proc. Nati. Acad. Sci. (USA), 87: 2448-2451 (1990). Other examples of antibody conjugation are described in US Patent No. 6,027,726, the demonstrations of which are incorporated herein by reference. Examples of target portions can also include other proteins, specific to cellular components, including antigens associated with neoplasms or tumors. Proteins used as target portions can bind to liposomes through covalent bonds (see Heath, Covalent Attachment of Proteins to Liposomes, 149 Methods in Enzymology 111-119 (Academic Press, Inc. 1987)). Other target methods include the biotin-avidin system.
In an exemplary embodiment, the lipid particle comprises a mixture of a cationic lipid of the present invention, neutral lipids (other than cationic lipids), a sterol (eg, cholesterol), and a lipid modified with
<img file="MX338780B_D0060.tif" />
PEG (eg, a PEG-DMG or PEG-DMA). In some embodiments, the lipid mixture consists of or consists essentially of a cationic lipid of the present invention, a neutral lipid, cholesterol, and a PEG-modified lipid. In further preferred embodiments, the lipid particle consists of or consists essentially of the above lipid mixture in molar ratios of about 20-70% amino lipid: 545% neutral lipid: 20-55% cholesterol: 0.5-15% lipid modified by PEG.
In one embodiment, the lipid particle comprises at least two lipids described herein. For example, a mixture of cationic lipids in a lipid particle can be used, such that the mixture comprises 20-60% of the total lipid content in molar / molar terms.
In particular embodiments, the lipid particle consists of or consists essentially of a cationic lipid chosen from Table 1, DSPC, Col, and either PEG-DMG or PEG-DMA, eg, in a molar ratio of about 20-60 % cationic lipid: 5-25% DSPC: 25-55% Col: 0.5-15% PEG-DMG or PEG-DMA. In particular embodiments, the molar lipid ratio is approximately 40/10/40/10 (mol% cationic lipid / DSPC / Col / PEG-DMG or PEG-DMA), 35/15/40/10 (mol% cationic lipid / DSPC / Col / PEG-DMG or PEG-DMA) or 52/13/30/5 (mol% of cationic lipid / DSPC / Col / PEG-DMG or PEG-DMA). In another group of modalities, the neutral lipid, DSPC, in these
IMPI ¢ 7¾
KTITUTO MFXi-ANO »DE LA PROílLDAij INDUSTRIAL compositions is replaced with POPC, DPPC, DOPE or SM.
Lipid particle-therapeutic agent compositions and formulations
The present invention includes compositions comprising a lipid particle of the present invention and an active agent, where the active agent is associated with the lipid particle. In particular embodiments, the active agent is a therapeutic agent. In particular embodiments, the active agent is encapsulated within an aqueous interior of the lipid particle. In other embodiments, the active agent is present within one or more lipid layers of the lipid particle. In other embodiments, the active agent is attached to the outer or inner lipid surface of a lipid particle. Fully encapsulated as used herein indicates that the nucleic acid in the particles does not degrade significantly after exposure to serum or a nuclease assay that would degrade free nucleic acids considerably. In a fully encapsulated system, less than 25% of the nucleic acid in the particle is preferably degraded in a treatment that would normally degrade 100% of the free nucleic acid, more preferably less than 10% and even more preferably less than 5% of the nucleic acid from the
IMPI
<img file="MX338780B_D0061.tif" />
particle. Alternatively, complete encapsulation can be determined by an Oligreen® assay. Oligreen® is an ultra sensitive fluorescent nucleic acid strain for quantifying oligonucleotides and single chain DNA in solution (available from Invitrogen Corporation, Carlsbad,
CA). Fully encapsulated also suggests that the particles are stable in serum, which means that they do not rapidly decompose into their component parts when administered in vivo.
Active agents, as used herein, include any molecule or compound capable of exerting a desired effect on a cell, tissue, organ, or subject. Such effects can be biological, physiological or cosmetic, for example. Active agents can be of any type of molecule or compound, including, eg, nucleic acids, peptides, and polypeptides, including, eg, antibodies, such as, eg, polyclonal antibodies, monoclonal antibodies, antibody fragments; humanized antibodies, recombinant antibodies, recombinant human antibodies and Primatízed ™ antibodies, cytokines, growth factors, apoptotic factors, differentiation-inducing factors, cell surface receptors and their ligands; hormones and small molecules, including molecules or small organic compounds.
In one embodiment, the active agent is an agent
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY
<img file="MX338780B_D0062.tif" />
therapeutic or a salt or derivative thereof. Derivatives of therapeutic agents can be therapeutically active in themselves or can be prodrugs, which become active upon further modification. Accordingly, in one embodiment, a therapeutic agent derivative retains some or all of the therapeutic activity compared to an unmodified agent, while in another embodiment, a therapeutic agent derivative lacks therapeutic activity.
In various modalities, therapeutic agents include any therapeutically effective agent or drug, such as anti-inflammatory compounds, antidepressants, stimulants, pain relievers, antibiotics, birth control medications, antipyretics, vasodilators, antiangiogens, cytovascular agents, transduction inhibitors of signals, cardiovascular drugs, eg, antiarrhythmic agents, vasoconstrictors, hormones, and spheroids.
In certain embodiments, the therapeutic agent is an oncological drug, which may also be referred to as an antitumor drug, an anticancer drug, a tumor drug, an antineoplastic agent, or the like. Examples of oncological drugs that can be used in accordance with the invention include, but are not limited to, adriamycin, alkeran, allopurinol, altretamine, amifostine, anastrozole, araC, arsenic trioxide, azathioprine, bexarotene, biCNU, bleomycin, busulfan! '
ΜΡί • Mexican TUTO ¡> F LA PHOFIF.LMO
INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX338780B_D0063.tif" />
intravenous, busulfan oral, capecitabine (Xeloda), carboplatin, carmustine, CCNU, celecoxib, chlorambucil, cisplatin, cladribine, cyclosporine A, cytosine arabinoside, daunorubicin, cytoxan, daunorubicin, dexametasona, dexametasona, dexametasona, doxorin epirubicin, estramustine, etoposide phosphate, etoposide and VP-16, exemestane, FK506, fludarabine, fluorouracil, 5-FU, gemcitabine (Gemzar), gemtuzumabozogamycin, goserelin acetate, hydrea, hydroxyurea, Idarubicin, Ifosfamide, Imatinib Mesylate, Interferon, Irinotecan (Camptostar, CPT-111), Letrozole, Leucovorin, Leustatin, Leuprolide, Levamisol, Litretinoin, Megastrol, Melphalan, L-PAM, Mesna, Methotrexate, Methoxsalem, Mitramycin, Mitramycin, Mitramycin, Mitramycin , nitrogen mustard, paclitaxel, pamidronate, Pegademasa, pentostatin, sodium porfimer, prednisone, rituxan, streptozocin, STI-571, tamoxifen, taxotere, temozolamide, teniposide, VM-26, topotecan (Hycamtin), toremifene, tretinoin, ATRA, valrubicin, velban, vinblastine, vincristine, VP16, and vinorelbine. Other examples of oncological drugs that can be used according to the invention are ellipticin and ellipticin analogs or derivatives, epothilones, intracellular kinase inhibitors and camptothecins.
Nucleic acid-lipid particles
Vj. γ b
- * Α- - * · - '' • Ι
MEXICAN INSTITUTE '-., .- i
OF PROPERTY í ¿Af
INDUSTRIAL
In some embodiments, the lipid particles of the present invention are associated with a nucleic acid, which results in a nucleic acid-lipid particle. In particular embodiments, the nucleic acid is completely encapsulated in the lipid particle. As used herein, the term nucleic acid is meant to include includes any oligonucleotide or polynucleotide.
nucleotides
Fragments that contain up to generally are called oligonucleotides, and longer fragments are called polynucleotides. In particular embodiments, the oligonucleotides of the present invention are 15-50 nucleotides in length.
In the context of the present invention, the terms polynucleotide and oligonucleotide refer to a polymer or oligomer of nucleotide or nucleoside monomers consisting of naturally-occurring base, sugar and inter-sugar linkages. The terms polynucleotide and oligonucleotide also include polymers or oligomers that comprise monomers that are not naturally occurring or portions thereof that function similarly. Often such modified or substituted oligonucleotides are preferred over native forms due to properties such as, for example, improved cellular absorption and increased stability in the presence of nucleases.
The nucleic acid that is present in a particle of
MiP
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY
<img file="MX338780B_D0064.tif" />
lipid-nucleic acid according to the present invention includes any known form of nucleic acid. The nucleic acids used herein can be single stranded DNA or RNA or double stranded DNA or RNA or DNA-RNA hybrids. Examples of double-stranded DNA include structural genes, genes including control and termination regions, and self-replicating systems such as viral or plasmid DNA. Examples of double stranded RNA include siRNA and other RNA interference reagents. Single-stranded nucleic acids include, eg, antisense oligonucleotides, ribozymes, microRNAs, and triple-forming oligonucleotides. The nucleic acid that is present in a lipid-nucleic acid particle of this invention can include one or more of the oligonucleotide modifications described below.
The nucleic acids of the present invention can have different lengths, which generally depend on the particular form of the nucleic acid. For example, in particular modalities, the plasmids or genes can be about 1,000 to 100,000 nucleotide residues in length. In particular embodiments, the oligonucleotides can range from about 10 to 100 nucleotides in length. In several related embodiments, the single-stranded, double-stranded, and triple-stranded oligonucleotides can vary in length from about 10
ΜΡΙ
ΊΤυΤΟ MEXICAN OE THE PROPERTY
INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX338780B_D0065.tif" />
<td colspan="2">and around</td><td>of</td><td>50 nucleotides,</td><td>between</td><td>around</td><td>of</td><td> 20</td><td>and</td>
<td>around</td><td>of</td><td> 50</td><td>nucleotides,</td><td>between</td><td>around</td><td>of</td><td> 15</td><td>and</td>
<td>around</td><td>of</td><td> 30</td><td>nucleotides,</td><td>between</td><td>around</td><td>of</td><td> 20</td><td>and</td>
about 30 nucleotides in length.
In particular embodiments, the oligonucleotide (or a chain thereof) of the present invention specifically hybridizes with or is complementary to a target polynucleotide. Completely hybridizable and specifically are terms used to indicate a sufficient level of complementarity such that stable and specific binding occurs between the target DNA or RNA and the oligonucleotide. It is believed that an oligonucleotide does not need to be 100% complementary to its target nucleic acid sequence to be specifically hybridizable. An oligonucleotide is specifically hybridizable when the binding of the oligonucleotide to the target interferes with the normal functioning of the target molecule causing a loss of utility or expression thereof and there is a sufficient level of complementarity to avoid non-specific binding of the oligonucleotide to non-target sequences. under conditions where specific binding is desired, that is, under physiological conditions in the case of in vivo therapeutic treatment trials, or in the case of in vitro tests under conditions where the tests are conducted. Therefore, in other embodiments, this oligonucleotide includes 1, 2, or 3.
<img file="MX338780B_D0066.tif" />
base substitutions, eg. discrepancies, as compared to the region of a gene or mRNA sequence that it is specifically targeting or hybridizing to.
Nucleic acids from RNA interference
In particular embodiments, the nucleic acid-lipid particles of the present invention associate with RNA interference molecules (iRNA). RNA interference methods using IRNA molecules can be used to alter the expression of a gene or polynucleotide of interest. Small interfering RNA (siRNA) essentially replaced antisense ODN and ribozymes as the next generation of developing targeted oligonucleotide drugs.
SiRNAs are RNA duplexes typically 16-30 nucleotides long that can be associated with a cytoplasmic multiprotein complex known as iRNA-induced silencing complex (RISC). The RISC loaded with siRNA mediates the degradation of homologous mRNA transcripts, therefore, siRNA can be designed to reduce protein expression with high specificity. Unlike other antisense technologies, the function of siRNA through a natural mechanism evolved to control gene expression through non-coding RNA. This is generally considered the reason why their activity is more
<img file="MX338780B_D0067.tif" />
more potent in vitro and in vivo than antisense ODNs or ribozymes. A variety of iRNA reagents, including siRNA targeting clinically relevant targets, are currently in pharmaceutical development, as described in by e j. Fougerolles, A. et al., Nature Reviews
6:443-453 (2007).
While the first described iRNA molecules were RNA: RNA hybrids comprising both sense RNA and antisense RNA strands, it has now been shown that sense DNA: antisense RNA hybrids, sense RNA: antisense DNA hybrids and DNA: DNA hybrids are capable of mediating iRNA (Lamberton,
JS and Christian, AT, (2003) Molecular Biotechnology
24: 111-119). Therefore, the invention includes the use of iRNA molecules that comprise any of these different types of double-stranded molecules. Furthermore, it is understood that iRNA molecules can be used and introduced into cells in various ways. Accordingly, as used herein, iRNA molecules comprise any and all molecules capable of inducing an iRNA response in cells, including but not limited to double-stranded oligonucleotides that comprise two separate strands, this is, a sense filament and an antisense filament, eg. Small interference RNA (siRNA); a double-stranded oligonucleotide that
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF THE INDUSTRIAL PARTNERSHIP
<img file="MX338780B_D0068.tif" />
it comprises two separate filaments that are linked together by a non-nucleotidyl bond; oligonucleotides that comprise a hairpin loop of complementary sequences, which forms a double-stranded region, eg. shiRNA molecules and expression vectors expressing one or more polynucleotides capable of forming a double-stranded polynucleotide alone or in combination with another polynucleotide.
A single stranded siRNA compound as used herein is a siRNA compound consisting of a single molecule. It can include a double region formed by filament mating, eg, it can be or include a hairpin or girdle structure. Single chain siRNA compounds can be antisense to the target molecule.
A single chain siRNA compound may be long enough to enter the RISC and participate in the RISC-mediated cleavage of a target mRNA. A single stranded siRNA compound is at least 14 and in other embodiments at least 15, 20, 25, 29, 35, 40, or 50 nucleotides in length. In some embodiments, it is less than 200, 100, or 60 nucleotides in length.
Hairpin-like siRNA compounds will have a double region equal to or of at least 17, 18, 19, 29, 21, 22, 23, 24, or 25 nucleotide pairs. The double region will be equal to or less than 200, 100 or 50 in length. In some embodiments, the ranges for the double region are 15-30, 17-23, 19-23, and 21 nucleotide pairs in length. The fork may have surplus single filament or an odd terminal region. In some modalities, the surplus has 2-3
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OE INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY
<img file="MX338780B_D0069.tif" />
<td>nucleotides</td><td>of length.</td><td></td><td>In</td><td>some</td><td>modalities,</td><td>the</td>
<td>surplus se</td><td>found in</td><td>the</td><td>side</td><td>sense</td><td>fork</td><td>and</td>
<td>in some</td><td>modalities</td><td>in</td><td>the</td><td colspan="2">antisense side of</td><td>the</td>
fork.
A double-stranded siRNA compound as used herein, is a siRNA compound that includes more than one, in some cases two, strands where the interchain hybridization can form a region of double structure.
The antisense strand of a double-stranded siRNA compound can be equal to or at least 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 25, 29, 40, or 60 nucleotides in length. It can be equal to or less than 200, 100 or 50 nucleotides in length. Ranges can be 17 to 25, 19 to 23, and 19 to 21 nucleotides in length. As used herein, the term "antisense strand" means that the strand of a siRNA compound is sufficiently complementary to the target molecule, eg. an objective RNA.
The sense strand of a double-stranded siRNA compound can be equal to or at least 14, 15, 16,
17, 18, 19, 25, 29, 40 or 60 nucleotides in length. Can
<img file="MX338780B_D0070.tif" />
be equal to or less than 200, 100 or 50 nucleotides in length. Ranges can be 17 to 25, 19 to 23, and 19 to 21 nucleotides in length.
The double-stranded portion of a double-stranded siRNA compound can be equal to or at least 14,15,
16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 29, 40 or 60 nucleotide pairs in length. It can be equal to or less than 200,
100 or 50 nucleotide pairs in length. Ranges can be 15-30, 17-23, 19-23, and 19-21 nucleotide pairs in length.
In many embodiments, the siRNA compound is long enough to be cleaved by an endogenous molecule, eg, by Dicer, to produce smaller siRNA compounds, eg, siRNA agents. The sense and antisense filaments can be chosen such that the double-stranded siRNA compound includes a single strand or odd region at one or both ends of the molecule. Thus, a double-stranded siRNA compound can contain sense and antisense chains, arranged in pairs to contain a surplus, eg, one or two 5 'or 3' surpluses or a 3 'surplus of 1 nucleotides. Surpluses can result from one filament being longer than the other, or from two filaments of the same length being staggered. Some modalities will have at least a 3 'surplus. In one modality, both
Λ DI
V JL JL item
INRTITHTC MEXICANO PE THE INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY
<img file="MX338780B_D0071.tif" />
ends of a siRNA molecule will have a 3 'surplus.
In some embodiments, the surplus is 2 nucleotides.
In some embodiments, the length of the double region is between 15 and 30 or 18, 19, 20, 21, 22 and 23 nucleotides in length, eg, in the range of the ssiRNA compound discussed above. The ssiRNA compounds can resemble in length and structure to natural Dicer processed products from long dsiRNAs. Also included are modalities where the two chains of the ssiRNA compound are linked, eg, covalently linked. Hairpins or other single filament structures that provide the required dual filament region and a 3 'surplus are also encompassed by the invention.
The siRNA compounds described herein, including double-stranded siRNA compounds and single-stranded siRNA compounds can mediate silencing of a target RNA, eg, mRNA, eg, a transcript of a gene that encodes a protein. For convenience, such mRNA is also referred to herein as mRNA to be silenced. Such a gene is also called a target gene. In general, the RNA to be silenced is an endogenous gene or a pathogenic gene. In addition, non-mRNA RNAs, eg, tRNAs and viral RNAs, can be targeted. As used herein, the middle phrase iRNA is
<img file="MX338780B_D0072.tif" />
Ρ ·:. »
<img file="MX338780B_D0073.tif" />
refers to the ability to silence a target RNA in a specific sequence form. Without intending to limit yourself to
<td colspan="2">theory, it</td><td colspan="3">believe that silencing</td><td>uses</td><td>mechanisms</td><td>or</td>
<td>processes</td><td colspan="2">iRNA and an RNA</td><td>guide,</td><td>eg</td><td>a</td><td>compound</td><td>of</td>
<td>ssiRNA of</td><td>21 a</td><td colspan="2">23 nucleotides.</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td>
<td>In</td><td>a</td><td>modality,</td><td>the</td><td>compound</td><td>of</td><td>siRNA</td><td>is</td>
sufficiently complementary to a target RNA, eg, a target mRNA, such that the siRNA compound silences the production of a protein encoded by the target mRNA. In another embodiment, the siRNA compound is exactly complementary to a target RNA, eg, the hybrid of the target RNA compound and siRNA, for example to form a hybrid formed exclusively of Watson-Crick base pairs in the region of exact complementarity. A sufficiently complementary target RNA can include an internal region (eg, at least 10 nucleotides) that is exactly complementary to the target RNA. Furthermore, in some embodiments, the siRNA compound specifically discriminates a single nucleotide difference. In this case, the siRNA compound only mediates iRNA if the exact complementarity is in the region (eg, within 7 nucleotides of) the difference of a single nucleotide.
MicroRNA
<img file="MX338780B_D0074.tif" />
MicroRNAs (miRNAs) are a highly conserved class of small RNA molecules that are transcribed from DNA in plant and animal genomes but are not translated into proteins. Processed miRNAs are single-stranded RNA molecules, which have -17-25 nucleotide (nt) that are incorporated into the RNA-induced silencing complex (RISC) and have been identified as key regulators of cell development, proliferation, apoptosis, and differentiation . They are believed to play a role in regulating gene expression by binding to the 3 'untranslated region of specific mRNAs. RISC mediates down-regulation of gene expression through translational inhibition, transcriptional cleavage, or both. The
RISC is also involved in transcriptional silencing in the nucleus of a wide range of eukaryotes.
The number of miRNA sequences identified to date is numerous and increasing; Illustrative examples of these can be found, for example, in: miRBase: microRNA seguences, targets and gene nomenclature Griffiths-Jones S, Grocock RJ, van Dongen S, Bateman A, Enright AJ. NAR, 2006, 34, Database Issue, D140-D144; The microRNA Registry Griffiths-Jones S. NAR, 2004, 32, Database Issue, D109-D111; and also at http: / / microma. sanger. ac.uk/sequences/.
I Jví ΡI
INSTITUTO rMSXICA.'JO
PE INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY
<img file="MX338780B_D0075.tif" />
Antisense oligonucleotides
In one embodiment, a nucleic acid is an antisense oligonucleotide targeting a target polynucleotide. The term antisense or simply antisense oligonucleotide is intended to include oligonucleotides that are complementary to a targeted / targeted polynucleotide sequence. Antisense oligonucleotides are single strands of DNA or RNA that are complementary to a chosen sequence, eg. a target gene mRNA. Antisense oligonucleotides are believed to inhibit gene expression by binding to a complementary mRNA. Binding to the target mRNA can lead to inhibition of gene expression by either preventing translation of complementary mRNA filaments by binding to it or leading to degradation of the target mRNA. Antisense DNA can be used to target a specific, complementary RNA (coding or non-coding). If binding is performed this DNA / RNA hybrid can be degraded by the RNase H enzyme. In particular embodiments, antisense oligonucleotides contain from about 10 to about 50 nucleotides, more preferably from about 15 to about 30 nucleotides. . The term also encompasses antisense oligonucleotides that may not be exactly complementary to the desired target gene. Accordingly, the invention can be used in cases where the activities
IMP
<img file="MX338780B_D0076.tif" />
Specific non-targets are found with antisense or where an antisense sequence containing one or more incompatibilities with the target sequence is most preferred for a particular use.
Antisense oligonucleotides have been shown to be effective and targeted inhibitors of protein synthesis, and consequently can be used to specifically inhibit protein synthesis by a targeted gene. The efficacy of antisense oligonucleotides has been demonstrated to inhibit protein synthesis. For example, the synthesis of polygalactauronase and the type 2 muscarin acetylcholine receptor are inhibited by antisense oligonucleotides targeting their corresponding core RNA sequences (US Patent 5,739,119 and US Patent 5,759,829). Additional examples of antisense inhibition have been demonstrated with the cyclin nuclear protein, the multi-drug resistant gene (MDG1), ICAM-1, selectin E, STK-1, GABA receptor.<sub>to</sub> striatal and human EGF (Jaskulski et al., Science. 1988 Jun 10; 240 (4858): 1544-6; Vasanthakumar and Ahmed, Cancer Commun. 1989; 1 (4): 225-32; Peris et al., Brain Res Mol Brain Res. 1998 Jun 15; 57 (2): 310-20; US Patent 5,801,154; US Patent 5,789,573; US Patent 5,718,709 and US Patent 5,610,288). Furthermore, antisense constructs have also been described that
<img file="MX338780B_D0077.tif" />
MEXICAN INSTITUTE
DE LA ΡΒΩΙΊΕΟΛΓ »V inhibit and can be used to treat various abnormal cell proliferations, eg. cancer (US Patent 5,747,470; US Patent 5,591,317 and US Patent 5,783,683).
Methods for producing antisense oligonucleotides are known in the art and can be easily adapted to produce an antisense oligonucleotide that targets any polynucleotide sequence. Selection of specific antisense oligonucleotide sequences for a given target sequence is based on analysis of the chosen target sequence and determination of the secondary structure, T<sub>m</sub>, bond energy and relative stability. Antisense oligonucleotides can be selected based on their relative inability to form dimers, hairpins, or other secondary structures that would reduce or prohibit specific binding to the target mRNA in a host cell. Highly preferred target regions of mRNA include those regions at or near the AUG translation initiation codons and those sequences that are substantially complementary to 5 'regions of mRNA. These secondary structure analyzes and target site selection considerations can be carried out, for example, using v.4 of the OLIGO primer analysis software (Molecular Biology Insights) and / or the BLASTN 2.0.5 algorithm software ( Altschul et al.,
<img file="MX338780B_D0078.tif" />
MPi
INSTITUTO M.'XISA.ND 7A iA fRO'ir.-Aj?
'<sup>v</sup> JVD'S'OL
Nucleic Acids Res. 1997, 25 (17): 3389-402).
Antagomir
Antagomirs are RNA-like oligonucleotides that host various modifications for ribonuclease protection and pharmacological properties, such as improved tissue and cell absorption. They differ from normal RNA in, for example, complete 2'-O-methylation of sugar, phosphorothioate backbone, and, for example, a portion of cholesterol at the 3 'end. Antagomir can be used to efficiently silence endogenous miRNAs by forming duplexes comprising the antagomir and endogenous miRNA, thus preventing miRNA-induced gene silencing. An example of antagomir-mediated miRNA silencing is miR-122 silencing, described in Krutzfeldt et al, Nature, 2005, 438: 685-689, which are expressly incorporated herein by reference in their entirety. Antagomir RNAs can be synthesized using standard protocols for solid phase oligonucleotide synthesis. See US Patent Application Serial No. 11 / 502,158 and 11 / 657,341 (the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference).
An antagomir can include ligand-conjugated monomer subunits and monomers for oligonucleotide synthesis. Examples of monomers are described in
<img file="MX338780B_D0079.tif" />
US Application No. 10 / 916,185 filed August 10, 2004. An antagomir may have a ZXY structure, as described in PCT Application No. PCT / US2004 / 07070 filed March 8, 2004. An antagomir may form a complex with an amphipatic portion. Examples of
<td>amphiphatic portions for</td><td>its</td><td>use</td><td colspan="2">with agents</td>
<td>oligonucleotides are described</td><td>in</td><td>the</td><td>Request</td><td>PCT</td>
<td>No. PCT / US2004 / 07070, filed on</td><td>8 of</td><td>March</td><td>from 2004.</td><td></td>
<td>Aptamers</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td>
<td>Aptamers are molecules</td><td>of</td><td>acid</td><td>nucleic</td><td>or of</td>
peptides that bind to a particular molecule of interest with high affinity and specificity (Tuerk and Gold, Science 249: 505 (1990); Ellington and Szostak, Nature 346: 818 (1990)). DNA or RNA aptamers have been successfully produced and bind to several different entities from large proteins to small organic molecules. See Eaton, Curr. Opin. Chem. Biol. 1: 10-16 (1997), Famulok, Curr. Opin. Struct. Biol. 9: 324-9 (1999), and Hermann and Patel, Science 287: 820-5 (2000). The aptamers can be based on RNA or DNA and can include a riboswitch. A riboswitch is part of an mRNA molecule that can bind directly to a small target molecule and whose binding to the target affects the activity of the gene. Thus, a mRNA containing a riboswitch is directly involved.
I .Μ P
INSTITUTO MíXiCAW D £ THE PROPERTY
INDUSTRIAL '· -'
<img file="MX338780B_D0080.tif" />
in regulating its own activity depending on the presence or absence of its target molecule. In general, aptamers are designed through repeated rounds of selection in vitro or equivalently, SELEX (systematic evolution of ligands by exponential enrichment) to bind to various molecular targets such as small molecules, proteins, nucleic acids, and even cells, tissues, and organisms. The aptamer can be prepared by any known method including synthetic, recombinant and purification methods and can be used alone or in combination with other specific aptamers for the same purpose. Furthermore, as described in more detail herein, the term aptamer specifically includes secondary aptamers containing a unanimous sequence that arises from the comparison of two or more known aptamers with a given objective.
Ribozymes
According to another embodiment of the invention, the nucleic acid-lipid particles are associated with ribozymes. Ribozymes are complexes of RNA molecules that have specific catalytic domains that possess endonuclease activity (Kim and Cech, Proc Nati Acad Sci US A. 1987 Dec; 84 (24): 8788-92; Forster and Symons, Cell. 1987 Apr 24 ; 49 (2): 211-20). For example, a lot of
<img file="MX338780B_D0081.tif" />
1PI
INDU5T?.;?.:
ΊΤυΤΟ MEXiON · 'η: the pROPij.c · a.
<img file="MX338780B_D0082.tif" />
Ribozymes accelerate phosphoester transfer reactions with a high degree of specificity, usually cleaving only one of several phosphoesters on an oligonucleotide substrate (Cech et al., Cell. 1981 Dec; 27 (3 Pt
2): 487-96; Michel and Westhof, J Mol Biol. 1990 Dec
5; 216 (3): 585-610; Reinhold-Hurek and Shub, Nature. 1992 May 14; 357 (6374): 173-6). Specificity has been attributed to the requirement that the substrate bind through specific base-pairing interactions with the internal guide sequence (IGS) of the ribozyme prior to the chemical reaction.
Today at least six basic varieties of naturally occurring enzyme RNA are known. Each can catalyze the hydrolysis of phosphodiester junctions of RNA in trans (and therefore can cleave other RNA molecules) under physiological conditions. In general, enzymatic nucleic acids act by binding to a target RNA first. Such binding occurs through the target binding portion of an enzyme nucleic acid that is held in close proximity to an enzyme portion of the molecule that acts to cleave the target RNA. Thus, the enzymatic nucleic acid first recognizes and then binds to the target RNA through the complementary base pairs, and once attached to the correct site, acts enzymatically to cut the target RNA. Strategic cleavage of such target RNA will destroy his / ΜΡΙ
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF PROPERTY industry :.
<img file="MX338780B_D0083.tif" />
ability to direct the synthesis of an encoded protein. After an enzymatic nucleic acid has bound and cleaved its target RNA, it is released from the RNA to search for another target and can repeatedly bind and cleave new targets.
The enzymatic nucleic acid molecule can be formed into a hammerhead, hairpin motif, a group I hepatitis or intron virus, or RNasaP RNA (associated with a guide RNA sequence) or Neurospora VSRNA, for example. Specific examples of hammerhead motifs are described in Rossi et al. Nucleic Acids Res. 1992 Sep 11; 20 (17): 4559-65. Examples of hairpin motifs are described in Hampel et al. (Published European Patent Application No. EP 0360257), Hampel and Tritz, Biochemistry 1989 Jun 13; 28 (12): 4929-33; Hampel et al., Nucleic Acids Res. January 25, 1990, -18 (2): 299-304 and US Patent 5,631,359. An example of the hepatitis virus motif is described in Perrotta and Been, Biochemistry. 1992 Dec 1; 31 (47): 11843-52; An example of the RNasaP motif is described in Guerrier-Takada et al., Cell. 1983 Dec; 35 (3 Pt 2): 849-57, Neurospora VS RNA ribozyme motifs are described in Collins (Saville and Collins, Cell. 1990 May 18; 61 (4): 685-96; Saville and Collins, Proc Nati Acad Sci USA. 1991 Oct l; 88 (19): 8826-30; Collins and Olive, Biochemistry. 1993 Mar 23; 32 (11): 2795-9); and an example of the Group I intron is described in US Patent 4,987,071.
<img file="MX338780B_D0084.tif" />
INSTITUTO MEXICANO Ut LA MCflíOAL) industry:
Important features of enzymatic nucleic acid molecules used in accordance with the invention are that they possess a specific substrate binding site that is complementary to one or more target gene DNA or RNA regions and that they possess nucleotide sequences within or around the site binding to the substrate that impart RNA cleavage activity to the molecule. Therefore, ribozyme constructs should not be limited to specific reasons mentioned herein.
Methods of producing a ribozyme targeting any polynucleotide sequence are known in the art. Ribozymes can be designed as described in published International Patent Application No. WO 93/23569 and published International Patent Application No. WO 94/02595, each specifically incorporated herein by reference and synthesized to be tested in vitro and in vivo, as described herein.
Ribozyme activity can be optimized by altering the length of ribozyme-binding groups or by chemically synthesizing ribozymes with modifications that prevent their degradation by serum ribonucleases (see, eg, published International Patent Application No. WO 92 / 07065; Published International Patent Application No. WO 93/15187; Published International Patent Application No. WO
Τ
ΜΡΪ .Λ. TIT / ¡Ο INSTITUTE OF THE? Λο?; Σ (ND'JjT?
<img file="MX338780B_D0085.tif" />
91/03162; European published international patent application No. 92110298.4; US Patent 5,334,711; and Application, published international patent No. WO 94/13688, which describe various chemical modifications that can be made to the sugar portions of enzymatic RNA molecules), modifications that improve their efficacy in cells and the elimination of line bases. II to shorten shortened RNA synthesis times and reduce chemical requirements.
Immunostimulatory oligonucleotides
The nucleic acids associated with lipid particles of the present invention can be immunostimulators including immunostimulatory oligonucleotides (ISS: single or double chain) capable of inducing an immune response when administered to a subject that may be a mammal or another patient. ISSs include, eg, some palindromes leading to hairpin secondary structures (see Yamamoto S., et al. (1992) J. Immunol. 148: 4072-4076), or CpG motifs, as well as other known ISS features (such as multi-G domains, see WO 96/11266).
The immune response can be an innate or adaptive immune response. The immune system is divided into a more innate immune system and an adaptive immune system acquired from vertebrates, the latter ** '·. ··?
Μ ΡI
INSTITUTO MEXICANO PE LA PAOPIIL'AO INDUSTRIAL is further divided into humoral cellular components. In particular modalities, the immune response may be mucous.
In particular embodiments, an immunostimulatory nucleic acid is only an immunostimulator when administered in combination with a lipid particle and is not an immunostimulator when administered in its free form. According to the present invention, said oligonucleotide is considered an immunostimulator.
Immunostimulatory nucleic acids are considered non-sequence specific when they are not specifically required to bind and reduce expression of a target polynucleotide to elicit an immune response. Thus, some immunostimulatory nucleic acids may comprise a sequence that corresponds to a region of the naturally occurring gene or mRNA but may still be considered non-sequence specific immunostimulatory nucleic acids.
In one embodiment, the immunostimulatory nucleic acid or oligonucleotide comprises at least one CpG dinucleotide. The CpG oligonucleotide or dinucleotide can be unmethylated or methylated. In another embodiment, the immunostimulatory nucleic acid comprises at least one CpG dinucleotide possessing a methylated cytokine. In one embodiment, the nucleic acid comprises a simple CpG dinucleotide where the
ΙΜΡΙ ~ £>. 1Λ
<img file="MX338780B_D0086.tif" />
cytokine in said CpG dinucleotide is methylated. In a specific embodiment, the nucleic acid comprises the sequence 5 'TAACGTTGAGGGGCAT 3'. In an alternative embodiment, the nucleic acid comprises at least two CpG dinucleotides where at least one cytokine in the CpG dinucleotide is methylated. In a further embodiment, each cytokine in the CpG dinucleotide present in the sequence is methylated. In another embodiment, the nucleic acid comprises a plurality of CpG dinucleotides where at least one of said CpG dinucleotide comprises a methylated cytokine.
In a specific embodiment, the nucleic acid comprises the sequence 5 'TTCCATGACGTTCCTGACGT 3'. In another specific embodiment, the nucleic acid sequence comprises the 5 'TCCATGACGTTCCTGACGT 3' sequence where the two cytokines indicated in bold are methylated. In particular modalities, ODN is selected from a group of ODN consisting of ODN # 1, ODN # 2, ODN # 3, ODN # 4, ODN # 5, ODN # 6, ODN # 7, ODN # 8 and ODN # 9, as shown below.
ϊ Μ ΡI
INjTITUT ί V, <rt -, r Di
ι. · ουυ; <Λΐ
<img file="MX338780B_D0087.tif" />
Table 3. Examples of immunostimulatory oligonucleotides (ODN).
<td>ODN NAME</td><td>I KNOW THAT</td><td>ODN SEQUENCE (5'-3 ') ·</td>
<td></td><td>ID</td><td></td>
<td>ODN 1</td><td></td><td>5'-TAACGTTGAGGGGCAT-3</td>
<td>c-myc human</td><td></td><td></td>
<td>* ODN lm</td><td></td><td>5'-TAAZGTTGAGGGGCAT-3</td>
<td>ODN 2</td><td></td><td>5'-TCCATGACGTTCCTGACGTT-3</td>
<td>* ODN 2m</td><td></td><td>5'-TCCATGAZGTTCCTGAZGTT-3</td>
<td>ODN 3</td><td></td><td>5'-TAAGCATACGGGGTGT-3</td>
<td>ODN 5</td><td></td><td>5'-AACGTT-3</td>
<td>ODN 6</td><td></td><td>5'-GATGCTGTGTCGGGGTCTCCGGGC-</td>
<td></td><td></td><td> 3 '</td>
<td>ODN 7</td><td></td><td>5'-TCGTCGTTTTGTCGTTTTGTCGTT-</td>
<td></td><td></td><td> 3'</td>
<td>ODN 7m</td><td></td><td>5'-TZGTZGTTTTGTZGTTTTGTZGTT-</td>
<td></td><td></td><td> 3'</td>
<td>ODN 8</td><td></td><td>5 '-TCCAGGACTTCTCTCAGGTT-3'</td>
<td>ODN 9</td><td></td><td>5 '-TCTCCCAGCGTGCGCCAT-3'</td>
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF THE PROFI AGE
INDUSTRIAL
<td>ODN NAME</td><td>I KNOW THAT ID</td><td>ODN SEQUENCE (5'-3 ').</td>
<td>ODN 10 Molecule of accession intracellular murine 1</td><td></td><td>5'-TGCATCCCCCAGGCCACCAT-3</td>
<td>ODN 11 Molecule of accession intracellular human 1</td><td></td><td>5'-GCCCAAGCTGGCATCCGTCA-3 '</td>
<td>ODN 12 molecule accession intracellular human 1</td><td></td><td>5'-GCCCAAGCTGGCATCCGTCA-3 '</td>
<td>ODN 13 erb-B-2 human</td><td></td><td>5'-GGT GCTCACTGC GGC-3 '</td>
<td>ODN 14 c-myc human</td><td></td><td>5'-AACC GTT GAG GGG CAT-3 '</td>
<td>ODN 15 c-myc human</td><td></td><td>5'-TAT GCT GTG CCG GGG TCT TCG GGC-3 '</td>
<td>ODN 16</td><td></td><td>5'-GTGCCG GGGTCTTCGGGC-3 '</td>
IMPI
INSTITUTO MEXICANO R · LA PROPIEDAD IN DU5<sup>T</sup>PIAL
<img file="MX338780B_D0088.tif" />
<td>ODN NAME</td><td>I KNOW THAT ID</td><td>ODN SEQUENCE (5'-3 ').</td>
<td>ODN 17 Receiver factor human growth of insulin type 1</td><td></td><td>5'-GGACCCTCCTCCGGAGCC-3 '</td>
<td>ODN 18 Receiver</td><td></td><td>5 '-TCC TCC GGA GCC AGA CTT-</td>
<td>factor human growth of insulin type 1</td><td></td><td> 3'</td>
<td>ODN 19 Receiver factor human growth epidermal</td><td></td><td>5'-AAC GTT GAG GGG CAT-3 '</td>
<td>ODN 20 Receiver of the factor of increase epidermal</td><td></td><td>5'-CCGTGGTCA TGCTCC-3 '</td>
<img file="MX338780B_D0089.tif" />
V ^ TMSa
<td>ODN NAME</td><td>I KNOW THAT ID</td><td>ODN SEQUENCE (5'-3 ') ·</td>
<td>ODN 21 Factor human of increase endothelial vascular</td><td></td><td>5'-CAG CCTGGCTCACCG CCTTGG- 3'</td>
<td>ODN 22 Phosphokinase murine C - alpha</td><td></td><td>5'-CAG CCA TGG TTC CCC CCA AC-3 '</td>
<td>ODN 23</td><td></td><td>5 '-GTT CTC GCT GGT GAG TTT CA-3 '</td>
<td>ODN 24 Bcl-2 human</td><td></td><td>5'-TCT CCCAGCGTGCGCCAT-3 '</td>
<td>ODN 25 c-Raf-s human</td><td></td><td>5'-GTG CTC CAT TGA TGC-3 '</td>
<td>ODN 26 Receiver Human Factor growth endothelial vascular 1</td><td></td><td>5'-GAGUUCUGAUGAGGCCGAAAGG- CCGAAAGUCUG-3 '</td>
<td>ODN # 27</td><td></td><td>5'-RRCGYY-3 '</td>
ΪΜΡΙ
INSTITUTO MEXICANO DE LA PAO? I.ED, lD INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX338780B_D0090.tif" />
<td colspan="2">ODN NAME</td><td>I KNOW THAT ID</td><td>ODN SEQUENCE (5'-3 ').</td>
<td colspan="2">ODN # 28</td><td></td><td>5'-AACGTTGAGGGGCAT-3 '</td>
<td colspan="2">ODN # 29</td><td></td><td>5'-CAACGTTATGGGGAGA-3 '</td>
<td>ODN</td><td> 30</td><td></td><td>5'-TAACGTTGAGGGGCAT-3 '</td>
<td>c-myc human</td><td></td><td></td><td></td>
Z represents a residue of methylated cytokine. ODN14 is a 15-mer oligonucleotide and ODN1 is the same oligonucleotide that has thymidine added to end 5<sup>1</sup> forming ODN1 in a
16-mer. No differences in biological activity have been detected between ODN14 and ODN1 and both exhibit similar immunostimulatory activity (Mui et al., 2001)
Additional oligonucleotide specific nucleic acid (ODN) sequences suitable for use in compositions and methods of the invention are described in Raney et al., Journal of Pharmacology and Experimental Therapeutics, 298: 1185-1192 (2001). In some embodiments, the ODNs used in the compositions and methods of the present invention have a phosphodiester backbone (PO) or a phosphorothioate backbone (PS) and / or at least one cytokine residue methylated on a CpG motif.
<img file="MX338780B_D0091.tif" />
Oligonucleotide decoys
Since transcription factors recognize their relatively short binding sequences, even in the absence of enveloping genomic DNA, short oligonucleotides that support the unanimous binding sequence for a specific transcription factor can be used as tools to manipulate gene expression in cells. living.
This strategy involves the intracellular administration of said decoy oligonucleotides that are then recognized and linked by the objective factor. The lure's occupation of the DNA binding site of the transcription factor renders the transcription factor unable to subsequently bind to the promoter regions of the target genes. Lures can be used as therapeutic agents, either to inhibit the expression of genes activated by a transcription factor or to upregulate genes that are suppressed by binding of a transcription factor. Examples of the use of decoy oligonucleotides can be found in Mann et al., J.
<td>Clin. Invest.,</td><td> 2000</td><td>, 106: 1071-1075, which is incorporated</td>
<td>expressly in</td><td>the</td><td>present for reference in your</td>
<td>whole.</td><td></td><td></td>
<td>Supermir</td><td></td><td></td>
<td>A supermir</td><td>I know</td><td>refers to an oligomer or polymer of</td>
ribonucleic acid (RNA) or deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA) or both, or single, double or partially double stranded, or modifications thereof, having a nucleotide sequence that is substantially identical to a miRNA and is antisense with respect to its objective. This term includes oligonucleotides composed of nucleobases, sugars, and covalent naturally occurring (backbone) internucleoside linkages and containing a similarly non-naturally occurring portion. Such modified or substituted oligonucleotides are preferred over native forms due to desired properties such as, for example, improved cellular absorption, improved nucleic acid target affinity, and increased stability in the presence of nucleases. In a preferred embodiment, the supermir does not include a single filament and in another preferred embodiment, the supermir is not self-inhibited to a considerable extent. A supermir presented in the invention may have a secondary structure but is substantially single-stranded under physiological conditions. A supermir that has substantially a single filament is single-stranded insofar as less than about 50% (eg, less than about 40%, 30%, 20%, 10%, or 5%) of the supermir forms a duplex with itself. The supermir may include a hairpin segment, eg a sequence, preferably at the 3 'end it may
IMP
<img file="MX338780B_D0092.tif" />
self-hybridize and form a double region, eg, a double region of at least 1, 2, 3 or 4 and preferably less than 8, 7, 6 or n nucleotides, eg, 5 nucleotides. The double region may be connected via a bond, eg, a nucleotide bond, eg, 3, 4, 5, or 6 dT, eg, modified dTs. In another embodiment, the supermir forms a duplex with a shorter oligo, eg, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 nucleotides in length, eg, at one or both 3 'and 5' ends or at one end and the nonterminal or the middle of the supermir.
MiRNA Mimetics
MiRNA mimetics represent a class of molecules that can be used to mimic the gene silencing ability of one or more miRNAs. Therefore, the term micro RNA mimetic refers to synthetic non-coding RNAs (i.e. miRNA is not obtained by purification from a source of endogenous miRNA) that are capable of entering the iRNA pathway and regulating gene expression. . MiRNA mimetics can be designed as mature molecules (eg. single chain) or mimetic precursors (eg pri- or pre-miRNA). MiRNA mimetics can be composed of nucleic acid (modified or modified nucleic acids) including oligonucleotides that comprise, without limitation, RNA, modified RNA, DNA, DNA
IM
<img file="MX338780B_D0093.tif" />
χ
INSTITUTO MEXICANC DE LA PHOPIEOaB industrial modified, blocked nucleic acids, 2'0, 4'-C-ethylene-bridged nucleic acids (ENA) or any combination of the above (including DNA-RNA hybrids). In addition, miRNA mimetics can comprise conjugates that can affect administration, intracellular compartmentalization, stability, specificity, functionality, chain use and / or potency. In one design, miRNA mimetics are double-stranded molecules (eg, with a double region between about 16 and about 31 nucleotides in length) and contain one or more sequences that have identity to the mature strand of a given miRNA. . The modifications may comprise 2 'modifications (including 2'-0-methyl modifications and 2' F modifications) in one or both chains of the molecule and internucleotide modifications (eg, phosphorothioate modifications) that improve stability and / or or specificity of the nucleic acid. Furthermore, miRNA mimetics may include surpluses. Surpluses can consist of 1-6 nucleotides at either the 3 'or 5' end of any strand and can be modified to improve stability or functionality. In one embodiment, a miRNA mimetic comprises a double region of between 16 and 31 nucleotides and one or more of the following chemical modification patterns: the single strand contains 2'-0-methyl modifications of nucleotides 1 and 2 (counting from from the 5 'end of the
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF PROPERTY
INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX338780B_D0094.tif" />
sense oligonucleotide) and all Cs and Us; antisense strand modifications may comprise a 2 'F modification of all Cs and Us, phosphorylation of the 5' end of the oligonucleotide, and stabilized internucleotide linkages associated with a surplus of 2 nucleotides 3 '
Antimir or miRNA inhibitor
The terms antimir, miRNA inhibitor, Rmi inhibitor or inhibitor are synonyms and refer to modified oligonucleotides or oligonucleotides that interfere with the specific miRNA capacity. In general, inhibitors are nucleic acids or nucleic acids modified in nature that include oligonucleotides comprising RNA, modified RNA, DNA, modified DNA, blocked nucleic acids (LNA), or any combination of the foregoing. Modifications include 2 'modifications (including 2'0 alkyl modifications and 2' F modifications) and internucleotide modifications (eg, phosphorothioate modifications) that may affect administration, stability, specificity, intracellular compartmentalization, or potency. Furthermore, miRNA inhibitors can comprise conjugates that can affect administration, intracellular compartmentalization, stability and / or potency. Inhibitors can take a variety of configurations including chain designs
ÍMPI ¡NniTVTO MEXICANO
<img file="MX338780B_D0095.tif" />
single, double stranded (duplex RNA / RNA or RNA / DNA) and hairpin type, in general, micro RNA inhibitors comprise one or more sequences or portions of sequences that are complementary or partially complementary to the mature chain (or chains) of the miRNA to be targeted, in addition, the miRNA inhibitor may also comprise additional sequences located at positions 5 'and 3' to the sequence that are an inverse complement of mature miRNA. The additional sequences may be the inverse complements of the sequences that are adjacent to the mature miRNA in the pri-miRNA from which the mature miRNA comes, or the additional sequences may be arbitrary sequences (possessing a mixture of A, G, C or OR). In some embodiments, one or both of the additional sequences are arbitrary sequences capable of hairpin formation. Therefore, in some embodiments, the sequence that is the reverse complement of the miRNA is flanked on the 5 'side and on the 3' side by hairpin structures. Micro RNA inhibitors, when double stranded, can include incompatibilities between nucleotides in opposite strands. Furthermore, micro RNA inhibitors can be attached to the conjugated portions to facilitate absorption of the inhibitor into the cell. For example, a micro RNA inhibitor may be bound to cholesteryl 5- (bis (4methoxyphenyl) (phenyl) methoxy) -3 hydroxypentylcarbamate) which
<img file="MX338780B_D0096.tif" />
allows the passive absorption of a micro RNA inhibitor into a cell. Micro RNA inhibitors, including hairpin miRNA inhibitors, are described in detail in Vermeulen et al., Double-Stranded Regions Are Essential Design Components Of Potent Inhibitors of RISC Function, RNA 13: 723-730 (2007) and in W02007 / 095387 and WO 2008/036825, which are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety. A person skilled in the art can select a sequence from the database for a desired miRNA and design a useful inhibitor for the methods described herein.
Ul adapter
The Ul adapter inhibits polyA sites and are bifunctional oligonucleotides with a target domain complementary to a site in the terminal exon of the target gene and an Ul domain that binds to Ul's smallest nuclear RNA component of the ul snRNP (Goraczniak, et al., 2008, Nature Biotechnology, 27 (3), 257-263, which is expressly incorporated herein by reference in its entirety). The ul snRNP is a complex of ribonucleoproteins that functions primarily to direct the first steps in splenic formation by exon-intron pre-mRNA border binding (Brown and Simpson, 1998, Annu Rev Plant Physiol Plant Mol Biol 49 : 7797
ΙΜΡΙ
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF THE INDUSTRIAL COUNTRY
<img file="MX338780B_D0097.tif" />
95). Nucleotides 2-11 of the 5 'end of the base pair of
RNAs from it bind to the 5'ss of the pre mRNA. In one embodiment, the oligonucleotides of the invention are Ul adapters. In one embodiment, the Ul adapter can be administered in combination with at least one other iRNA agent.
Oligonucleotide modifications
Unmodified oligonucleotides may not be optimal in some applications, eg, unmodified oligonucleotides may be prone to degradation by, eg, cell nucleases. Nucleases can hydrolyze the phosphodiester bonds of the nucleic acid. However, chemical modifications of the oligonucleotides can confer improved properties and, eg, can provide more stable oligonucleotides to the nucleases.
Because oligonucleotides are subunit polymers or monomers, many of the modifications described below occur in a repeating position within an oligonucleotide, eg, a modification of a base, a sugar, a phosphate moiety, or the Oxygen does not bridge a portion of phosphate. Not all of the positions in a given oligonucleotide need to be uniformly modified, and in fact more than one of the aforementioned modifications can be incorporated
<img file="MX338780B_D0098.tif" />
on a single oligonucleotide or even a single nucleoside within an oligonucleotide.
In some cases modification will occur at all subject positions on the oligonucleotide but in many cases, in fact in most, it will not. As an example, a modification can only occur in a 3 'or 5' end position, it can only occur in the inner region, it can only occur in a terminal region, eg. at a terminal nucleotide position or at the last 2, 3, 4, 5 or 10 nucleotides of an oligonucleotide. A modification can occur in a double chain region, a single chain region, or both. A modification can only occur in the double-stranded region of a double-stranded oligonucleotide or it can only occur in a single-stranded region of a double-stranded oligonucleotide.
For example, a modification of phosphorothioate in a non-bridged oxygen position can only occur at one or both ends, it can only occur in a terminal region, eg. at a terminal nucleotide position or at the last 2, 3, 4, 5, or 10 nucleotides of a filament, or it can occur in double-stranded and single-stranded regions, particularly at the ends. The end or the ends
5 'can be phosphorylated.
A modification described herein may be the only modification, or the only type of modification included
IMPI
M £ XiCA INSTITUTE. '<'
OF THE fnomtwn V
<img file="MX338780B_D0099.tif" />
at multiple nucleotides, or a modification may be combined with one or more other modifications described herein. The modifications described herein can also be combined into an oligonucleotide, eg, different nucleotides from an oligonucleotide have different modifications described herein.
In some embodiments, it is particularly preferred, eg. to improve stability, include particular nucleobases in surpluses or include modified nucleotides or nucleotide substitutes, in single strand surpluses, eg. in a 5 'or 3' surplus, or both. For example. it may be desired to include purine nucleotides in surplus.
In some embodiments, all or some of the bases will be modified in a 3 'or 5' surplus, eg, with a modification described herein. Modifications may include, eg, the use of modifications to the OH 2 'group of ribose sugar, eg. the use of deoxyribonucleotides, eg. deoxythymidine, instead of ribonucleotides and modifications in the phosphate group, eg. modifications to phosphothioate. Surpluses need not necessarily be homologous to the target sequence.
Specific modifications are described in more detail below.
The phosphate group
<img file="MX338780B_D0100.tif" />
The phosphate group is a negatively charged species. The charge is evenly distributed between the two unbridged oxygen atoms. However, the phosphate group can be modified by replacing one of the oxygens with a different substituent. A result of this modification to the main phosphate RNA structures may be the increased resistance of the oligoribonucleotide to nucleolytic decay. Therefore, without intending to be bound by theory, it may be desirable, in some embodiments, to introduce alterations that result in a no-load link or a loaded link with a non-symmetric load distribution.
Examples of modified phosphate groups include phosphorothioate, phosphoroselenates, borane phosphates, borane phosphate esters, hydrogen phosphonates, phosphorous amidates, alkyl or aryl phosphonates, and phosphotriesters. In certain embodiments, one of the unbridged oxyphosphate atoms in the phosphate backbone portion can be replaced by any of the following: S, Se, BR<sub>3</sub> (R is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl), C (i.e. an alkyl group, an aryl group, etc ...), H, NR<sub>2</sub> (R is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl) or OR (R is alkyl or aryl). The phosphorous atom in an unmodified phosphate group is achiral. However, the replacement of one of the oxygens does not bridge by one of the atoms or groups of atoms before
101
ΙΜΡΙ
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF LA paOHFÜAl »INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX338780B_D0101.tif" />
mentioned make the phosphorus atom chiral; in other words, a phosphorous atom in a phosphate group modified in this way is a stereogenic center. The stereogenic phosphorus atom can have an R configuration (here, Rp) or S configuration (here, Sp).
Phosphorodithioates have both bridged oxygens replaced by sulfur. The phosphorus center in phosphorodithioates is achiral, which prevents the formation of oligoribonucleotide diastereomers. Therefore, without wishing to be bound by theory, modifications to both non-bridging oxygens that remove the chiral center may be desired, eg. phosphorodithioate formation, since they cannot produce mixtures of diastereomers. Therefore, the non-bridging oxygens can independently be any of S, Se, B, C, Η, N or OR (R is alkyl or aryl).
The phosphate bond can also be modified by replacing the bridging oxygen (i.e., oxygen that binds phosphate to the nucleoside) with nitrogen (bridged phosphoramidates), sulfur (bridged phosphorothioates), and carbon (bridged methylene phosphonates). Replacement can occur in either of the linker oxygens or the two linker oxygens. When the bridging oxygen is the 3 'oxygen of a nucleoside, carbon replacement is preferred. When the bridging oxygen is the 5 'oxygen of a nucleoside, it is preferred
<img file="MX338780B_D0102.tif" />
102
INSTITUTO MFXICANO PE LA PROPIEPAP
INQUTi KIAL
<img file="MX338780B_D0103.tif" />
. ... i 1 ^ 1 ·· ^ —— - ίΤίη-Ί — ithe replacement by nitrogen.
Phosphate group replacement
The phosphate group can be replaced by connectors that do not contain phosphorous. Without wishing to be bound by theory, it is believed that because the charged phosphodiester group is the center of reaction in nucleolytic degradation, its replacement by neutral structural mimetics should provide improved nuclease stability. Again, without intending to be bound by theory, one may wish, in some way, to introduce alterations in which the charged phosphate group is replaced by a neutral portion.
Examples of portions that can replace the phosphate group include methyl phosphonate, hydroxylamino, siloxane, carbonate, carboxymethyl, carbamate, amide, thioether, ethylene oxide bond, sulfonate, sulfonamide, thioformacetal, formacetal, oxime, methyleneimino, methylenemethylimine, methylenehydro , methylenedimethylhydrazo and methylenexymethylimino. Preferred replacements include the methylenecarbonylamino and methylene methyl amino groups.
Modified phosphate linkages where at least one of the phosphate-bound oxygens was replaced or the phosphate group was replaced by a non-phosphorous group is also referred to as a non-main chain linkage.
103
<img file="MX338780B_D0104.tif" />
phosphodiester.
Ribophosphate backbone replacement
Scaffolds that mimic oligonucleotides can also be constructed where the phosphate bond and the ribose sugar are replaced by a nuclease-resistant nucleoside or nucleotide substitutes. Without intending to be bound by theory, it is believed that the absence of a repeatedly loaded backbone skeleton reduces binding to proteins that recognize polyanions (eg nucleases). Again, without intending to be bound by theory, one may wish, in some form, to introduce alterations in which the bases are linked by a neutral surrogate backbone. Examples include mofilino, cyclobutyl, pyrrolidine and peptide nucleic acid (PNA) nucleoside substitutes. A preferred substitute is a substitute for PNA.
Sugar modifications
A modified RNA can include modifications of all or some of the sugar groups of ribonucleic acid. For example, the 2 'hydroxyl group (OH) can be modified or replaced by a number of different oxy or deoxy substituents. Without limiting the theory, improved stability is expected because the hydroxyl can no longer [MP li (NSTITUTO MEXICANO r-'i
DE LA rRCLIEDAO C'- »», '
INDUSTRIAL
104 be deprotonated to form a 2'-alkoxide ion. The 2'alkoxide can catalyze degradation by an intramolecular nucleophilic attack on the binding phosphorus atom.
Again, without intending to be bound by theory, it may be desired, in some embodiments, to introduce alterations in which the formation of alkoxide at the 2 'position is not possible.
Examples of modifications of hydroxy-oxy-2 'groups include alkoxy or aryloxy (OR, jg, R = H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, or sugar); polyethylene glycols (PEG), O (CH<sub>2</sub>CH<sub>2</sub>OR)<sub>η</sub>ΟΗ<sub>2</sub>ΟΗ<sub>2</sub>ΟΡ; blocked nucleic acids (LNA) where the 2 'hydroxyl is connected, eg, by a methylene bridge to the 4' carbon of the same ribose sugar; O-AMINE (AMINE = NH<sub>2</sub>; alkylamino, dialkylamino, heterocyclyl, arylamino, diarylamino, heteroarylamino or diheteroarylamino, ethylenediamine, polyamino) and aminoalkoxy, O (CH<sub>2</sub>) <sub>n</sub>AMINE, (eg AMINE = NH<sub>2</sub>;
dialkylamino, heterocyclyl, arylamino, heteroarylamino, or diheteroarylamino, polyamino). It should be noted that the oligonucleotides that only contain the methoxyethyl group (MOE), (OCH<sub>2</sub>CH<sub>2</sub>OCH<sub>3</sub>, a derivative of PEG), show nuclease stabilities that can be compared to those modified with the strong alkylamino, diarylamino, ethylenediamine, phosphorothioate modification.
105
IΜ ΡI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE V / íwr - »-,., OF THE V ** INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY
Deoxy modifications include hydrogen (ie, deoxyribose sugars, which are of particular importance for excess portions of partially double-stranded RNA); halo (for e j., fluoro), amino (for e j., NH<sub>2</sub>;
alkylamino, dialkylamino, heterocyclyl, arylamino, diarylamino, heteroarylamino, diheteroarylamino or amino acid); NH (CH<sub>2</sub>CH<sub>2</sub>NH) <sub>n</sub>CH<sub>2</sub>CH<sub>2</sub>-AMINE (AMINE = NH<sub>2</sub>;
alkylamino, dialkylamino, heterocyclyl, arylamino, diarylamino, heteroarylamino or diheteroarylamino), -NHC (O) R (R = alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heteroaryl or sugar), cyano; mercapto; alkylthio-alkyl; thioalkoxy and alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, alkenyl and alkynyl, which may be optionally substituted by eg. for an amino functionality. Preferred substituents are 2'methoxyethyl, 2'-OCH3, 2'-0-allyl, 2'-C-allyl and 2'-fluoro.
The sugar group may also contain one or more carbons that possess the opposite stereochemical configuration to that of the corresponding carbon in ribose. Therefore, an oligonucleotide can include nucleotides that contain eg. arabinose like sugar. The monomer may have an alpha bond at the 1 'position of the sugar, eg, alphanucleosides. Oligonucleotides can also include abasic sugars that lack a C-l 'nucleobase. These abasic sugars may also contain other modifications in one or more of the sugar atoms
106
<img file="MX338780B_D0105.tif" />
constitutive. Oligonucleotides can also contain one or more sugars that are in L-form, eg, Lnucleosides.
Terminal modifications
The 3 'and 5' ends of an oligonucleotide can be modified. Such modifications can be at the 3 'end, the 5' end, or both ends of the molecule.
They may include modification or replacement of a complete terminal phosphate or of one or more of the atoms of the phosphate group. For example, the 3 'and 5' ends of an oligonucleotide can be conjugated to other functional molecular entities such as labeling portions, eg, fluorophores (eg, pyrene, TAMRA, fluorescein, Cy3 or Cy5 dyes) or groups protectors (eg based on sulfur, silicon, boron or ester). Functional molecular entities can be attached to sugar through a phosphate group and / or a bond. The terminal atom of the bond can be connected to or replace the bonding atom of the phosphate group or the C-3 'or C-5'0, N, S or C group of the sugar. Alternatively, the linker linkage can be connected to or replace the terminal atom of a nucleotide substitute (eg, PNAs).
When a linker / phosphate-functional molecular entity-linker / phosphate arrangement comes between two filaments
107
IMPIOS
MEXICAN INSTITUTE 7 ^ · Of the C * INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY of a dsRNA, this arrangement can be the substitute for a loop of hairpin RNA in a hairpin RNA agent.
Useful terminal modifications to modulate activity include modification of the 5 'end with phosphate or phosphate analogs. For example, in preferred embodiments, the dsRNA non-coding filaments are modified at the 5 'position or include a phosphoryl analog at the major 5' end. 5'-phosphate modifications include those that are compatible with RISC-mediated gene silencing. Suitable modifications include: 5'-monophosphate ((HO) 2 (0) P-0-5 '); 5'-diphosphate ((HO) 2 (0) P-0P (HO) (O) -0-5 '); 5'-triphosphate ((HO) 2 (0) PO- (HO) (O) P-OP (H0) (0) -0-5 '); 5'-guanosine coating (7-methylated or unmethylated) (7m-GO-5 '- (HO) (0) PO- (HO) (O) POP (HO) (0) -0-5');
5'-adenosine envelope (Appp), and any modified or unmodified nucleotide envelope structures (NO-5 '(H0) (0) P-0- (H0) (0) POP (H0) (0) - 0-5 ');
(phosphorothioate;
(phosphorodithioate;
((H0) 2 (0) PS-5 ');
5'-monothiophosphate
5'-monodithiophosphate
5'-phosphorothiolate (H0) 2 (S) P-0-5 ');
(HO) (HS) (S) P-0-5 '), any additional combination of monophosphate, diphosphate and triphosphates replaced by oxygen / sulfur (eg 5'-alpha-thiothriphosphate, 5'-gammatiotriphosphate, etc.) , 5'-phosphoramidates ((H0) 2 (0) P-NH-5 ', (HO) (NH2) (O) P-0-5'), 5'-alkylphosphonates (R = alkyl = methyl, ethyl, isopropyl, propyl, etc., eg RP (OH) (0) -0-5'-,
108
ΙΜΡΙ
INSTITUTO MEXICANO OE LA PROÍltCAD INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX338780B_D0106.tif" />
(OH) 2 (O) P-5'-CH2-), 5'-alkyletherphosphonates (R = alkylether = methoxymethyl (MeOCH2-), ethoxymethyl, etc., eg RP (OH) (O) -O-5 '-).
Terminal modifications may also be useful for monitoring distribution and, in such cases, preferred groups to be added include fluorophores, eg, fluorescein, or an Alexa dye, eg. Alexa 488. Terminal modifications can also be helpful in improving absorption, useful modifications for this include cholesterol. Terminal modifications can also be useful for crosslinking an RNA agent to another moiety, useful modifications for this include mitomycin C.
Nucleobases
Adenine, guanine, cytosine, and uracil are the most common bases found in RNA. These bases can be modified or replaced to provide RNA with improved properties. For example, nuclease resistant oligoribonucleotides can be prepared with these bases or with synthetic and natural nucleobases (eg inosine, thymine, xanthine, hypoxanthine, nubularin, isoguanisine, or tubercidine) and any of the aforementioned modifications. Alternatively, substituted or modified analogs of any of the above bases can be used, eg.
109
I ίνϊ Ρ1
MEXICAN INSTITUTE ΠΕ LA INDUSTRIAL fROAIF.DAD
<img file="MX338780B_D0107.tif" />
uncommon bases, modified bases, unnatural bases, and universal bases described herein. Examples include, but are not limited to, 2-aminoadenine, 6-methyl and other alkyl derivatives of adenine and guanine, 2propyl and other alkyl derivatives of adenine and guanine, 5halouracil and cytosine, 5-propinyl uracil and cytosine, 6-azo uracil, cytosine, and thymine, 5-uracil (pseudouracil), 4thouracil, 5-halouracil, 5- (2-aminopropyl) uracil, 5-amino allyl uracil, 8-halo, amino, thiol, thioalkyl, hydroxyl, and other adenines and guanines 8-substituted, 5-trifluoromethyl and other 5-substituted uracils and cytokines, 7-methylguanine, 5-substituted pyrimidines, 6-azapyrimidines, and N-2, N6, and 0-6 substituted purines, including 2-aminopropyladenine, 5-propynyluracil, and 5-propynylcytosine, dihydrouracil 3deaza-5-azacytosine, 2-aminopurine, 5-alkyluracil, 7alkylguanine, 5-alkyl cytosine, 7-deazaadenine, N6, N6dimethyladenine, 2,6-diaminopurine, 5-amino-allyl-uracil, N3methyluracil, 1,2,4 -substituted triazoles, 2-pyridinone, 5-nitroindole, 3-nitropyrrole, 5-methoxyuracil, uracil-5-oxyacetic acid, 5-methoxycarbonylmethyluracil, 5-methyl-2thiouracil, 5-methoxycarbonylmethyl-2-thiouracil, 5methylaminomethyl-2-thiouracil,
3- (3-amino3carboxypropyl) uracil, 3-methylcytosine, 5-methylcytosine, Nacetyl cytosins, 2-thiocytosine, N6-methyladenine,
N6isopenti1adenine,
2-methylthio-N6-isopentenyladenine,
NIMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY
<img file="MX338780B_D0108.tif" />
Purines and described in the described in
And Enaineerina,
110 methylguanines, or O-alkylated bases. Additional pyrimidines include those US Patent No. 3,687,808, the Concise Encyclopedia Of Polymer Science pages 858-859, Kroschwitz, JI, ed. John Wiley & Sons, 1990 and those described by Englisch et al., Angewandte Chemie, International Edition, 1991, 30, 613.
Cationic groups
Modifications to the oligonucleotides may also include the attachment of one or more cationic groups to the sugar, base, and / or the phosphorous atom of a phosphate or modified phosphate backbone moiety. A cationic group can be attached to any atom capable of substitution on a natural, rare, or universal basis. A preferred position is one that does not interfere with hybridization, that is, it does not interfere with the hydrogen binding interactions necessary for base pairing. A cationic group can join eg. through the C2 'position of a sugar or an analogous position in a cyclic or acyclic sugar substitute. Cationic groups can include eg protonated amino groups derived from eg O-AMINE (AMINE = NH2; alkylamino, dialkylamino, heterocyclyl, arylamino, diaryl amino, heteroaryl amino, or diheteroaryl amino, ethylene diamine,
IMPIfSM)
MEXICAN INSTITUTE '{? 'Z, · ή
OE LA 1'ROPíEOap C · ^ J'Zap 'industrial lll polyamino); aminoalkoxy, eg, O (CH<sub>2</sub>) <sub>n</sub>AMINE, (eg AMINE = NH<sub>2</sub>; alkylamino, dialkylamino, heterocyclyl, arylamino, diaryl amino, heteroaryl amino, or diheteroaryl amino, ethylene diamino, polyamino); amino (eg NH<sub>2</sub>; alkylamino, dialkylamino, heterocyclyl, arylamino, diaryl amino, heteroaryl amino, diheteroaryl amino, or amino acid); or
NH (CH<sub>2</sub>CH<sub>2</sub>NH)<sub>n</sub>CH<sub>2</sub>CH<sub>2</sub>-AMINE (AMINE = NH<sub>2</sub>; alkylamino, dialkylamino, heterocyclyl, arylamino, diaryl amino, heteroaryl amino or diheteroaryl amino).
Placement inside an oligonucleotide
Some modifications may preferably be included in an oligonucleotide at a particular location, eg, at an internal position of a filament or at the 5 'or 3' end of an oligonucleotide. A preferred location of an oligonucleotide modification may grant preferred properties to the agent. For example, preferred locations of particular modifications may provide optimal gene silencing properties or increased resistance to endonuclease or exonuclease activity.
One or more nucleotides of an oligonucleotide can have a 2'-5 'bond. One or more nucleotides of an oligonucleotide can have reverse linkages, eg. 3'-3 ', 5'-5' links,
2'-2 'or 2'-3'.
112
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY
<img file="MX338780B_D0109.tif" />
A double-stranded oligonucleotide can include at least one 5'-uridine-adenine-3 'dinucleotide (5'-UA-3') where uridine is a 2'-modified nucleotide, or a 5'uridine-guanine-3 dinucleotide '(5'-UG-3') terminal, where 5'-uridine is a 2'-modified nucleotide or a 5'-cytidine adenine-3 '(5'-CA-3') terminal, where the 5 ' -cytidine is a 2'-modified nucleotide or a 5'-uridinauridine-3 '(5'-UU-3') terminal dinucleotide, where 5'-uridine is a 2'-modified nucleotide or a 5'-cytidine10 cytidine-3 '(5'-CC-3') terminal dinucleotide, where 5'-cytidine is a 2'-modified nucleotide, or a terminal 5'-cytidinauridine-3 '(5'-CU-3') dinucleotide, where the 5'-cytidine is a 2'-modified nucleotide, or a 5'-uridine cytidine-3 '(5'-UC- 3 ') terminal, where 5'-uridine is a 2'-modified nucleotide. Double-stranded oligonucleotides that include these modifications are particularly stabilized against endonuclease activity.
General references
The oligoribonucleotides and oligoribonucleosides used in accordance with this invention can be synthesized with solid phase synthesis, see for example Oligonucleotide synthesis, a practical approach, Ed. MJ
Gait, IRL Press, 1984; Oligonucleotides and Analogues, A
113
<img file="MX338780B_D0110.tif" />
Practical Approach, Ed. F. Eckstein, IRL Press, 1991 (especially chapter 1, Modern machine-aided methods of oligodeoxyribonucleotide synthesis, chapter 2, Oligoribonucleotide synthesis, chapter 3, 2'-O— Methyloligoribonucleotides: synthesis and applications, chapter 4, Phosphorothioate oligonucleotides, chapter 5 , Synthesis of oligonucleotide phosphorodithioates, Chapter 6, Synthesis of oligo-2'-deoxyribonucleoside methylphosphonates, and Chapter 7, Oligodeoxynucleotides containing modified bases. Other particularly useful synthetic procedures, reagents, blocking groups and reaction conditions are described in Martin, P., Helv. Chim. Acta, 1995, 78, 486504; Beaucage, SL and Iyer, RP, Tetrahedron, 1992, 48, 2223-2311 and Beaucage, SL and Iyer, RP, Tetrahedron, 1993, 49, 6123-6194, or references mentioned therein. The modifications described in WO 00/44895, WOOl / 75164, or WO02 / 44321 can be used herein. The description of all publications, patents and published patent applications mentioned herein are incorporated herein by reference.
References to phosphate groups
The preparation of phosphinate oligoribonucleotides is described in US Patent No. 5,508,270. The preparation of alkyl phosphonate oligoribonucleotides is
<img file="MX338780B_D0111.tif" />
114
<img file="MX338780B_D0112.tif" />
described in US Patent No. 4,469,863. The preparation of phosphoramidite oligoribonucleotides is described in US Patent No. 5,256,775 or US Patent No. 5,366,878. The preparation of phosphotriester oligoribonucleotides is described in US Patent No. 5,023,243. The preparation of borane phosphate oligoribonucleotides is described in US Patent Nos. 6,004,925, 5,130,302 and 5,177,198. The preparation of 3'-deoxy-3'-amino phosphoramidate oligoribonucleotides is described in US Patent No. 5,476,925. 3'-deoxy-3'-methylene phosphonate oligoribonucleotides are described in An, H, et al. J. Org. Chem. 2001, 66, 2789-2801.
The preparation of bridged sulfur nucleotides is described in Sproat et al. Nucleosides Nucleotides 1988, 7,651 and Crosstick et al. Tetrahedron Lett. 1989, 30, 4693.
References to sugar groups
Modifications to 2 'modifications can be found in Verma, S. et al. Annu. Rev. Biochem. 1998, 67, 99-134 and all references therein. Specific modifications to ribose can be found in the following references: 2'-fluoro (Kawasaki et. Al., J.
Med. Chem., 1993, 36, 831-841), 2'-MOE (Martin, P. Helv.
Chim. Acta 1996, 79, 1930-1938), LNA (Wengel, J. Acc. Chem.
Res. 1999, 32, 301-310.
<img file="MX338780B_D0113.tif" />
References to the replacement of phosphate groups
Methylenemethylimino-linked oligoribonucleosides, also identified herein as MMI-linked oligoribonucleosides, methylenedimethylhydrazo-linked oligoribonucleosides, also identified herein as MDH-linked oligoribonucleosides, and methylene-carbonyl amino-linked oligonucleosides herein and methyleneaminocarbonyl-linked oligonucleosides, also identified herein as amide-4-linked oligoribonucleosides as well as compounds of mixed backbone having, for example, alternate MMI and PO or PS linkages, may be prepared as described in US Patent Nos. 5,378,825, 5,386,023 , 5,489,677 and in published PCT applications PCT / US92 / 04294 and PCT / US92 / 04305 (published as WO 92/20822 and WO 92/20823, respectively). The formacetal and thioformacetal linked oligoribonucleosides can be prepared as described in US Patent Nos. 5,264,562 and 5,264,564. Ethylene oxide-linked oligoribonucleosides can be prepared as described in US Patent No. 5,223,618. Siloxane replacements are described in Cormier, JF et al. Nucleic Acids Res. 1988, 16, 4583. Carbonate replacements are described in Tittensor, JRJ
IMPI
116
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF PROPERTY
INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX338780B_D0114.tif" />
Chem. Soc. C 1971, 1933. Carboxymethyl replacements are described in Edge, MD et al. J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans. 1 1972, 1991. Carbamate replacements are described in
Stirchak, EP Nucleic Acids Res. 1989, 17, 6129.
References to the replacement of the main skeleton of phosphatoribose
Cyclobutyl sugar substitute compounds can be prepared as described in US Patent No. 5,359,044. The pyrrolidine sugar substitute can be prepared as described in US Patent No. 5,519,134. Morpholino sugar substitutes can be prepared as described in US Patent Nos. 5,142,047 and 5,235,033 and other related patent descriptions. Peptide nucleic acids (PNA) are known per se and can be prepared according to any of the various procedures referred to in Peptide Nucleic Acids (PNA): Synthesis, Properties and Potential Applications, Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry, 1996, 4, 523. They can also be prepared according to US Patent No. 5,539,083.
References to terminal modifications
The terminal modifications are described in Manoharan,
<img file="MX338780B_D0115.tif" />
117
<img file="MX338780B_D0116.tif" />
M. et al. Antisense and Nucleic Acid Drug Development 12, 103-128 (2002) and the references therein.
Nucleobase references
The N-2 substituted nucleoside amine purines can be prepared as described in US Patent No. 5,459,255. The 3-deaza nucleoside amine purines can be prepared as described in US Patent No. 5,457,191. The 5,6-substituted pyrimidine nucleoside amidites can be prepared as described in US Patent No. 5,614,617. Pyrimidine nucleoside 5-propynyl amidites can be prepared as described in US Patent No. 5,484,908.
Linkers
The term linker means an organic portion that connects two parts of a compound. Bonds typically comprise a direct bond or an atom such as oxygen or sulfur, a unit such as NR<sup>1</sup>, C (O), C (O) NH, SO, SO<sub>2</sub>, SO<sub>2</sub>NH or a chain of atoms, such as substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl, arylalkyl, arylalkyl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heterocyclyl,
118
IMPI
INSTITUTO MEXICANO D £ LA PROPIEDAD industrial
<img file="MX338780B_D0117.tif" />
heterociclolalquinilo, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, alquilarilalquenilo, alquenilarilalquilo, alquenilarilalquinilo, alquinilarilalquenilo, alkylheteroarylalkyl, alquilheteroarilalquinilo, alquenilheteroarilalquenilo, alquinilheteroarilalquilo, alquinilheteroarilalquinilo, alquilheterociclilalquenilo, alquenilheterociclilalquilo, alquenilheterociclilalquinilo, alkylarylalkyl, alquilarilalquinilo, alquenilarilalquenilo, alquinilarilalquilo, alquinilarilalquinilo, alquilheteroarilalquenilo, alquenilheteroarilalquilo, alquenilheteroarilalquinilo, alquinilheteroarilalquenilo, alkylheterocyclylalkyl, alquilhererociclilalquinilo, alquenilheterociclilalquenilo, alquinilheterociclilalquilo, alquinilheterociclilalquenilo, alquinilheterociclilalquinilo, alkylaryl, alkenylaryl, alkynylaryl, alkylheteroaryl, alquenilheteroarilo, alquinilheteroarilo, where one or more methylenes may be interrupted or terminated by O, S, S (OR), SW<sub>2</sub>, N (R<sup>1</sup>)<sub>2</sub>, C (O), cleavable linking groups, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic; where R<sup>1</sup> it is hydrogen, acyl, aliphatic, or substituted aliphatic.
In one embodiment, the linker is - [(PQR) qX- (P'-Q'R ') g'] qT-, where:
P, R, Τ, Ρ ', R' and T are each independently
<img file="MX338780B_D0118.tif" />
119
<img file="MX338780B_D0119.tif" />
for each occurrence, absent, CO, NH, O, S, OC (O), NHC (O), CH<sub>2</sub>, CH<sub>2</sub>NH, CH<sub>2</sub>OR; NHCH (R<sup>to</sup>) C (O), -C (O) -CH (R<sup>to</sup>) -NH-, CH = NO, oos — s.
•'AND , <sup>S</sup>\ H, <sup>H0</sup>Á or heterocyclyl;
Q and Q 'are each, independently for each occurrence, absent, - (CH<sub>2</sub>)<sub>n</sub>-, -C (R<sup>1</sup>) (R<sup>2</sup>) (CH<sub>2</sub>) <sub>n</sub>~, (CH<sub>2</sub>) <sub>n</sub>C (R<sup>1</sup>) (R<sup>2</sup>) -, - (CH<sub>2</sub>CH<sub>2</sub>OR) <sub>m</sub>CH<sub>2</sub>CH<sub>2</sub>-, or - (CH<sub>2</sub>CH<sub>2</sub>OR) <sub>m</sub>CH<sub>2</sub>CH<sub>2</sub>NH-;
X is absent or is a cleaved linking group;
R<sup>to</sup> it is H or an amino acid side chain;
R<sup>1</sup> and R<sup>2</sup> are each, independently for each occurrence, H, CH3, OH, SH or N (R<sup>N</sup>)2;
R<sup>n</sup> is, independently for each occurrence, H, methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl or benzyl;
q, q 'and q are each, independently for each occurrence, 0-20 and where the repeating unit may be the same or different;
n is, independently for each occurrence, 1-20; and m is, independently for each occurrence, 0-50.
In one embodiment, the bond comprises at least one cleaved linking group.
In some embodiments, the link is a branched link. The branch point of the branch link
IMPI
120
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF PROPERTY
INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX338780B_D0120.tif" />
it can be at least trivalent, but it can be a tetravalent, pentavalent, or hexavalent atom or a group having such multiple valences. In some embodiments, the branch point is -N, -N (Q) -C, -OC, -SC, -SS-C, C (O) N (Q) -C, -OC (0) N (Q ) -C, -N (Q) C (O) -C, or -N (Q) C (O) 0-C; where Q is independently for each occurrence H or optionally substituted alkyl. In another embodiment, the branch point is glycerol or a glycerol derivative.
Splitting junction groups
A cleavable linking group is one that is stable enough outside the cell but that upon entry into a target cell splits to free the two parts that the link is binding. In a preferred embodiment, the cleavable linking group is cleaved at least 10 times or more, preferably at least 100 times faster in the target cell or according to a first reference condition (which can, eg, be selected to mimic or represent intracellular conditions) than in a subject's blood or according to a second reference condition (which may, for example, be selected to mimic or represent conditions found in blood or serum).
Cleavable linker groups are prone to cleavage agents, eg, pH, oxidoreduction potential, or the presence of degradation molecules.
Generally,
<img file="MX338780B_D0121.tif" />
121
<img file="MX338780B_D0122.tif" />
Cleavage agents are more prevalent or are found at higher levels or activities within cells than in serum or blood. Examples of such degradation agents include: oxidoreduction agents that are selected for particular substrates or that do not have substrate specificity, including or, eg, oxidative or reducing enzymes or reducing agents such as mercaptans, present in cells, that they can degrade a cleaved oxidoreduction cleavage group; esterases; endosomes or agents that can create an acidic environment, eg, those that result in a pH of five or less; enzymes that can hydrolyze or degrade an acid cleavage linking group acting as a general acid, peptidases (which may be substrate specific), and phosphatases.
A cleavable linking group such as a disulfide bond can be susceptible to pH. The pH of human serum is 7.4 while the average intracellular pH is slightly lower, located in the range 7.1-7.3. Endosomes have a more acidic pH, in the 5.5-6.0 range, and lysosomes have an even more acidic pH of about 5.0. Some bonds will have a cleavable linking group that cleaves at a preferred pH, thereby releasing the cationic lipid from the ligand within the cell or within the desired cell compartment.
A linker may include a cleavable linking group
122
IMPI
<img file="MX338780B_D0123.tif" />
INDUSTRIAL that is cleavable by a particular enzyme. The type of cleavable linking group incorporated into a bond may depend on the cell to be targeted. For example, ligands that target the liver can bind to cationic lipids through a bond that includes an ester group. Liver cells are rich in esterases and therefore the binding will cleave more efficiently in liver cells than in cell types that are not rich in esterase. Other esterase-rich cell types include cells from the lung, kidney cortex, and testes.
Linkers containing peptide bonds can be used when targeting peptidase-rich cell types, such as liver cells and synoviocytes.
In general, to assess whether a candidate cleavable linker group is suitable, the ability of a degradation agent (or condition) to cleave the candidate linker group is tested. It is also desired to test the candidate cleavable binding group to determine the ability to resist cleavage in blood or when in contact with other non-target tissue. Therefore, the propensity for cleavage between a first and a second condition can be determined, where the former is selected for being an indication of excision in a target cell and the latter is selected for being an indication of excision in other tissues or biological fluids, eg blood or serum.
The
123
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE Of INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY
<img file="MX338780B_D0124.tif" />
Evaluations can be carried out in cell-free systems, in cells, in cell cultures, in organ or tissue cultures, or in whole animals. It may be useful to perform initial evaluations under cell-free conditions or culture conditions and to confirm by additional evaluations in whole animals. In preferred embodiments, useful candidate compounds are cleaved at least 2, 4, 10, or 100 times faster in the cell (or under in vitro conditions selected to mimic intracellular conditions) as compared to blood or serum (or under in vitro conditions). selected to mimic extracellular conditions).
Oxido-reduction cleavable linking groups
One class of cleavable linking groups are oxidoreduction cleavable linking groups that cleave upon reduction or oxidation. An example of a reduction cleavable linker group is a disulfide linker group (—S— S-). To determine if a candidate cleavable linking group is a suitable reduction cleavable linking group, or for example is suitable for use with a particular iRNA moiety or a particular target agent, the methods described herein can be used. For example, a candidate can be evaluated by incubation with dithiothreitol (DTT) or another reducing agent using
124
ΙΜΡΙ
NáTITUn MEXICANO OE THE PROPERTY
INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX338780B_D0125.tif" />
reagents known in the art, which mimic the cleavage rate that would be observed in a cell, eg, a target cell. Candidates can also be evaluated under conditions that are selected to mimic blood or serum conditions. In a preferred embodiment, the candidate compounds are cleaved by a maximum of 10% in the blood. In preferred embodiments, useful candidate compounds degrade at least 2, 4, 10, or 100 times faster in the cell (or under in vitro conditions selected to mimic intracellular conditions) as compared to blood (or under in vitro conditions selected for mimic extracellular conditions). The cleavage rate of candidate compounds can be determined using standard enzyme kinetic assays under conditions chosen to mimic intracellular media and compared to conditions chosen to mimic extracellular media.
Phosphate-based cleavable linker groups
The cleavable phosphate-based linking groups are cleaved by agents that degrade or hydrolyze the phosphate group. An example of an agent that cleaves phosphate groups in cells are enzymes such as phosphatases in cells. Examples of phosphate based linking groups are -0P (O) (ORk) -O-, -OP (S) (ORk) -O-, -0-P (S) (SRk) -0-, -SP (O) (ORk) 0-, -0-P (O) (ORk) -S-, -SP (O) (ORk) -S-, -0-P (S) (ORk) -S-, - S \ .VA
MEXICAN INSTITUTE ^ .- ^ 525- ^ 5 ¿|
OE U nOMM »
INTXrtTXIAl
125
ΜΡΙ
P (S) (ORk) -O-, -OP (O) (Rk) -O-, -OP (S) (Rk) -O-, -SP (O) (Rk) -O-,
-SP (S) (Rk) -O-, -SP (O) (Rk) -S-, -OP (S) (Rk) -S-. Preferred embodiments are: -0-P (O) (OH) -O-, -OP (S) (OH) -O-, -0P (S) (SH) -O-, -SP (O) (OH) -O-, -OP (O) (OH) -S-, -SP (O) (OH) -S-,
-OP (S) (OH) -s-, -SP (S) (OH) -O-, -OP (O) (H) -O-, -OP (S) (H) -O-,
-SP (O) (H) -O-, -SP (S) (H) -O-, -SP (O) (H) -S-, -OP (S) (H) -S-.
A preferred embodiment is -OP (O) (OH) -O-. These candidates can be evaluated using methods analogous to those described above.
Acid cleavage linking groups
Acid cleavable linking groups are linking groups that cleave under acidic conditions. In preferred embodiments, the cleavable linking groups are cleaved in an acidic environment with a pH of about 6.5 or less (eg, about 6.0, 5.5, 5.0 or less) or by such agents as enzymes that can act as a general acid. In a cell, specific low pH organelles, such as endosomes and lysosomes, can provide a cleavage environment for acid cleavable linker groups. Examples of acid cleavable linking groups include, but are not limited to hydrazones, esters, and amino acid esters. Acid cleavable groups can have the general formula -C = NN-, C (0) 0, or -0C (0). A preferred embodiment is when the oxygen-bound carbon of the ester (the alkoxy group) is a
<img file="MX338780B_D0126.tif" />
126
<img file="MX338780B_D0127.tif" />
aryl group, substituted alkyl group, or tertiary alkyl group such as dimethyl pentyl or t-butyl. These candidates can be evaluated using methods analogous to those described above.
Ester-based linking groups
Ester-based cleavable linker groups are cleaved by enzymes such as esterases and amidases in cells. Examples of ester-based cleavable linker groups include, but are not limited to esters of alkylene, alkenylene, and alkynylene groups. The cleavable ester linking groups have the general formula -C (O) O-, or OC (O) -. These candidates can be evaluated using methods analogous to those described above.
Peptide-based cleavable groups
Peptide-based cleavable linker groups are cleaved by enzymes such as peptidases and proteases in cells. Peptide-based cleavable linking groups are peptide bonds formed between amino acids to provide oligopeptides (eg, dipeptides, tripeptides, etc.) and polypeptides. Peptide-based cleavable groups do not include the amide group (-C (O) NH-). The amide group can be formed from any alkylene, alkenylene, or alkynylene. A peptide bond is a special type of
127
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY
<img file="MX338780B_D0128.tif" />
amide bond formed between amino acids to provide peptides and proteins. The peptide-based cleavage group is generally limited to the peptide bond (i.e., the amide bond) formed between amino acids providing peptides and proteins and does not include the entire amide functional group. Peptide-based cleavable linking groups have the general formula NHCHR<sup>TO</sup>C (O) NHCHR<sup>B</sup>C (O) -, where R<sup>TO</sup> and R<sup>B</sup> they are the R groups of the two adjacent amino acids. These candidates can be evaluated using methods analogous to those described above.
Ligands
A wide variety of entities can be coupled to the oligonucleotides and lipids of the present invention. Ligands that are coupled, preferably covalently, either directly or indirectly via an intermediate link, are preferred portions.
In preferred embodiments, a ligand alters the distribution, targeting, or life of a molecule in which it is incorporated. In preferred embodiments a ligand provides an improved affinity for a chosen target, eg. molecule, cell or cell type, compartment, eg, a cell or organ compartment, tissue, organ, or body region compared to, eg, a species that can
128
ΙΜ
MEXICAN INSTITUTE f> r -— ««: OE The property V · ». INDUSTRIAL lacks said ligand. Ligands that provide enhanced affinity for a chosen target are also called target ligands. Preferred ligands for conjugation of the lipids of the present invention are target ligands.
Some ligands may have endosomolytic properties. Endosomolytic ligands promote lysis of the endosome and / or transport of the composition of the invention, or its components, from the endosome to the cytoplasm of the cell. The endosomolytic ligand can be a polyanionic or peptidomimetic peptide that exhibits pH dependent fusogenicity and membrane activity. In certain modalities, the endosomolytic ligand assumes its active conformation at endosomal pH. The active conformation is that conformation in which the endosomolytic ligand promotes lysis of the endosome and / or transport of the composition of the invention, or its components, from the endosome to the cytoplasm of the cell. Examples of endosomolytic ligands include GALA peptide (Subbarao et al., Biochemistry, 1987, 26: 2964-2972), EALA peptide (Vogel et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc., 1996, 118: 1581-1586 ) and its derivatives (Turk et al., Biochem. Biophys. Acta, 2002, 1559: 56-68). In certain embodiments, the endosomolytic component may contain a chemical group (eg, an amino acid) that will undergo a change in charge or protonation in
129
IMPI wnrruTS)
Say LA fJÚK'aw IND'JLT ilAL
<img file="MX338780B_D0129.tif" />
response to a change in pH. The endosomolytic component can be linear or branched. Examples of peptide-based endosomolytic ligand primary sequences are shown in Table 4.
Table 4: List of peptides with endosomolytic activity.
<td>Name</td><td>Sequence (N to C)</td><td>Ref.</td>
<td>GALA</td><td>AALEALAEALEALAEALEALAEAAAAGGC</td><td> 1</td>
<td>EALA</td><td>AALAEALAEALAEALAEALAEALAAAAGGC</td><td> 2</td>
<td></td><td>ALEALAEALEALAEA</td><td> 3</td>
<td>INF-7</td><td>GLFEAIEGFIENGWEGMIWDYG</td><td> 4</td>
<td>Inf HA-2</td><td>GLFGAIAGFIENGWEGMIDGWYG</td><td> 5</td>
<td>diINF-7</td><td>GLF EAI EGFI ENGW EGMI DGWYGC GLF EAI EGFI ENGW EGMI DGWYGC</td><td> 5</td>
<td>diINF3</td><td>GLF EAI EGFI ENGW EGMI DGGC GLF EAI EGFI ENGW EGMI DGGC</td><td> 6</td>
<td>GLF</td><td>GLFGALAEALAEALAEHLAEALAEALEALAAGGSC</td><td> 6</td>
<td>GALA-INF3</td><td>GLFEAIEGFIENGWEGLAEALAEALEALAAGGSC</td><td> 6</td>
<td>INF-5</td><td>GLF EAI EGFI ENGW EGnl DG K</td><td> 4</td>
130
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY
<img file="MX338780B_D0130.tif" />
<td></td><td>GLF EAI EGFI ENGW EGnl DG</td><td></td>
N: norleucine
References
<td> 1.</td><td>Subbarao et</td><td>to the.,</td><td>Biochemistry,</td><td colspan="2"> 1987, 26: 2964-2972.</td>
<td> 2.</td><td>Vogel et al.</td><td>, Ι-</td><td>Am. Chem. Soc.</td><td> , 1996, 118:</td><td> : 1581-1586</td>
<td> 3.</td><td>Turk, M.</td><td>Ο-,</td><td>Reddy, J.</td><td>A. et</td><td>to the. (2002).</td>
<td colspan="2">Characterization</td><td>of</td><td>at novel pH</td><td>-sensitive</td><td>peptide that</td>
enhancing drug release from folate-targeted liposomes at endosomal pHs. Biochim. Biophys. Act 1559, 56-68.
Four. Plank, C. Oberhauser, B. Mechtler, K. Koch, C. Wagner,
E. (1994). The influence of endosome-disruptive peptides on gene transfer using synthetic virus-like gene transfer systems, J. Biol. Chem. 269 12918-12924.
5. Mastrobattista, E., Koning, GA et al. (2002). Functional characterization of an endosome-disruptive peptide and its application in cytosolic delivery of immunoliposome-
<td>entrapped</td><td>proteins.</td><td>J. Biol.</td><td>Chem.</td><td colspan="2"> 277, 27135-43.</td>
<td colspan="2">6. Oberhauser, B.</td><td>, Plank,</td><td>C.</td><td>et al.</td><td>(nineteen ninety five). Enhancing</td>
<td>endosomal</td><td>exit of</td><td>nucleic</td><td>acids</td><td>using</td><td>pH-sensitive viral</td>
fusion peptides. Deliv. Strategies Antisense Oligonucleotide
Ther. 247-66.
Preferred ligands can improve transport, hybridization, and specificity properties as well
<img file="MX338780B_D0131.tif" />
131
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF THE PPOriH> Year
INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX338780B_D0132.tif" />
they can enhance the nuclease resistance of the resulting natural or modified oligoribonucleotide, or a polymer molecule comprising any combination of monomers described herein and / or natural or modified ribonucleotides.
Ligands in general can include therapeutic modifiers, eg. to improve absorption; diagnostic compounds or indicator groups, eg. to monitor distribution; crosslinking agents and portions that confer nuclease resistance. General examples include lipids, spheroids, vitamins, sugars, proteins, peptides, polyamines, and peptide mimics.
Ligands can include a naturally occurring substance, such as a protein (eg, human serum albumin (HSA), low-density lipoprotein (LDL), high-density lipoprotein (HDL), or globulin), a carbohydrate (eg a dextran, pullulan, chitin, chitosan, inulin, cyclodextrin, or hyaluronic acid) or a lipid. The ligand can also be a recombinant or synthetic molecule, such as a synthetic polymer, eg, a synthetic polyamino acid, an oligonucleotide (eg, an aptamer). Examples of polyamino acids include polyamino acids such as polylysine (PLL), poly L-aspartic acid, poly L-glutamic acid, styrene-maleic acid anhydride copolymer, poly (L-
<img file="MX338780B_D0133.tif" />
132
IMPI<sup>¿</sup> *
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY lactide-co-glycolied), divinyl ether maleic anhydride copolymer, N- (2-hydroxypropyl) methacrylamide (HMPA) copolymer, polyethylene glycol (PEG), polyvinyl alcohol (PVA), polyurethane, poly (2-acid ethylacrylic), N-isopropylacrylamide or polyphosphazine polymers. Examples of polyamines include: polyethyleneimine, polylysine (PLL), spermine, spermidine, polyamine, pseudopeptide-polyamine, polyamine peptidomimetic, polyamine dendrimer, arginine, amidine, protamine, cationic lipid, cationic porphyrin, polyamine salt of a polyamine helical alpha. Ligands can also include target groups, eg. an agent that targets a cell or tissue, eg. a lecithin, glycoprotein, lipid, or protein, eg. an antibody that binds to a specified cell type such as a kidney cell. A target group can be a thyrotropin, melanotropin, lectin, glycoprotein, surfactant protein A, mucin carbohydrate, multivalent lactose, multivalent galactose, N-acetyl-galactosamine, multivalent trickle N-acetyl-gulucosamine, multivalent fucose, glycosylated polyamino acids, galactose transferrin, bisphosphonate, polyglutamate, polyaspartate, a lipid, cholesterol, a spheroid, bile acid, folate, vitamin B12, biotin, an RGD peptide, a RGD peptide mimetic or an aptamer. Table 5 shows some examples of target ligands and their associated receptors.
<img file="MX338780B_D0134.tif" />
133
Table 5: Target Ligands and Their Associated Receptors
<td>Liver cells</td><td>Flirting</td><td>Receiver</td>
<td></td><td></td><td></td>
<td>1) Cell parenchymal (PC) (Hepatocytes)</td><td>Galactose</td><td>ASGP-R (Receiver of asiologicoprotein</td>
<td></td><td>Gal NAc (n-acetyl- galactosamine)</td><td>ASPG-R Gal NAc receiver</td>
<td></td><td>Lactose</td><td></td>
<td></td><td>Asialofetuine</td><td>ASPG-r</td>
<td></td><td></td><td></td>
<td>2) Cell endothelial sinusoidal (SEC)</td><td>Hyaluronan</td><td>Receiver hyaluronan</td>
<td></td><td>Procollagen</td><td>Receiver procollagen</td>
<td></td><td>Molecules with charge negative</td><td>Receivers scrubbers</td>
<td></td><td>Crafty</td><td>Crafty receivers</td>
<td></td><td>N-acetyl glucosaline</td><td>Receivers scrubbers</td>
<td></td><td>Immunoglobulins</td><td>Fe receiver</td>
<td></td><td>LPS</td><td>CD14 receiver</td>
<td></td><td>Insulin</td><td>Mediated transcytosis</td>
ζχί
134
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF INOUSTRIAL PROPERTY
<td></td><td></td><td>per receiver</td>
<td></td><td>Transferrin</td><td>Mediated transcytosis per receiver</td>
<td></td><td>Albumins</td><td>Not specific</td>
<td></td><td>Conjugates of sugar-albumin</td><td></td>
<td></td><td>Crafty-6-phosphate</td><td>Mannose receptor- 6-phosphate</td>
<td></td><td></td><td></td>
<td>3) Kupffer cell (KC)</td><td>Crafty</td><td>Crafty receivers</td>
<td></td><td>Mucous membrane</td><td>Mucosa receptors</td>
<td></td><td>Albumins</td><td>Not specific</td>
<td></td><td>Conjugates of mannose-albumin</td><td></td>
Other examples of ligands include dyes, intercalating agents (eg acridines), crosslinking agents (eg psoralen, mitomycin C), porphyrins (TPPC4, texaphyrin, Sapphyrin), polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons (eg phenazine, dihydrofenazine), endonucleases artificial (eg. EDTA), lipophilic molecules, eg cholesterol, cholic acid, acetic acid adamantane, butyric acid 1-pyrene, dihydrotestosterone, 1,3-Bis-O (hexadecyl) glycerol, geranyloxyhexyl group, hexadecylglycerol, borneol, menthol, 1,3L
135 and
INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY Propanediol, heptadecyl group, palmitic acid, myristic acid, 03- (oleoyl) lithocolic acid, 03 (oleoyl) cholenic acid, dimethoxytryl or phenoxazine) and peptide conjugates (eg, peptide, antennapedia, Tat peptide), alkylating agents, phosphate, amino, mercapto, PEG (eg PEG-40K), MPEG, [MPEG]<sub>2</sub>, polyamino, alkyl, substituted alkyl, radiolabeled markers, enzymes, haptens (eg, biotin), transport / absorption facilitators (eg, aspirin, vitamin E, folic acid), synthetic ribonucleases (eg, imidazole, bisimidazole , histamine, imidazole group, acridine-imidazole conjugates, Eu3 + complexes of tetraazamacrocycles), dinitrophenyl, HRP, or AP.
Ligands can be proteins, eg. glycoprotein or peptides, eg. molecules that have a specific affinity for a co-ligand, or antibodies eg. an antibody that binds to a specific cell type such as a cancer cell, endothelial cell, or bone cell. Ligands can also include hormones and hormone receptors. They can also include non-peptidic species, such as lipids, lectins, carbohydrates, vitamins, cofactors, multivalent lactose, multivalent galactose, Nacetyl-galactosamine, multivalent trick glucosamine, multivalent fucose or aptamers.
it may be, for example, a lipopolysaccharide, a p38 MAP kinase activator, or an NF-kB activator.
N-acetylE1 ligand
IMPi
136
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OE LA FHOFlfOAD
INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX338780B_D0135.tif" />
V /. '
The ligand can be a substance, eg, a drug, which can increase the absorption of the iRNA agent into the cell, eg, by altering the cytoskeleton of the cell, eg. altering the cell's microtubules, microfilaments and / or intermediate filaments. The drug may be, for example, taxon, vincristine, vinblastine, cytochalasin, nocodazole, japlakinolide, latrunculin A, phalloidin, swinholida A, indanocin or myoservin.
The ligand can increase the absorption of the iRNA agent in the cell by activating an inflammatory response, for example. Examples of ligands that would have such an effect include tumor necrosis factor alpha (TNFalfa), interleukin-1 beta, or gamma interferon.
In one aspect, the ligand is a lipid or a lipid-based molecule. Such a lipid or lipid-based molecule preferably binds a serum protein, eg. human serum albumin (HSA). An HSA binding ligand allows the distribution of the conjugate to a target tissue, eg. a non-kidney target tissue of the body. For example, the target tissue may be the liver, including liver parenchymal cells. Other molecules that can bind HSA can also be used as ligands. For example, neproxin or aspirin can be used. A lipid-based lipid ligand can (a) increase resistance to conjugate degradation, (b) increase targeting or transport
IMPI
137
INSTITUTE ΜΕΧίΓΑΝΟ O € LA P / OP1EOA.C
INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX338780B_D0136.tif" />
to a target cell or cell membrane, and / or (c) be used to adjust binding to a serum protein, eg.
HSA.
A lipid-based ligand can be used to modulate, eg. control the binding of the conjugate to a target tissue. For example, a lipid-based lipid ligand that binds to HSA more strongly will be less likely to be targeted to the kidney and therefore less likely to be removed from the body. A lipid-based lipid ligand that binds to HSA less tightly can be used to target the conjugate to the kidney.
In a preferred embodiment, the lipid-based ligand binds HSA. Preferably, it binds HSA with sufficient affinity such that the conjugate will preferentially distribute to non-kidney tissue. However, it is preferred that the affinity is not so strong that the HSA-ligand binding cannot be reversed.
In another preferred embodiment, the lipid-based ligand binds HSA weakly or directly does not bind, such that the conjugate will preferentially distribute to the kidney. Other portions that target kidney cells can also be used in place of or in addition to the lipid-based ligand.
In another aspect, the ligand is a portion, eg. a vitamin, which is absorbed by a target cell, eg.
138
IMPI
INSTITUTO MEXICANO DE LA FROPÍEDAD INDUSTRIAL a proliferating cell. These are particularly useful for treating disorders characterized by unwanted cell proliferation, eg. of the malignant or non-malignant type, eg cancer cells. Examples of vitamins include vitamins A, E, and K. Other examples of vitamins are vitamin B, eg, folic acid, B12, riboflavin, biotin, pyridoxal, or other vitamins or nutrients absorbed by cancer cells. Also included are HAS, low-density lipoprotein (LDL), and high-density lipoprotein (HDL).
In another aspect, the ligand is a cell penetrating agent, preferably a helical cell penetrating agent. Preferably the agent is amphipathic. An example of an agent is a peptide such as tat or antenopedia. If the agent is a peptide, it can be modified, including a peptidylmimetic, invertomers, non-peptidic or pseudo-peptide bonds and the use of D-amino acids. The helical agent is preferably an alpha-helical agent, which preferably has a lipophilic and a lipophobic phase.
The ligand can be a peptide or a peptidomimetic. A peptidomimetic (also referred to herein as oligopeptidomimetic) is a molecule capable of folding into a defined three-dimensional structure similar to a natural peptide. The peptide or peptidomimetic moiety can be about 5-50 amino acids in length, eg. around 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, or 50
<img file="MX338780B_D0137.tif" />
139 amino acids in length (see Table 6, for example).
Table 6 Examples of cell permeation peptides
<td> 5</td><td>Peptide penetration mobile</td><td>Amino acid sequence</td><td>Reference</td>
<td rowspan="2"> 10</td><td>Penetratin</td><td>RQIKIWFQNRRMKWKK</td><td>Derossi et al., J. Biol. Chem. 269: 10444, 1994</td>
<td>Fragment tat (48-60)</td><td>GRKKRRQRRRPPQC</td><td>Vives et al., J. Biol. Chem., 272: 16010, 1997</td>
<td></td><td>Peptide based in sequence of</td><td>GALFLGWLGAAGSTMGAWSQPKKKRKV</td><td>Chaloin et al., Biochem.</td>
<td> 15</td><td>signal</td><td></td><td>Biophys. Beef. Common., 243: 601, 1998</td>
<td> 20</td><td>PVEC</td><td>LLIILRRRIRKQAHAHSK</td><td>Elmquist et al., Exp. Cell Res., 269: 237, 2001</td>
<td></td><td>Transporter</td><td>GWTLNSAGYLLKINLKALAALAKKIL</td><td>Pooga et al., FASEB J., 12:67, 1998</td>
140
ΙΜΡΙ
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY
<img file="MX338780B_D0138.tif" />
<td>Peptide model amphiphilic</td><td>KLALKLALKALKAALKLA</td><td>Oehlke et al., Mol. Ther., 2: 339,2000</td>
<td>Argig</td><td>RRRRRRRRR</td><td>Mitchell et al., J. Pept. Res., 56: 318, 2000</td>
<td>Penetration of cellular wall bacterial</td><td>KFFKFFKFFK</td><td></td>
<td>LL-37</td><td>LLGDFFRKSKEKIGKEFKRIVQRI KDFLRNLVPRTES</td><td></td>
<td>Cecropina Pl</td><td>SWLSKGAKKLENSAKKRISEGIAI AIQGGPR</td><td></td>
<td>A-defensin</td><td>ACYCRIPACIAGERRYGTCIYQGR LWAFCC</td><td></td>
<td>b-defensin</td><td>DHYNCVSSGGQCLYSACPIFTKIQ GTCYRGKAKCCK</td><td></td>
<td>Bactenecin</td><td>RKCRIVVIRVCR</td><td></td>
<td>PR-39</td><td>RRRPRPPYLPRPRPPPFFPPRLPP RIPPGFPPRFPPRFPGKR-NH2</td><td></td>
<td>Indolicidin</td><td>ILPWKWPWWPWRR-NH2</td><td></td>
A peptide or peptidomimetic can be, for example, a cell permeation peptide, cationic peptide, peptide
IMPIOUS. ,
MEXICAN INSTITUTE
OF PROPERTY C
INE'USTRIAL ^ = · ““ 141 unfriendly or hydrophobic peptide (eg consisting mainly of Tyr, Trp or Phe). The peptide portion can be a dendrimer peptide, restricted peptide, or cross-linked peptide. In another alternative, the peptide moiety can include a hydrophobic membrane translocation sequence (MTS). A peptide containing an example of hydrophobic MTS is RFGF which has the amino acid sequence AAVALLPAVLLALLAP. An RFGF analog (eg, amino acid sequence AALLPVLLAAP) containing a hydrophobic MTS may also be a target moiety. The peptide moiety can be a delivery peptide, which can transport large polar molecules including peptides, oligonucleotides, and proteins through cell membranes. For example, the sequences of the HIV Tat protein (GRKKRRQRRRPPQ) and the Drosophila Antennapedia protein (RQIKIWFQNRRMKWKK) have been found to function as delivery peptides. A peptide or peptidomimetic can be encoded by a random DNA sequence, such as a peptide identified from a phage display library or a one-bead-one (OBOC) combinatorial library of compounds (Lam et al., Nature, 354: 82-84, 1991). Preferably the peptide or peptidomimetic linked to an iRNA agent by means of a built-in monomer unit is a cell-directed peptide such as an arglnine-glycine-aspartide peptide142
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY
<img file="MX338780B_D0139.tif" />
(RGD) or RGD Mimetic: A peptide moiety can range in length from about 5 amino acids to about 40 amino acids. The peptide portions can have a structural modification, such as to increase stability properties or direct conformational properties. Any of the structural modifications described below can be used.
A portion of RGD peptide can be used to target a tumor cell, such as an endothelial tumor cell or a breast cancer tumor cell (Zitzmann et al., Cancer Res., 62: 5139-43, 2002). An RGD peptide can facilitate targeting of an iRNA agent to tumors from a variety of other tissues, including the lung, kidney, spleen, or liver (Aoki et al., Cancer Gene Therapy 8: 783-787, 2001). Preferably, the RGD peptide will facilitate targeting of an iRNA agent to the kidney. The RGD peptide can be linear or cyclic and can be modified, eg. Glycosylated or methylated to facilitate targeting to specific tissues. For example, a glycosylated RGD peptide can deliver an iRNA agent to a tumor cell that expresses oi<sub>v</sub>B3 (Haubner et al., Jour. Nucí. Med., 42: 326-336, 2001).
Peptides that target markers enriched in proliferative cells can be used. For example. peptides and peptidomimetics containing RGD can be targeted to
143
MEXICAN INSTITUTE give the >>.? Χα / · η
INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX338780B_D0140.tif" />
cancer cells, in particular cells that have an ανβ3 integrin. Therefore, RGD peptides, cyclic peptides containing RGD, RGD peptides including D-amino acids, as well as synthetic RGD mimetics could be used. In addition to RGD, other portions that target the ανβ3 integrin ligand can be used. Generally, such ligands can be used to control proliferative cells and angiogenesis. Preferred conjugates of this type of ligand that target PECAM-1, VEGF, or another cancer gene, eg. a cancer gene described herein.
A cell permeation peptide is capable of penetrating a cell, eg. a microbial cell, such as a bacterial or fungal cell, or a mammalian cell, such as a human cell. A microbial cell penetration peptide can be, for example, a linear helical peptide (eg, LL-37 or Ceropina Pl), a peptide that confides a disulfide bond (eg, α -defensin, βdefensin, or bactenecin) , or a peptide containing only one or two dominant amino acids (eg, PR-39 or indolicidin). A cell permeation peptide can also include a nuclear localization signal (NLS). For example, a cell penetration peptide may be a bipartisan antipathetic peptide, such as MPG, that comes from the domain of the HIV-1 fusion peptide gp41 and the SV40 NLS large T antigen.
144
<img file="MX338780B_D0141.tif" />
FROM THE ΡΜΟΓΙΕΟ \ Γ> '.-. Ν, ζ. *<sup>1</sup>, INDUSTRIAL *> - (Simeoni et al., Nucí. Acids Res. 31: 2717-2724, 2003).
In one embodiment, a target peptide linked to an iRNA agent and / or the carrier oligomer can be an unfriendly α-helical peptide. Unfriendly α-helical peptides include, but are not limited to, cecropins, licotoxins, paradoxins, buforin, CPF, bombinin-like peptide (BLP), cathelicidins, ceratotoxins, S peptides.
clava, hagfish intestinal antimicrobial peptides (HFIAP), magainins, brevinins-2, dermaseptins, melittins, pleurocidine, H peptides<sub>2</sub>A, Xenopus peptides, esculentinis-1 and caerinas. Preferably a number of factors will be considered to maintain the integrity of the propeller stability. For example, a maximum number of helix stabilization residues (eg leu, ala or lys) and a minimum number of helix destabilization residues (eg proline or cyclic monomer units) will be used. The coating residue will be considered (eg Gly is an example of N-coating residue and / or the C-terminal amidation can be used to provide an extra H bond to stabilize the helix. The formation of salt bridges between the residues with opposite charges , separated by i ± 3, or i ± 4 positions can provide stability. For example, cationic residues such as lysine, arginine, homo-arginine, ornithine, or histidine can form saline bridges with glutamate or anionic residues.
145
<img file="MX338780B_D0142.tif" />
aspartate.
Peptide and peptidomimetic ligands include those that have naturally occurring or modified peptides, eg. D or L peptides, α, β or γ peptides, N-methyl peptides, azapeptides, peptides having one or more amides, i.e., peptide, linkages replaced with one or more urea, thiourea, carbamate or sulfonylurea linkages or cyclic peptides .
The targeting ligand can be any ligand that is capable of targeting a specific receptor. Examples are: folate, GalNAc, galactose, mannose, mannose-6P, groups of sugars such as GalNAc group, group of mannose, group of galactose or an aptamer. A group is a combination of two or more units of sugar. Targeting ligands also include integrin receptor ligands, chemokine receptor ligands, transferrin, biotin, serotonin receptor ligands, PSMA, endothelin, GCPII, somatostatin, LDL and HDL ligands. Ligands can also be nucleic acid based, eg, an aptamer. The aptamer may be unmodified or it may have any combination of modifications described herein.
Endosomal release agents include imidazoles, poly or oligoimidazoles, PEIs, peptides, fusogenic peptides, polycarboxylates, polyacations, oligo or poly cations or masked anions, acetals, polyacetals
146
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE
FROM PROPERTY C »WN-AMüf> '
INDUSTRIAL - ketal / polykethal, orthoesters, masked or unmasked cationic or anionic fillers, masked or unmasked dendrimers with cationic or anionic fillers.
PK modulator means pharmacokinetic modulator. The PK modulator includes lipophiles, bile acids, spheroids, phospholipid analogs, peptides, protein / binding agents, PEGs, vitamins, etc. Examples of PK modulators include, but are not limited to, cholesterol, fatty acids, cholic acid, lithocolic acid, dialkylglycerides, diacylglycerides, phospholipids, sphingolipids, naproxen, ibuprofen, vitamin E, biotin, etc. Oligonucleotides comprising a number of phosphorothioate linkages are also known to bind to whey protein; therefore short oligonucleotides, eg. Oligonucleotides of about 5 bases, 10 bases, 15 bases or 20 bases, comprising multiple phosphorothioate linkages in the backbone can also be considered in the present invention as ligands (eg as PK modulating ligands).
Furthermore, aptamers that bind to serum components (eg serum proteins) can also be considered in the present invention as PK modulating ligands.
Other suitable ligands for the invention are described in co-pending applications USSN: 10 / 916,185, filed on
147
ΙΜΡΪ
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OE THE INDUSTRIAL RSOPIEDAD
<img file="MX338780B_D0143.tif" />
August 2004; USSN: 10 / 946,873, filed September 21, 2004; USSN: 10 / 833,934, filed August 3, 2007; USSN: 11 / 115,989, filed April 27, 2005 and USSN: 11 / 944,227 filed November 21, 2007, which are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety for all purposes.
When two or more ligands are present, all ligands can have the same properties, all can have different properties, or some ligands can have the same properties while others have different properties. For example, a ligand can have targeting properties, have endosomolytic activity, or have PK modulatory properties. In a preferred embodiment, all ligands have different properties.
Ligands can be coupled to oligonucleotides at various locations, eg, 3 'end, 5' end, and / or internally. In preferred embodiments, the ligand is linked to the oligonucleotides via an intermediate link. The ligand or linker ligand may be present in a monomer when said monomer is incorporated into the growing filament. In some embodiments, the ligand can be incorporated by coupling to a precursor monomer after said precursor monomer has been incorporated into the growing filament. For example, a monomer that has, for example, a
148
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY
<img file="MX338780B_D0144.tif" />
amino-terminated bond (i.e., does not have an associated ligand) eg. TAP- (CH<sub>2</sub>)<sub>n</sub>NH<sub>2</sub> can be incorporated into a growing sense or antisense filament. In a subsequent operation, that is, after incorporation of the precursor monomer into the chain, a ligand having an electrophilic group, eg. a pentafluorophenyl ester or an aldehyde group may subsequently be attached to the precursor monomer by coupling the electrophilic group of the ligand to the terminal nucleophilic group of the linker of the precursor monomer.
In the case of double-stranded oligonucleotides, the ligands can bind to one or both of the filaments. In some embodiments, a double-stranded iRNA agent contains a ligand conjugated to the sense strand. In other embodiments, a double-stranded iRNA agent contains a ligand conjugated to the antisense strand.
In some embodiments, the ligands can be conjugated to the nucleobases, sugar moieties, or internucleoside linkages of nucleic acid molecules. Conjugation to purine nucleobases or derivatives thereof can occur at any position including, endocyclic and exocyclic atoms. In some embodiments, the 2-, 6-, 7-, or 8-positions of a purine nucleobase are attached to a conjugated portion. Conjugation to pyrimidine nucleobases or derivatives thereof can also occur
<img file="MX338780B_D0145.tif" />
149
<img file="MX338780B_D0146.tif" />
in any position. In some embodiments, positions 2-, 5-, and 6- of a pyrimidine nucleobase may be replaced by a conjugated portion. Conjugation to sugar portions of the nucleotides can occur at any carbon atom. Examples of carbon atoms of a sugar moiety that can be attached to a conjugated moiety include the 2 ', 3' and 5 'carbon atoms.
The 1 'position can also be attached to a conjugated portion such as an abasic residue. Internucleosidic bonds can also support conjugated portions. For phosphorous-containing bonds (eg, phosphodiester, phosphorothioate, phosphorodithioate, phosphoramidate, and the like), the conjugated moiety may be attached directly to the phosphorus atom or to a 0, N, or S atom attached to a phosphorus atom. For internucleoside linkages containing amine or amide (eg. PNA), the conjugated moiety may be attached to the nitrogen atom of the amine or amide or to an adjacent carbon atom.
There are numerous methods for preparing conjugates of oligomeric compounds. In general, an oligomeric compound is attached to a conjugated portion through contact of a reactive group (eg, OH, SH, amine, carboxyl, aldehyde, and the like) in the oligomeric compound with a reactive group on the conjugated moiety. In some embodiments, one reactive group is electrophilic and the other is nucleophilic.
150
<img file="MX338780B_D0147.tif" />
For example, an electrophilic group can be a carbonyl-containing functionality and a nucleophilic group can be an amine or a thiol. Conjugation methods of nucleic acids and related oligomeric compounds with and without linking groups are well described in the literature such as, for example, in Manoharan in Antisense Research and
Applications, Crooke and LeBleu, eds., CRC Press, Boca Ratón,
Fia., 1993, chapter 17, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
Representative US patents that teach the preparation of oligonucleotide conjugates include, but are not limited to, US Patent Nos.
<td> 4,828,979;</td><td> 4,948,882,</td><td> 5,218,</td><td> 105,</td><td> 5,</td><td> 525,465;</td><td> 5, 541</td>
<td> 5,545,730;</td><td> 5,552,538,</td><td> 5,578,</td><td> 717,</td><td> 5,</td><td> 580,731;</td><td> 5,580</td>
<td> 5,591,584;</td><td> 5,109,124,</td><td> 5,118,</td><td> 802,</td><td> 5,</td><td> 138,045;</td><td> 5, 414</td>
<td> 5,486,603;</td><td> 5,512,439,</td><td> 5,578,</td><td> 718,</td><td> 5,</td><td> 608,046;</td><td> 4,587</td>
<td> 4,605,735;</td><td> 4,667,025,</td><td> 4,762,</td><td> 779,</td><td> 4,</td><td> 789,737;</td><td> 4,824</td>
<td> 4,835,263;</td><td> 4,876,335,</td><td> 4,904,</td><td> 582,</td><td> 4,</td><td> 958,013;</td><td> 5, 082</td>
<td> 5,112,963;</td><td> 5, 214,136,</td><td> 5,082,</td><td> 830,</td><td> 5,</td><td> 112,963;</td><td> 5,149</td>
<td> 5,214,136;</td><td> 5,245,022,</td><td> 5,254,</td><td> 469,</td><td> 5,</td><td> 258,506;</td><td> 5,262</td>
<td> 5,272,250;</td><td> 5,292,873,</td><td> 5,317,</td><td> 098,</td><td> 5,</td><td> 371,241,</td><td> 5, 391</td>
<td> 5,416,203,</td><td> 5,451,463,</td><td> 5,510,</td><td> 475,</td><td> 5,</td><td> 512,667;</td><td> 5,514</td>
<td> 5,565,552;</td><td> 5,567,810,</td><td> 5,574,</td><td> 142,</td><td> 5,</td><td> 585,481;</td><td> 5,587</td>
<td> 5,595,726;</td><td> 5,597,696,</td><td> 5,599,</td><td> 923,</td><td> 5,</td><td> 599,928;</td><td> 5, 672</td>
<td> 5,688,941;</td><td> 5,714,166,</td><td> 6,153,</td><td> 737,</td><td> 6,</td><td> 172,208;</td><td> 6,300</td>
<img file="MX338780B_D0148.tif" />
151
<img file="MX338780B_D0149.tif" />
6,335,434; 6,335,437; 6,395, 437; 6,444,806; 6,486,308;
6, 525,031; 6, 528,631; 6,559, 279; each of which is incorporated herein by reference.
Characteristics of nucleic acid-lipid particles
In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to methods and compositions for producing lipid encapsulated nucleic acid particles in which nucleic acids are encapsulated with a lipid layer. Such nucleic acid-lipid particles incorporating siRNA oligonucleotides are characterized using a variety of biophysical parameters including: (1) drug-lipid ratio; (2) encapsulation efficiency and (3) particle size. High drug-lipid ratios, high encapsulation efficiency, good nuclease resistance and serum stability and a controllable particle size, generally less than 200nm in diameter, are desired. Furthermore, the nature of the nucleic acid polymer is significant because modification of nucleic acids in an effort to transmit nuclease resistance increases the cost of therapeutics while in many cases providing only limited resistance. Unless otherwise indicated, these criteria are calculated in this specification as follows: The nucleic acid-lipid ratio is the amount of acid
152
IMPí
INST1TVTC MEXICAN »
INDUSTRIAL nucleic in a defined volume of preparation divided by the amount of lipid in the same volume. This can be on a mole-by-mole basis or on a weight-by-weight basis or on a weight-by-mole basis. For final formulations, ready for administration, the nucleic acid: lipid ratio is calculated after dialysis, chromatography and / or enzymatic digestion (eg nuclease) has been used to remove as much external nucleic acid as possible.
Encapsulation efficiency refers to the drug-lipid ratio 10 of the initial mixture divided by the drug-lipid ratio of the final formulation, acceptable for administration. This is a measure of relative efficiency. For an absolute efficiency measure, the total amount of nucleic acid added to the initial mixture ending in the competent administration formulation can also be calculated. The amount of lipid lost during the formulation process can also be calculated. Efficiency is a measure of the waste and expense of the formulation.
The size indicates the size (diameter) of the particles formed. Size distribution can be determined using near-elastic light scattering (QELS) on a Nicomp model 370 sub-micron particle meter. Particles smaller than 200 nm are preferred for distribution of neovascularized (leaky) tissues, such as neoplasms and
Τ ίί
V'í-t'Ta —'ííjl MEXICAN INSTITUTE
DS THE PROPERTY (V · <·;, - 'iJ
INDUSTRIAL AND
153 inflammation sites.
Pharmaceutical compositions
The lipid particles of the present invention, particularly when associated with a therapeutic agent, can be formulated as a pharmaceutical composition, eg. which also comprises a pharmaceutically acceptable diluent, excipient, or carrier, such as a saline or phosphate physiological buffer, selected in accordance with standard route of administration and pharmaceutical practice.
In particular embodiments, the pharmaceutical compositions comprising the lipid nucleic acid particles of the invention are prepared according to standard techniques and further comprise a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. Generally, normal saline will be employed as the pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. Other suitable carriers include, eg. water, buffered water, 0.9% saline, 0.3% glycine, and the like, including glycoproteins for improved stability, such as albumin, lipoprotein, globulin, etc. In compositions comprising saline or other salt-containing carriers, the carrier is preferably added after lipid particle formation. Therefore, after the lipid compositions are formed154
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY
<img file="MX338780B_D0150.tif" />
nucleic acid, the compositions can be diluted in pharmaceutically acceptable carriers such as normal saline.
The resulting pharmaceutical preparations can be sterilized by conventional sterilization techniques well known in the art. The aqueous solutions can then be packaged for use or filtered under aseptic conditions and lyophilized; The lyophilized preparation is combined with a sterile aqueous solution before administration. The compositions may contain pharmaceutically acceptable auxiliary substances as required to approximate physiological conditions, such as pH adjusting and buffering agents, tonicity adjusting agents, and the like, eg, sodium acetate, sodium lactate, chloride of sodium, potassium chloride, calcium chloride, etc. Additionally, the lipid suspension may include lipid protecting agents that protect lipids against free radical damage and peroxidative lipid upon storage. Lipophilic free radical quenchers, such as atocopherol and iron-specific water soluble chelating agents, such as ferrioxamine, are suitable.
The concentration of lipid particle or nucleic acid-lipid particle in pharmaceutical formulations can vary widely, i.e. from less than
IMPIOS
155
OE INDUSTRIAL MONEDAD approximately 0.01%, generally at or at least approximately 0.05-5% up to as much as 10 to 30% by weight and will be selected primarily for volumes, fluid viscosities, etc. according to the particular mode of administration chosen. For example, the concentration can be increased to reduce the fluid load associated with the treatment. This may be particularly desired in patients who have congestive heart failure associated with atherosclerosis or severe hypertension. Alternatively, complexes composed of irritant lipids can be diluted in low concentrations to decrease inflammation at the site of administration. In a group of modalities, the nucleic acid will have an attached label and will be used for diagnosis (by indication of the presence of complementary nucleic acid). In this case, the amount of complexes administered will depend on the particular label used, the disease state being diagnosed, and the physician's judgment, but will generally be between about 0.01 and about 50 mg per kilogram of body weight, preferably between about 0.1 and about 5 mg / kg of body weight.
As indicated above, the particles of the lipid therapeutic agent (eg nucleic acid) of the invention can include polyethylene glycol modified phospholipids
156
IMP iNvrm / ro mexican D 'LA rXDÍ'líílAÚ INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX338780B_D0151.tif" />
(PEG), PEG-ceramide, or GmiU ganglioside-modified lipids other lipids effective in preventing or limiting aggregation. The addition of such components not only prevents complex aggregation. Preferably, it can also provide a means of increasing circulation life and increasing delivery of the nucleicolipid acid composition to target tissues.
The present invention also provides lipid-therapeutic agent compositions in kit form. The kit will typically comprise a container that is divided into compartments to hold the various kit items. The kit will contain the pharmaceutical particles or compositions of the present invention, preferably in the form
<td>dehydrated</td><td>or</td><td>concentrated,</td><td>with instructions</td><td>for your</td>
<td>rehydration</td><td>or</td><td>dilution and</td><td>administration. In</td><td>certain</td>
<td>modalities,</td><td>the</td><td>particles</td><td>comprise the agent</td><td>active,</td>
while in other modalities, they do not.
Manufacturing methods
The methods and compositions of the invention use some cationic lipids, the synthesis, preparation and characterization of which is described below and in the accompanying Examples. Furthermore, the present invention provides methods for preparing lipid particles, including those associated with a therapeutic agent, eg, a nucleic acid. In the methods described herein, a
<img file="MX338780B_D0152.tif" />
lipid mixture combines with an aqueous nucleic acid buffered solution to produce an intermediate mixture containing nucleic acid encapsulated in lipid particles where the encapsulated nucleic acids are present in a nucleic acid / lipid ratio of about 3% by weight to about 25% by weight, preferably 5 to 15% by weight. Optionally, the intermediate mix can be resized to obtain lipid-encapsulated nucleic acid particles where the lipid portions are unilamellar vesicles, which
<td>preferably</td><td>have a diameter of 30</td><td>to 150</td><td>nm plus</td>
<td>preferably</td><td>around 40 to 90 nm.</td><td>Then</td><td>the pH is</td>
<td colspan="2">raise to neutralize at least a portion</td><td>of the</td><td>loads of</td>
<td>surface in</td><td>acid particles</td><td colspan="2">nucleic-lipid,</td>
<td>providing</td><td>well a composition of</td><td>acid</td><td>nucleic</td>
<td>encapsulated in</td><td colspan="2">lipid with neutralized surface</td><td>at least</td>
<td>partially.</td><td></td><td></td><td></td>
<td>Such as</td><td>described above,</td><td>various</td><td>of these</td>
Cationic lipids are amino lipids that are charged at a pH below pK<sub>to</sub> of the amino group and are substantially neutral at a pH above pK<sub>to</sub>. These cationic lipids are called titrable cationic lipids and can be used in the formulations of the invention using a two-step process. First, lipid vesicles can be formed at the lowest pH with titrable cationic lipids and
<img file="MX338780B_D0153.tif" />
other vesicle components in the presence of nucleic acids. In this way, the vesicles will encapsulate and trap nucleic acids. Second, the surface charge of the newly formed vesicles can be neutralized by increasing the pH of the medium to a level above pK<sub>to</sub> of the titratable cationic lipids present, that is, at a physiological pH or higher. Particularly advantageous aspects of this process include both the easy removal of any surface adsorbed nucleic acid and a resulting nucleic acid delivery vehicle having a neutral surface. Liposomes or lipid particles that have a neutral surface are expected to prevent rapid clearance of the circulation and to avoid some toxicities that are associated with cationic liposome preparations. Further details regarding the uses of such titratable cationic lipids in the formulation of nucleic acid-lipid particles are provided in US Patent 6,287,591 and US Patent 6,858,225, which are incorporated herein by reference.
It should also be noted that vesicles formed in this manner provide uniform vesicle size formulations with high nucleic acid content.
Additionally, the vesicles have a size range of between about 30 to about 150 nm, plus
159
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF THE PHÍll'lEOAO INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX338780B_D0154.tif" />
preferably about 30 to about 90 nm.
Without intending to be bound by any particular theory, the very high efficiency of nucleic acid encapsulation is believed to be a result of electrostatic interaction at low pH. At an acidic pH (eg pH 4.0) the surface of the gallbladder is charged and binds a portion of the nucleic acids through electrostatic interactions. When the external acidic damper is exchanged for a more neutral damper (eg. pH of 7.5) The surface of the lipid particle or liposome is neutralized, allowing any external nucleic acid to be removed. More detailed information on the formulation process is provided in various publications (eg, US Patent 6,287,591 and US Patent 6,858,225).
In view of the foregoing, the present invention provides methods for preparing nucleic acid / lipid formulations. In the methods described herein, a lipid mixture is combined with an aqueous nucleic acid buffered solution to produce an intermediate mixture containing nucleic acid encapsulated in lipid particles, eg, where encapsulated nucleic acids are present in a nucleic acid / lipid ratio of about 10% by weight to about 20% by weight. Optionally, the intermediate mix can be resized to obtain acid particles
<img file="MX338780B_D0155.tif" />
<img file="MX338780B_D0156.tif" />
INSTITUTO MfXiCA.MO DF. THE PROPERTY
160 Lipid encapsulated nucleic INDMSTRML where the lipid portions are unilamellar vesicles, preferably having a diameter of 30 to 150 nm, more preferably around 40 to 90 nm. The pH is then raised to neutralize at least a portion of the surface charges on the nucleic acid-lipid particles, thereby providing a lipid encapsulated nucleic acid composition with at least partially neutralized surface.
In some embodiments, the lipid mixture includes at least two lipid components: a first lipid component of the present invention that is selected from lipids having a pKa such that the lipid is cationic at a pH below pKa and neutral to a pH above pKa and a second lipid component that is selected from lipids that prevent particle aggregation during nucleic acid-lipid particle formation. In particular embodiments, the amino lipid is a novel cationic lipid of the present invention.
In preparing the nucleic acid-lipid particles of the invention, the lipid mixture is typically a solution of lipids in an organic solvent. This lipid mixture can then be dried to form a thin film or lyophilized to form a powder before it is hydrated with an aqueous buffer to form liposomes. Alternatively, in a preferred method, the lipid mixture
161
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY
<img file="MX338780B_D0157.tif" />
It can be solubilized in a water-miscible alcohol · such as ethanol, and this ethanolic solution can be added to an aqueous buffer resulting in spontaneous liposome formation. In most modalities, alcohol is used in the form in which it is commercially available. For example, ethanol can be used as absolute ethanol (100%) or as 95% ethanol, the rest is water. This method is described in more detail in US Patent 5,976,567.
In an exemplary embodiment, the lipid mixture is a mixture of cationic lipids, neutral lipids (other than cationic lipids), a sterol (eg, cholesterol), and a PEG-modified lipid (eg, a PEG-DMG or PEG). -DMA) in an alcohol solvent. In preferred embodiments, the lipid mixture consists essentially of a cationic lipid, a neutral lipid, cholesterol, and PEG-modified lipid in alcohol, more preferably ethanol. In additional preferred embodiments, the first solution consists of the above lipid mixture in molar ratios of about 20-70% cationic lipid: 5-45% neutral lipid: 20-55% cholesterol: 0.5-15% modified lipid by PEG. In still other preferred embodiments, the first solution consists essentially of a lipid chosen from Table 1, DSPC, Col and PEG-DMG or PEG-DMA, more preferably in a molar ratio of about 20-60% cationic lipid: 5 -25% of DSPC
162
<img file="MX338780B_D0158.tif" />
: 25-55% Col: 0.5-15% PEG-DMG or PEG-DMA. In particular modalities, the molar lipid ratio is approximately 40/10/40/10 (mol% of cationic lipid / DSPC / Col / PEG-DMG or PEGDMA), 35/15/40/10 (mol% of cationic lipid / DSPC / Col / PEG-DMG or PEG-DMA) or 52/13/30/5 (mol% lipid
<td colspan="2">cationic / DSPC / Col / PEG-DMG</td><td>or</td><td>PEG-DMA).</td><td colspan="2">In another group of</td>
<td>modalities</td><td>preferred,</td><td>the</td><td>lipid</td><td>neutral in</td><td>these</td>
<td>compositions</td><td>is replaced</td><td>with</td><td>POPC, DPPC,</td><td>DOPE or SM.</td><td></td>
In accordance with the invention, the lipid mixture is combined with a buffered aqueous solution that may contain the nucleic acids. The buffered [sic] aqueous solution is typically a solution in which the buffer has a pH less than pK<sub>to</sub> of the protonable lipid in the lipid mixture. Examples of suitable buffers include citrate, phosphate, acetate, and MES. A particularly preferred buffer is citrate buffer. Preferred buffers will be in the 1-1000 mM range of the anion, depending on the chemistry of the nucleic acid being encapsulated and optimizing the buffer concentration can be significant to achieve high loading levels (see, eg, patent 6,287,591 and U.S. Patent 6,858,225). Alternatively, pure water acidified to a pH 5-6 with chloride, sulfate or the like can be useful. In this case, it may be appropriate to add 5% glucose or other non-ionic solute.
163
<img file="MX338780B_D0159.tif" />
which will balance the osmotic potential across the particle membrane when the particles are dialyzed to remove the ethanol, increase the pH, or mix it with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier such as normal saline. The amount of nucleic acid in buffer can vary, but will typically be from about 0.01 mg / mL to about 200 mg / mL, more preferably from about 0.5 mg / mL to about 50mg / mL.
The lipid mixture and the aqueous therapeutic nucleic acid buffered solution combine to provide an intermediate mixture. The intermediate mixture is typically a mixture of lipid particles that have encapsulated nucleic acids. Further, the intermediate mixture may also contain some portion of nucleic acids that are bound to the surface of lipid particles (liposomes or lipid vesicles) due to the ionic attraction of negatively charged nucleic acids and positively charged lipids on the lipid particle surface ( the amino lipids or other lipids that make up the first protonable lipid component are positively charged in a buffer that has a lower pH than pK<sub>to</sub> of the protonable group in the lipid). In a group of preferred modalities, the lipid mixture is an alcoholic lipid solution and the volumes of each of the solutions are adjusted so that, after the ri «h • NSTmrro mixjc • .xf A
DÍ IA> SC7ITOAÜ iN / yiTx.-Λί X ».
164 In combination, the resulting alcohol content is from about 20% by volume to about 45% by volume. The method of combining the mixtures can include any one of a variety of processes, which generally depends on the scale of formulation produced. For example, when the total volume is around 10-20 mL or less, the solutions can be combined in a test tube and shaken together using a vortex mixer. Large-scale processes can be carried out in suitable production-scale glassware.
Optionally, lipid encapsulated therapeutic agent complexes (eg nucleic acid) that are produced by combining the lipid mixture and the buffered aqueous solution of the therapeutic agents (nucleic acids) can be sized to achieve a desired size range and a relatively small distribution of lipid particle sizes. Preferably, the compositions provided herein will be sized to have an average diameter of from about 70 to about 200nm, more preferably from about 90 to about 130nm. There are various techniques to adjust the size of the liposomes to a desired size. A size adjustment method is described in US Patent No. 4,737,323, which is incorporated herein by reference. The sonication of a
165
<img file="MX338780B_D0160.tif" />
Liposome suspension either by bath or tube sonication produces a progressive reduction in size to small unilamellar vesicles (SUVs) of less than about 0.05 microns in size. Homogenization is another method that relies on shear energy to fragment large liposomes into smaller ones. In a typical homogenization procedure, the multilamellar vesicles are recirculated through a standard emulsion homogenizer until selected liposome sizes are observed, typically between about 0.1 and 0.5 microns. In both methods, the particle size distribution can be monitored by determining laser particle size. For some methods herein, extrusion is used to obtain a uniform gallbladder size.
Extrusion of liposome compositions through a small pore polycarbonate membrane or an asymmetric ceramic membrane results in a relatively well defined size distribution. Typically, the suspension is cycled through the membrane one or more times until the desired size distribution of the liposome complex is achieved. Liposomes can be extruded by passing them successively through smaller pore membranes, to achieve a gradual reduction in liposome size. In some cases, nucleic acid-lipid compositions that
166
ΤΓ
INSTITUTO MbAlCÁNC Ot U prohfoad industrial can be used without any adjustment to its size.
In particular embodiments, the methods of the present invention further comprise a step of neutralizing at least some of the surface charges on the lipid portions of the nucleic acid-lipid compositions. By at least partially neutralizing the surface charges, the unencapsulated nucleic acid is released from the lipid particle surface and can be removed from the composition using conventional techniques. Preferably, the non-encapsulated and surface absorbed nucleic acids are removed from the resulting compositions through the exchange of buffered solutions. For example, replacing a citrate buffer (pH around 4.0, used to form the compositions) with HEPES buffered saline (HBS with a pH around 7.5), results in neutralization of the liposome surface and the release of nucleic acid from the surface. The released nucleic acid can then be removed by chromatography using standard methods and can then be transformed into a buffer with a pH above the pKa of the lipid used.
Optionally, lipid vesicles (i.e. lipid particles) can be formed by hydration in an aqueous buffer and can be resized
167
IMPI
INST'T'J'T '”; <'. EXICAN Pt LA PXO? INDUSTRIAL LITITY
<img file="MX338780B_D0161.tif" />
using any of the methods described above prior to the addition of nucleic acid. As described above, the aqueous buffer should be of a lower pH than the pKa of the amino lipid. Then, a solution of the nucleic acids can be added to these pre-formed vesicles, adjusted in size. To allow encapsulation of nucleic acids in such previously formed vesicles, the mixture should contain an alcohol such as ethanol. In the case of ethanol, it should be present in a concentration of about 20% (w / w) to about 45% (w / w). Furthermore, it may be necessary to heat the mixture of previously formed vesicles and nucleic acid in the aqueous buffer-ethanol mixture to a temperature of around 25 ° C to around 50 ° C depending on the composition of the lipid vesicles and the nature of the nucleic acid. It will be apparent to the person skilled in the art that optimizing the encapsulation process to achieve a desired level of nucleic acid in the lipid vesicles will require manipulation of variables such as ethanol concentration and temperature. Examples of suitable conditions for nucleic acid encapsulation are provided in the Examples section. Once the nucleic acids are encapsulated within the previously formed vesicles, the external pH can be increased to at least partially neutralize the surface charge.
<img file="MX338780B_D0162.tif" />
168
The non-encapsulated and surface adsorbed nucleic acids can then be removed as described above.
Method of use
The lipid particles of the present invention can be used to administer a therapeutic agent to a cell, in vitro or in vivo. In particular embodiments, the therapeutic agent is a nucleic acid that is administered to a cell using nucleic acid lipid particles of the present invention. While the following description of various methods of using the lipid particles and related pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention are exemplified by means of a description related to nucleic acid lipid particles, it is understood that these methods and compositions can be readily adapted for delivery. of any therapeutic agent for the treatment of any disease or disorder that would benefit from said treatment.
In some embodiments, the present invention provides methods for introducing a nucleic acid into a cell. Preferred nucleic acids for introduction into cells are siRNAs, immunostimulatory oligonucleotides, plasmids, antisenses, and ribosomes. These methods can be carried out by contacting the particles or
<img file="MX338780B_D0163.tif" />
169
<img file="MX338780B_D0164.tif" />
Compositions of the present invention with cells for a period of time sufficient for intracellular administration to occur.
The compositions of the present invention can be adsorbed to any type of cell. Once adsorbed, the nucleic acid-lipid particles can be endocited by a portion of the cells, lipid exchange with cell membranes, or fusion with the cells. Transfer or incorporation of the nucleic acid portion of the complex can take place by either of these pathways. Without intending to be limited with respect to the scope of the invention, it is believed that in the case of particles captured in the cell by endocytosis the particles then interact with the endosomal membrane, resulting in destabilization of the endosomal membrane, possibly by Non-bilayer phase formation, resulting in the introduction of encapsulated nucleic acid into the cell cytoplasm. Similarly, in the case of direct fusion of the particles with the plasma cell membrane, when fusion occurs, the liposome membrane is integrated into the cell membrane and the liposome contents combined / combined with the intracellular fluid. Contact between cells and nucleic acid-lipid compositions, when carried out in vitro, will take place in a biologically medium.
170
ΙΜΡΙ
MEXICAN INSTITUTE D £ LA PROPIEI '.' AD
INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX338780B_D0165.tif" />
compatible. The concentration of the compositions can vary widely depending on the particular application, but is generally about 1 pinol and about 10 mmol. In certain modalities, treatment of cells with the nucleic acid-lipid compositions will generally be carried out at physiological temperatures (about 37 ° C) for periods of time from about 1 to 24 hours, preferably from about 2 to 8 hours. For in vitro applications, the administration of nucleic acids can be to any cell that grows in culture, whether of plant or animal origin, vertebrate or invertebrate and of any tissue or type. In preferred embodiments, the cells will be animal cells, more preferably mammalian cells, and even more preferably human cells.
In one group of modalities, a nucleic lipidic acid particle suspension is added to 60-80% of confluent cells plated having a cell density of about 10<sup>3</sup> to around 10<sup>5</sup> cells / mL, more preferably around 2 χ 10<sup>4</sup> cells / mL. The concentration of the suspension added to the cells is preferably around 0.01 to 20 pg / mL, more preferably around 1 pg / mL.
In another embodiment, the lipid particles of the invention can be used to deliver a nucleic acid to a cell or cell line (eg, a line
171
Ιΐ
DE ίΛ tumor cell). Non-limiting examples of such cell lines include: HELA (ATCC Cat N: CCL-2), KB (ATCC Cat N:
CCL-17), HEP3B (ATCC Cat N: HB-8064), SKOV-3 (ATCC Cat N:
HTB-77), HCT-116 (ATCC Cat N: CCL-247), HT-29 (ATCC Cat N:
HTB-38), PC-3 (ATCC Cat N: CRL-1435), A549 (ATCC Cat N: CCL185), MDA-MB-231 (ATCC Cat N: HTB-26).
Typical applications include using well known procedures to provide intracellular delivery of siRNA to interfere with or silence specific cellular targets. Alternatively, applications include the administration of DNA or mRNA sequences that encode therapeutically useful polypeptides. Thus, treatment for genetic diseases is provided by supplying gene deficient or gene-free products (ie, for Duchenne dystrophy, see Kunkel, et al., Brit. Med. Bull. 45 (3) : 630-643 (1989) and for cystic fibrosis see Goodfellow, Nature 341: 102-103 (1989)). Other uses for the compositions of the present invention include the introduction of antisense oligonucleotides into cells (see, Bennett, et al., Mol. Pharm. 41: 1023-1033 (1992)).
Alternatively, the compositions of the present invention can also be used for the administration of nucleic acids to cells in vivo, using methods that are known to those skilled in the art.
<img file="MX338780B_D0166.tif" />
172
<img file="MX338780B_D0167.tif" />
Regarding the administration of DNA or mRNA sequences,
Zhu, et al., Science 261: 209-211 (1993), incorporated herein by reference, describes intravenous administration of cytomegalovirus (CMV) -chloramphenicol acetyltransferase (CAT) plasmid using DOTMA-DOPE complexes. Hyde, et al., Nature 362: 250-256 (1993), incorporated herein by reference, describes the administration of the cystic fibrosis transmembrane conductance regulator (CFTR) gene to the airway epithelium and alveoli in the lung of mice, using liposomes. Brigham, et al., Am. J. Med. Sci. 298: 278281 (1989), incorporated herein by reference, describes the in vivo transfection of mouse lungs with a functioning prokaryotic gene encoding the intracellular enzyme, chloramphenicol acetyltransferase (CAT). Therefore, the compositions of the invention can be used in the treatment of infectious diseases.
For in vivo administration, the pharmaceutical compositions are preferably administered parenterally, that is, intraarticularly, intravenously, intraraperitoneally, subcutaneously, or intramuscularly. In particular embodiments, the pharmaceutical compositions are administered intravenously or intraraperitoneally by bolus injection. For an example, see Stadler, et al. U.S. Patent No. 5,286,634, which is incorporated herein by
IMPI
173
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF PROPERTY
INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX338780B_D0168.tif" />
reference mode. Intracellular nucleic acid administration has also been discussed in Straubringer, et al., Methods in Enzymology, Academic Press, New York. 101: 512-527 (1983); Mannino, et al., Biotechniques 6: 682-690 (1988); Nicolau, et al., Crit. Rev. Ther. Drug Carrier Syst. 6: 239-271 (1989) and Behr, Acc. Chem. Res. 26: 274-278 (1993).
Still other methods of administering lipid-based treatments are described in, for example, Rahman et al., US Patent No. 3,993,754, Sears, US Patent No. 4,145,410; Papahadjopoulos et al., US Patent No. 4,235,871; Schneider, US Patent No. 4,224,179; Lenk et al., US Patent No. 4,522,803 and Fountain et al., US Patent No. 4,588,578.
In other methods, the pharmaceutical preparations can be contacted with the target tissue by directly applying the preparation to the tissue. The application can be by topical procedure, open or closed. By topic is meant the direct application of the pharmaceutical preparation to a tissue exposed to the environment, such as the skin, oropharynx, external ear canal and the like. Open procedures are those procedures that include making an incision in a patient's skin and directly visualizing the underlying tissue to which the pharmaceutical preparations are applied.
This is generally accomplished by a
<img file="MX338780B_D0169.tif" />
174
<img file="MX338780B_D0170.tif" />
surgical procedure, such as a thoracotomy to access the lungs, abdominal laparotomy to access the abdominal viscera, or other direct surgical approach to the target tissue. Closed procedures are invasive procedures where internal target tissues are not directly visualized but are accessed by inserting instruments through skin wounds. For example, the preparations can be administered to the peritoneum by needle washing. Likewise, pharmaceutical preparations can be administered to the meninges or the spinal cord by infusion during lumbar puncture followed by appropriate positioning of the patient as commonly practiced for anesthesia in the spinal cord or metrazamide imaging of the spinal cord. Alternatively, the preparations can be administered by means of endoscopic devices.
The nucleic acid-lipid compositions can also be administered in an inhaled aerosol into the lungs (see Brigham, et al., Am. J. Sci. 298 (4): 278-281 (1989)) or by direct injection to the site of disease (Culver, Human Gene Therapy, MaryAnn Liebert, Inc., Publishers, New York. pp. 70-71 (1994)).
The methods of the present invention can be practiced on a variety of hosts. The hosts
175
<img file="MX338780B_D0171.tif" />
Preferred include hammerhead species, such as humans, non-human primates, dogs, cats, cattle, horses, sheep, and the like.
The doses for the therapeutic lipid agent particles of the present invention will depend on the ratio of the therapeutic agent to the lipid and the opinion of the physician administering it based on the age, weight and condition of the patient. In one embodiment, the present invention provides a method of modulating the expression of a target polynucleotide or polypeptide. These methods generally comprise contacting a cell with a lipid particle of the present invention that is associated with a nucleic acid capable of modulating the expression of a target polynucleotide or polypeptide. As used herein, the term "modular" refers to altering the expression of a target polynucleotide or polypeptide. In different modalities, modular can mean increase or improve, or can mean decrease or decrease. Methods for measuring the level of expression of a target polynucleotide or polypeptide are known and available in the art and include, eg, methods using reverse transcription-polymerase chain reaction (RT-PCR) and immunohistochemical techniques. In particular embodiments, the expression level of a target polynucleotide or polypeptide is increased or decreased by at least 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50% or more
176
<img file="MX338780B_D0172.tif" />
than 50% compared to a suitable control value.
For example, if increased expression of a polypeptide is desired, the nucleic acid may be an expression vector that includes a polynucleotide that encodes the desired polypeptide. On the other hand, if reduced expression of a polynucleotide or polypeptide is desired, then the nucleic acid can be, eg. , an antisense oligonucleotide, siRNA, or microRNA comprising a polynucleotide sequence that specifically hybridizes to a polynucleotide encoding the target polypeptide, thereby altering expression of the target polynucleotide or polypeptide. Alternatively, the nucleic acid can be a plasmid that expresses such an antisense oligonucleotide, siRNA, or microRNA.
In a particular embodiment, the present invention provides a method of modulating the expression of a polypeptide by a cell, which comprises providing the cell with a lipid particle consisting of or consisting essentially of a lipid chosen from Table 1, DSPC, Col and PEG-DMG or PEG-DMA, eg, in a molar ratio of about 20-60% cationic lipid: 5-25% DSPC: 25-55% Col: 0.5-15% PEG-DMG or PEG-DMA, where the lipid particle is associated with a nucleic acid capable of modulating the expression of the polypeptide. In particular modalities, the molar lipid ratio is approximately 40/10/40/10
IMPI
<img file="MX338780B_D0173.tif" />
177 (mol% cationic lipid / DSPC / Col / PEG-DMG or PEG-DMA), 35/15/40/10 (mol% cationic lipid / DSPC / Col / PEG-DMG or PEGDMA) or 52/13/30 / 5 (mol% cationic lipid / DSPC / Col / PEG-DMG or PEG-DMA). In another group of modalities, the neutral lipid in these compositions is replaced with POPC, DPPC, DOPE or
YE.
In particular embodiments, the therapeutic agent is selected from a siRNA, a microRNA, an antisense oligonucleotide, and a plasmid capable of expressing a siRNA, a microRNA, or an antisense oligonucleotide and wherein the siRNA, microRNA, or antisense oligonucleotide comprise a polynucleotide that specifically binds to a polynucleotide encoding the polypeptide, or a complement thereof, such that expression of the polypeptide is reduced.
In other embodiments, the nucleic acid is a plasmid that encodes the polypeptide or a functional variant or fragment thereof, such that expression of the polypeptide or functional variant or fragment thereof is increased.
In related embodiments, the present invention provides a method of treating a disease or disorder characterized by overexpression of a polypeptide in a subject, which comprises providing the subject with a pharmaceutical composition of the present invention, wherein the therapeutic agent is selected from a siRNA, a micro RNA, a
IMPI
178
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF PROPERTY
INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX338780B_D0174.tif" />
antisense oligonucleotide and a plasmid capable of expressing a siRNA, a microRNA or an antisense oligonucleotide, and where the siRNA, the microRNA or the antisense RNA comprise a polynucleotide that specifically binds to a polynucleotide encoding the polypeptide or a complement thereof .
In one embodiment, the pharmaceutical composition comprises a lipid particle consisting of or consisting essentially of a lipid chosen from Table 1, DSPC, Col, and PEG-DMG or PEG-DMA, eg, in a molar ratio of about 20 -60% cationic lipid: 5-25% DSPC: 25-55% Col: 0.5-15% PEG-DMG or PEG-DMA, where the lipid particle is associated with therapeutic nucleic acid. In particular embodiments, the molar lipid ratio is approximately 40/10/40/10 (mol% cationic lipid / DSPC / Col / PEG-DMG or PEG-DMA), 35/15/40/10 (mol% cationic lipid / DSPC / Col / PEG-DMG or PEG-DMA) or 52/13/30/5 (mol% of cationic lipid / DSPC / Col / PEG-DMG or PEG-DMA). In another group of modalities, the neutral lipid in these compositions is replaced with POPC, DPPC, DOPE or SM.
In another related embodiment, the present invention includes a method of treating a disease or disorder characterized by underexpression of a polypeptide in a subject, which comprises providing the subject with the pharmaceutical composition of the present invention, wherein the agent
IMPI
<img file="MX338780B_D0175.tif" />
179 therapeutic is a plasmid encoding the polypeptide or a fragment or functional variant thereof.
In one embodiment, the pharmaceutical composition comprises a lipid particle consisting of or consisting essentially of a lipid chosen from Table 1, DSPC, Col, and PEG-DMG or PEG-DMA, eg, in a molar ratio of about 20 -60% cationic lipid: 5-25% DSPC: 25-55% Col: 0.5-15% PEG-DMG or PEG-DMA, where the lipid particle is associated with therapeutic nucleic acid. In particular embodiments, the molar lipid ratio is approximately 40/10/40/10 (mol% cationic lipid / DSPC / Col / PEG-DMG or PEG-DMA), 35/15/40/10 (mol% cationic lipid / DSPC / Col / PEG-DMG or PEG-DMA) or 52/13/30/5 (mol% of cationic lipid / DSPC / Col / PEG-DMG or PEG-DMA). In another group of modalities, the neutral lipid in these compositions is replaced with POPC, DPPC, DOPE or SM.
The present invention further provides a method of inducing an immune response in a subject comprising providing the subject with the pharmaceutical composition of the present invention where the therapeutic agent is an immunostimulatory oligonucleotide. In some embodiments, the immune response is a humoral or mucosal immune response. In one embodiment, the pharmaceutical composition comprises a lipid particle consisting of or consisting essentially of a chosen lipid
<img file="MX338780B_D0176.tif" />
Mexican INSTITUTE OF PROPERTY
INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX338780B_D0177.tif" />
from Table 1, DSPC, Col and PEG-DMG or PEG-DMA, eg, in a molar ratio of about 20-60% cationic lipid: 525% DSPC: 25-55% Col: 0.5- 15% PEG-DMG or PEG-DMA, where the lipid particle is associated with the therapeutic nucleic acid. In particular embodiments, the molar lipid ratio is approximately 40/10/40/10 (mol% cationic lipid / DSPC / Col / PEG-DMG or PEG-DMA), 35/15/40/10 (mol% cationic lipid / DSPC / Col / PEG-DMG or PEG-DMA) or 52/13/30/5 (mol% of cationic lipid / DSPC / Col / PEG-DMG or PEG-DMA). In another group of modalities, the neutral lipid in these compositions is replaced with POPC, DPPC, DOPE or SM.
In additional embodiments, the pharmaceutical composition is provided to the patient in combination with a vaccine or antigen. Therefore, the present invention in itself provides vaccines comprising a lipid particle of the present invention, which comprises an immunostimulatory oligonucleotide and is also associated with an antigen from which an immune response is desired. In particular embodiments, the antigen is a tumor antigen or is associated with an infectious agent, such as, eg, a virus, a bacterium, or a parasite.
A variety of tumor antigens, infectious agent antigens, and antigens associated with another disease are well known in the art and examples of these are described in the references cited herein. The
IMPI
<img file="MX338780B_D0178.tif" />
181 Examples of antigens suitable for use in the present invention include, but are not limited to, polypeptide antigens and DNA antigens. Specific examples of antigens are Hepatitis A, Hepatitis B, Smallpox, Polio, Anthrax, Flu, Typhus, Tetanus, Measles, Rotavirus, Diphtheria, Pertussis, Tuberculosis and Rubella antigens. In a preferred embodiment, the antigen is a recombinant Hepatitis B antigen. In other aspects, the antigen is a recombinant Hepatitis A antigen. In another aspect, the antigen is a tumor antigen. Examples of such tumor associated antigens are MUC-1 antigen, EBV, and Burkitt lymphoma associated antigens. In a further aspect, the antigen is a recombinant tyrosinase related tumor protein antigen antigen. Those of skill in the art will be aware of other antigens suitable for use in the present invention.
Tumor associated antigens suitable for use in the present invention include mutated or non-mutated molecules that can indicate a single tumor type, shared between different tumor types and / or expressed or overexpressed exclusively in tumor cells compared to normal cells. In addition to proteins and glycoproteins, tumor-specific expression patterns of carbohydrates, gangliosides, glycolipids, and mucins have also been documented. Associated antigens
182
ΙΜΡΙίδΡ 'f
MEXICAN INSTITUTE
FROM PROPERTY, INDUSTRIAL V>, to examples of tumors for use in the cancer vaccines in question include oncogen protein products, tumor suppressor genes and other genes with mutations or new unique provisions to tumor cells, reactivated embryonic gene products , oncofetal antigens, tissue-specific (but not tumor-specific) differentiation antigens, growth factor receptors, cell surface carbohydrate residues, external viral proteins and a number of 10 other auto-proteins.
Specific modalities of tumor associated antigens include, eg, mutated antigens such as the protein products of the protoncogene Ras p21, tumor suppressor p53 and oncogene BCR-abl, as well as CDK4, MUM1, Caspase 8 and beta catenin; overexpressed antigens such as galectin 4, galectin 9, carbonic anhydrase, Aldolase A, PRAME, Her2 / neu, ErbB-2 and KSA, oncofetal antigens such as alpha fetoprotein (AFP), human chorionic gonadotrophin (hCG); autoantigens such as carcinoembryonic antigen (CEA) and melanocyte differentiation antigens such as Mart 1 / Melan A, gplOO, gp75, Tyrosinase, TRP1 and TRP2; prostate associated antigens such as PSA, PAP, PSMA, PSM-P1 and PSM-P2; reactivated embryonic gene products such as MAGE 1, MAGE 3, MAGE 4, GAGE 1, GAGE
2, BAGE, RAGE and other testicular cancer antigens such
183
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF PROPERTY
INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX338780B_D0179.tif" />
like NY-ESO1, SSX2 and SCP1; mucins such as Muc-1 and Muc-2; gangliosides such as GM2, GD2 and GD3, glycolipids and neutral glycoproteins such as Lewis (y) and globe-H and glycoproteins such as Tn, Thompson-Freidenreich (TF) antigen and sTn. Also included herein are tumor associated antigens, whole cell lysates, and tumor cell lines as well as immunogenic portions thereof, as well as immunoglobulin idiotypes expressed in monoclonal B lymphocyte proliferations for use against B lymphocyte lymphomas.
Pathogens include, but are not limited to, infectious agents, eg, viruses that infect mammals and more particularly humans. Examples of infectious viruses include, but are not limited to: Retroviridae (eg, human immunodeficiency virus, such as HIV-1 (also called HTLV-III, LAV or HTLV-III / LAV, or HIV-III and other strains isolated viruses, such as HIV-LP; Picornaviridae (eg, poliovirus, hepatitis A virus; enteroviruses, human Coxsackie virus, rhinovirus, echovirus); Calciviridae (eg. , strains that cause gastroenteritis); Togaviridae (eg equine encephalitis virus, rubella virus); Flaviridae (eg, dengue virus, encephalitis virus, yellow fever virus); Coronoviridae (eg coronavirus); Rhabdoviradae (eg, vesicular stomatitis virus, rabies virus); Coronaviridae (eg coronavirus); Rhabdoviridae
IMPI
184
ΙΝΐΤΙΤυ'Γί BETTER ') Dt Lz. ? ri '/ ZíD,> u
<img file="MX338780B_D0180.tif" />
(eg, vesicular stomatitis virus, rabies virus); Filoviridae (eg Ebola virus); Paramyxoviridae (eg, influenza virus, mumps virus, measles virus, respiratory syncytial virus); Orthomyxoviridae (eg, influenza virus); Bungaviridae (eg, Hantaan virus, bungavirus, flebovirus, and Nairovirus); Viridae sand (hemorrhagic fever virus); Reoviridae (eg, reovirus, orbiviurs, and rotavirus); Birnaviridae; Hepadnaviridae (Hepatitis B virus); Parvoviride (parvovirus); Papovaviridae (papilloma virus, polyoma virus); Adenoviridae (most adenoviruses); Herpesviridae herpes simplex virus (HSV) 1 and 2, varicella zoster virus, cytomegalovirus (CMV), herpes virus; Poxviridae (smallpox virus, vaccine virus, chickenpox virus) and Iridoviridae (eg, African swine fever virus) and unclassified viruses (eg, the etiologic agents of spongiform encephalopathies, the delta agent hepatitis (believed to be is a defective satellite of the hepatitis Β virus), the hepatitis agents that are neither A nor B (class l = internally transmitted; class 2 = parenterally transmitted (i.e. Hepatitis C); Norwalk virus and related viruses and astroviruses) .
Gram negative and gram positive bacteria also serve as antigens in vertebrate animals. Such gram positive bacteria include, but are not limited to the Pasteurella genus, Staphylococci genus, and genus
MEXICAN INSTITUTE
185
DF THE INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY
Streptococcus. Gram negative bacteria include, but are not limited to Escherichia coli, Pseudomonas genus, and Salmonella genus. Specific examples of infectious bacteria include, but are not limited to: Helicobacterpyloris, Borelia burgdorferi, Legionella pneumophilia, Mycobacteria sps (eg, M. tuberculosis, M. avium, M. intracellulare, M. kansaii, M. gordonae), Staphylococcus aureus , Neisseria gonorrhoeae,
Neisseria meningitidis, Listeria monocytogenes, Streptococcus pyogenes (Streptococcus of group Ά), Streptococcus agalactiae (Streptococcus of group Β), Streptococcus (group viridans., Sp. Enterococcus sp., Haemophilus infuenzae, Bacillus anthracis, corynebacterium diphtheriae, corynebacterium sp., Erysipelothrix rhusiopathiae, Clostridium perfringers, Clostridium tetani, Enterobacter aerogenes, Klebsiella pneumoniae, Pasturella multocida, Bacteroides sp., Fusobacterium nucleatum, Streptobacillus moniliformis, Treponema pallidium, Treponema pertenue, Leptospira, Rickettsia and Actinomyces israelli.
Additional examples of pathogens include, but are not limited to, infectious fungi that infect mammals and more particularly humans. Examples of infectious fungi include, but are not limited to: Cryptococcus neoformans, Histoplasma capsulatum, Coccidioides immitis, Blastomyces
<img file="MX338780B_D0181.tif" />
186
ΙΜΡΪ, ..
M £ j INSTITUTE [ICA «<< <sup>Λ</sup>.
ητ ι.Α μ dfwiOad. .., IMWJÁTÍUiL **. Ί · 'dermatitidis, Chlamydia trachomatis, Candida albicans. Examples of infectious parasites include Plasmodium such as Plasmodium falciparum, Plasmodium malariae, Plasmodium ovale, and Plasmodium vivax. Other infectious organisms (i.e., protists) include Toxoplasma gondii.
In one embodiment, the formulations of the invention can be used to silence or modulate a target gene such as but not limited to FVII, Eg5, PCSK9, TPX2, apoB, SAA, TTR, RSV, PDGF beta gene, Erb-B gene, Src gene, CRK gene, GRB2 gene, RAS gene, MEKK gene, JNK gene, RAF gene, Erkl / 2 gene, PCNA gene (p21), MYB gene, JUN gene, FOS gene, BCL-2 gene, cyclin gene D, VEGF gene, EGFR gene, cyclin A gene, cyclin E gene, WNT-1 gene, beta-catenin gene, c-MET gene, PKC gene, NFKB gene, STAT3 gene, survivin gene, Her2 / Neu gene, SORT1 gene, XBPl gene, topoisomerase I gene, topoisomerase II alpha gene, gene p73, gene p21 (WAF1 / CIP1), gene p27 (KIPl), PPM1D gene, RAS gene, caveolin I gene, MIB I gene, MTAI gene, M68 gene, tumor suppressor genes, tumor suppressor genes p53, DN-p63 member of the p53 family, tumor suppressor gene pRb, gene tumor suppressor APC1, tumor suppressor gene BRCA1, tumor suppressor gene PTEN, mLL fusion gene, BCR / ABL fusion gene, TEL / AML1 fusion gene, EWS / FLIl fusion gene, TLS / FUS1 fusion gene, PAX3 / FKHR fusion gene, AML1 / ETO fusion gene, alpha v gene -integrarine, gene
<img file="MX338780B_D0182.tif" />
TO
<img file="MX338780B_D0183.tif" />
187 Flt-1 receptor, tubulin gene, human papillomavirus gene, a gene required for replication of human papillomavirus, gene of human immunodeficiency virus, a gene required for replication of human immunodeficiency virus, gene of Hepatitis A, a gene required for the replication of the Hepatitis A virus, gene for the Hepatitis B virus, a gene required for the replication of the Hepatitis B virus, gene for the Hepatitis C virus, a gene required for Hepatitis C virus replication, Hepatitis D virus gene, a gene required for Hepatitis D virus replication, Hepatitis E virus gene, a gene required for virus replication of Hepatitis E, gene of the Hepatitis F virus, a gene required for the replication of the Hepatitis F virus, gene of the Hepatitis G virus, a gene required for the replication of the Hepatitis G virus, Hepatitis H virus gene, a gene required for replication of the Hepatitis H virus, gene for the respiratory syncytial virus, a gene required for replication of the respiratory syncytial virus, herpes simplex virus gene, a gene required for replication of the herpes simplex virus, herpes cytomegalovirus gene, a gene required for the replication of herpes cytomegalovirus, herpes virus Epstein Barr gene, a gene required for the replication of the herpes virus
<img file="MX338780B_D0184.tif" />
<img file="MX338780B_D0185.tif" />
188
Epstein Barr, herpesvirus gene associated with sarcoma of
Kaposi, a gene required for the replication of the herpesvirus gene associated with Kaposi's sarcoma, the virus gene
JC, the human gene that is required for the replication of the virus JC, the myxovirus gene, a gene that is required for the
<td>replication of</td><td>gene</td><td colspan="2">myxovirus gene</td><td colspan="2">rhinovirus, a gene</td><td>than</td>
<td>it is required</td><td>for</td><td>the</td><td>replication</td><td>of the</td><td>rhinovirus,</td><td>gene</td>
<td>coronavirus, a</td><td>gene</td><td>than</td><td>it is required</td><td>for</td><td>replication</td><td>of the</td>
<td colspan="3">coronavirus, gene</td><td>West virus</td><td>Nile,</td><td>a gene that</td><td>is</td>
required for West Nile virus replication, gene for St. Louis encephalitis, a gene that is required for replication of St. Louis encephalitis, gene for tick-borne encephalitis virus, a gene that is required for replication of tick-borne encephalitis, a gene for the Murray Valley encephalitis virus, a gene that is required for replication of the Murray Valley encephalitis virus, a dengue virus gene, a gene that is required for the replication of the dengue virus gene, simian virus 40 gene, a gene that is required for replication of simian virus 40, gene of human T-cell lymphotropic virus, a gene that is required for the replication of the human T-cell lymphotropic virus, the Moloney murine leukemia virus gene, a gene that is required for the replication of the Moloney murine leukemia virus, the
IMPI
INSTm / TO .MEXICANO> 3
INDUSTRIAL ~ is reaorido Oara the
189 encephalomyocarditis, a gene that replicates the encephalomyocarditis virus, gene of the measles virus, a gene that is required for the replication of the measles virus, gene of the varicella zoster virus, a gene that is required for the replication of the virus of the measles chickenpox zoster, adenovirus gene, a gene that is required for replication of the adenovirus, yellow fever virus gene, a gene that is required for replication of the yellow fever virus, poliovirus gene, a gene that is required for replication of the poliovirus, varicella virus gene, a gene that is required for replication of the varicella virus, plasmodium gene, a gene that is required for replication of the gene plasmodium, gene Mycobacterium ulcerans, a gene that is required for the replication of Mycobacterium ulcerans, gene Mycobacterium tuberculosis, a gene that is required for the replication of Mycobacterium tuberculosis, Mycobacterium leprae gene, a gene that is required for the replication of Mycobacterium leprae, Staphylococcus aureus gene, a gene that is required for Staphylococcus aureus replication, Streptococcus pneumoniae gene, a gene that is required for Streptococcus pneumoniae replication, St pyogenes, a gene that is required for the replication of Streptococcus pyogenes, the Chlamydia pneumoniae gene, a gene that is required for the
<img file="MX338780B_D0186.tif" />
<img file="MX338780B_D0187.tif" />
190 Chlamydia pneumoniae replication, Mycoplasma pneumoniae gene, a gene that is required for Mycoplasma pneumoniae replication, an integrin gene, a selectin gene, complement system gene, chemokine gene, chemokine receptor gene, GCSF gene , Grol gene, Gro2 gene, Gro3 gene, PF4 gene, MIG gene, gene for the basic protein platelet, MIP-1I gene, MIP-1J gene, RANTES gene, MCP-1 gene, MCP-3 gene , gene CMBKR1, gene CMBKR2, gene CMBKR3, CMBKR5v, AIF-1 gene, gene 1-309, a gene for an ion channel component, a gene for a neurotransmitter receptor, a gene for a neurotransmitter ligand, amyloid family gene, presenilin gene, HD gene, gene DRPLA, SCA1 gene, SCA2 gene, MJDl gene, CACNL1A4 gene, SCA7 gene, SCA8 gene, allele gene found in LOH cells or an allele gene of a polymorphic gene.
Definitions
Alkyl means a saturated, straight-chain or branched, non-cyclic or cyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon containing from 1 to 24 carbon atoms. Representative straight chain saturated alkyls include methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, n-butyl, n-pentyl, n-hexyl, and the like; while the saturated branched alkyls include isopropyl, sec-butyl, isobutyl, tert-butyl, isopentyl, and the like.
I Μ Ρ I
191
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF THE PRWIED. '.!) INDUSTRIAL
Representative saturated cyclic alkyls include cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, and the like; while unsaturated cyclic alkyls include cyclopentenyl and cyclohexenyl and the like.
Alkenyl means an alkyl, as defined above, containing at least one double bond between adjacent carbon atoms. Alkenyls include both cis and trans isomers. Representative straight or branched chain alkenyls include ethylenyl, propylene, 1-butenyl, 2-butenyl, isobutylene, 1-pentenyl, 2-pentenyl, 3-methyl-l-butenyl, 2-methyl-2-butenyl, 2,3-dimethyl-2 -butenyl and the like.
Alkynyl means an alkyl or alkenyl, as defined above, that additionally contains at least one triple bond between adjacent carbons. Representative straight or branched chain alkynyls include acetylenyl, propynyl, 1-butynyl, 2-butynyl, 1-pentynyl, 2-pentynyl, 3-methyl-l-butynyl, and the like.
The term acyl refers to hydrogen, alkyl, partially saturated or fully saturated cycloalkyl, partially saturated or fully saturated heterocycle, aryl, and heteroaryl-substituted carbonyl groups. For example, acyl includes groups such as (C1-C20) alkanoyl (eg, formyl, acetyl, propionyl, butyryl, valeryl, caproyl, t-butylacetyl, etc.), cycloalkylcarbonyl (C3192
IMPI ^ U
MEXICAN INSTITUTE <sub>x</sub>
OF THE PROPERTY ·,
IMDl ¡STRíAL
C20) (eg, cyclopropylcarbonyl ™ cTcTobütTTcarbonyl, cyclopentylcarbonyl, cyclohexylcarbonyl, etc.), heterocyclic carbonyl (eg, pyrrolidinylcarbonyl, pyrrolid-2one-5 -carbonyl, piperidinylcarbonyl, piperazinylcarbonyl, tetrahydyl, tetrahydroylcarbonyl, etc.) ., benzoyl) and heteroaryl (eg, thiophenyl-2-carbonyl, thiophenyl-3carbonyl, furanyl-2-carbonyl, furanyl-3-carbonyl, 1H-pyroyl-2-carbonyl, lH-pyrroyl-3-carbonyl, benzo [b ] thiophenyl-2-carbonyl, etc.).
The term "aryl" refers to an aromatic, monocyclic, bicyclic, or tricyclic hydrocarbon ring system, where any ring atom may be substituted. Examples of aryl portions include, but are not limited to, phenyl, naphthyl, anthracenyl, and pyrene.
Heterocycle means a 5- to 7-membered monocyclic or a 7 to 10-membered bicyclic heterocyclic ring, which is saturated, unsaturated, or aromatic and containing 1 or 2 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur and where the heteroatoms of nitrogen and sulfur can be optionally oxidized and the nitrogen heteroatom can be optionally quaternized, including bicyclic rings in which any of the above heterocycles are fused to a benzene ring. The heterocycle may be attached via a heteroatom or carbon atom.
<img file="MX338780B_D0188.tif" />
193
<img file="MX338780B_D0189.tif" />
Heterocycles include heteroaryls as defined below. Heterocycles include morpholinyl, pyrrolidinonyl, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, piperizinyl, hydantoinyl, valerolactamyl, oxiranyl, oxetanyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydropyranyl, tetrahydropyridinyl, tetrahydroprimidinyl, tetrahydrothiophenyl, tetrahydrothiopyranyl, tetrahydropyrimidinyl, tetrahydrothiophenyl, tetrahydrothiopyranyl and the like.
The term heteroaryl refers to an aromatic ring system, 5-8 membered monocyclic, 8-12 membered bicyclic or 11-14 membered tricyclic, which has 1-3 heteroatoms if monocyclic, 1-6 heteroatoms in If they are bicyclic or 1-9 heteroatoms If they are tricyclic, these heteroatoms are selected from 0, N or S (eg carbon atoms and 1-3, 1-6 or 1-9 heteroatoms of
N, 0 or S if it is monocyclic, bicyclic or tricyclic, respectively) where any ring atom can be substituted. The heteroaryl groups described herein can also contain fused rings that share a common carbon-carbon bond. The term "alkylheterocycle" refers to a heteroaryl where at least one of the ring atoms is substituted by alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl.
The term substituted refers to the replacement of one or more hydrogen radicals in a structure given by the
194
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE 'p' '
FROM PROPERTY 'j'
INDUSTRIAL 'radical of a specified substituent that includes, but is not limited to: halo, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heterocyclyl, thiol, alkylthio, oxo, thioxy, arylthio, alkylthioalkyl, arylthioalkyl, alkylsulfonyl, alkylsulfonylalkyl, arylsulfonylalkyl, alkoxy, aryloxy, aralkoxy, aminocarbonyl, alkylaminocarbonyl, arylaminocarbonyl, alkoxycarbonyl, aryloxycarbonyl, haloalkyl, amino, trifluoromethyl, cyano, nitro, alkylamino, arylamino, alkylaminoalkyl, arylaminoalkyl, aminoalkylamino, hydroxy, alkoxyalkyl, carboxyalkyl, alkoxycarbonylalkyl, aminocarbonylalkyl, acyl, aralkoxycarbonyl, carboxylic acid, sulfonic acid, sulfonyl, phosphonic acid, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic and aliphatic. It is understood that the substituent may be additionally substituted. Examples of substituents include amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, and cyclic amino compounds.
Halogen means fluoro, chloro, bromo and iodo.
The terms alkylamine and dialkylamine refer to radicals -NH (alkyl) and -N (alkyl) 2 respectively.
The term "alkylphosphate" refers to -OP (Q ') (Q) -OR, where Q' and Q are each independently O, S, N (R) 2, optionally substituted alkyl or alkoxy; and R is optionally substituted alkyl, ω-aminoalkyl or substituted ω-aminoalkyl.
<img file="MX338780B_D0190.tif" />
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF PROPERTY
INDUSTRIAL
195
The term alkylphosphorothioate refers to a
<td>alkyl phosphate where</td><td>at least one of Q '</td><td>or Q</td><td>is S.</td><td></td>
<td>The term</td><td>alkylphosphonate</td><td>I know</td><td>It refers to</td><td>a</td>
<td>alkyl phosphate where</td><td>at least one of Q '</td><td>or Q</td><td>it's alkyl.</td><td></td>
The term hydroxyalkyl means a -0alkyl radical.
The term "alkylheterocycle" refers to an alkyl where at least one methylene has been replaced by a heterocycle.
The term amino-aminoalkyl refers to an alkyl-NH2 radical. And the term ω- (substituted) aminoalkyl refers to a ω-aminoalkyl where at least one of Η or N has been replaced by alkyl.
The term ω-phosphoalkyl refers to -alkyl-0P (Q ') (Q) -OR, where Q' and Q are each independently or S and R optionally substituted alkyl.
The term ω-thiophosphoalkyl refers to ωphosphoalkyl where at least one of Q 'or Q is S.
In some embodiments, the methods of the invention may require the use of protecting groups. The methodology of protecting groups is well known to those skilled in the art (see, for example, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, Green, TW et. Al., Wiley-Interscience,
New York, 1999). Briefly, protecting groups within the context of this invention are any group that reduces
196
IMPI 'NSTIT' MEXICAN INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY ACT
<img file="MX338780B_D0191.tif" />
of a functional group.
a functional group for or eliminates unwanted reactivity
A protecting group can be added to mask its reactivity during some reactions and then removed to reveal the original functional group. In some embodiments, an alcoholic protecting group is used. An alcoholic protecting group is any group that reduces or eliminates the unwanted reactivity of an alcoholic functional group. The protecting groups can be added and removed using techniques well known in the art.
The compounds of the present invention can be prepared by known organic synthetic techniques, including the methods described in more detail in the Examples.
Examples
Example 1:
Synthesis of methanesulfonic acid 2 octadeca-9,12-dienyl ester
ΙΜΡΙ @ 5 ^ *%
197
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF PROPERTY
INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX338780B_D0192.tif" />
Scheme 1
<img file="MX338780B_D0193.tif" />
o = <Τ '
To a solution of the alcohol 1 (26.6 g, 100 mmol) in dichloromethane (100 mL), triethylamine (13.13 g, 130 mmol) was added and the solution was cooled in an ice bath. To this cold solution, a solution of mesyl chloride (12.6 g, 110 mmol) in dichloromethane (60 mL) was added dropwise and after the addition was complete, the reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred for the night. TLC of the reaction mixture showed that the reaction was complete. The reaction mixture was diluted with
198
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF THE INDUSTRIAL INDUSTRY
<img file="MX338780B_D0194.tif" />
! ' dichloromethane (200 mL), washed with water (200 mL), NaHCO<sub>3 </sub>saturated (200 mL), brine (100 mL) and (NaSO<sub>4</sub>) dry. The organic layer was concentrated to obtain the crude product which was purified by column chromatography (silica gel) using 0-10% Et<sub>2</sub>Or in hexanes. The pure product fractions were combined and concentrated to obtain the pure product 2 as a colorless oil (30.6 g, 89%).<sup>1</sup>H NMR (CDCI3, 400 MHz) δ = 5.42-5.21 (m, 4H), 4.20 (t, 2H), 3.06 (s, 3H), 2.79 (t,
2H), 2.19-2.00 (m, 4H), 1.90-1.70 (m, 2H), 1.06-1.18 (m,
18H), 0.88 (t, 3H). <sup>13</sup>C NMR (CDCI3) δ = 130.76, 130.54, 128.6, 128.4, 70.67, 37.9, 32.05, 30.12, 29.87, 29.85, 29.68, 29.65,
29.53, 27.72, 27.71, 26.15, 25.94, 23.09, 14.60. MS. Molecular weight calculated for CigH<sub>3</sub>6O<sub>3</sub>S, Cal. 344.53, Found
343.52 (MH ').
Synthesis of 18-Bromo-octadeca-6, 9-diene 3
Mesylate 2 (13.44 g, 39 mmol) was dissolved in anhydrous ether (500 mL) and to that was added the complex MgBr.Et<sub>2</sub>O (30.7g, 118mmol) in argon and the mixture was refluxed in argon for 26h after which time TLC showed completion of the reaction. The reaction mixture was diluted with ether (200 mL) and ice cold water (200 mL) was added to this mixture and the layers were separated. The organic layer was washed with 1% K<sub>2</sub>CO<sub>3</sub> aqueous (100 mL), brine (100 mL) and dried (Na<sub>2</sub>SW<sub>4</sub> anhydrous). The concentration of the organic layer
199
<img file="MX338780B_D0195.tif" />
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF PROPERTY
MEXICAN <sub>Λ</sub>
PROPERTY
INDUSTRIAL provided the crude product which was further purified by column chromatography (silica gel) using 0-1% Et<sub>2</sub>Or in hexanes to isolate bromide 3 (12.6 g, 94%) as a colorless oil. <sup>1</sup>H NMR (CDC1<sub>3</sub>, 400 MHz) δ = 5.41-5.29 (m,
4H), 4.20 (d, 2H), 3.40 (t, J = 7 Hz, 2H), 2.77 (t, J = 6.6
Hz, 2H), 2.09-2.02 (m, 4H), 1.88-1.00 (m, 2H), 1.46-1.27 (m, 18H), 0.88 (t, J = 3.9 Hz, 3H). <sup>13</sup>C NMR (CDC1<sub>3</sub>) δ = 130.41,
130.25, 128.26, 128.12, 34.17, 33.05, 31.75, 29.82, 29.57,
29.54, 29.39, 28.95, 28.38, 27.42, 27.40, 25.84, 22.79,
14.28.
Synthesis of 18-Cyano-octadeca-6, 9-diene 4
To a solution of the mesylate (3.44 g, 10 mmol) in ethanol (90 mL), a solution of KCN (1.32 g, 20 mmol) in water (10 mL) was added and the mixture was refluxed for 30 min. after which TLC of the reaction mixture showed that the reaction was complete, after which ether (200 mL) was added to the reaction mixture followed by the addition of water. The reaction mixture was extracted with ether, and the combined organic layers were washed with water (100 mL), brine (200 mL), and dried. Concentration of the organic layer provided the crude product which was purified by column chromatography (0-10% Et<sub>2</sub>Or in hexanes). Pure product 4 was isolated as a colorless oil (2g, 74%).<sup>X</sup>H NMR (CDC1<sub>3</sub>, 400 MHz) δ = 5.33-5.22 (m, 4H), 2.70 (t, 2H),
<img file="MX338780B_D0196.tif" />
Ί
INSTiT '/ rG no
DE LA F? T?; - '; aD
200 INDUSTRIAL
2.27-2.23 (m, 2H), 2.00-1.95 (m, 4H), 1.61-1.54 (m, 2H),
1.39-1.20 (m, 18H), 0.82 (t, 3H). <sup>13</sup>C NMR (CDC1<sub>3</sub>) δ = 130.20, 129.96, 128.08, 127.87, 119.78, 70.76, 66.02, 32.52, 29.82,
29.57, 29.33, 29.24, 29.19, 29.12, 28.73, 28.65, 27.20,
27.16, 25.62, 25.37, 22.56, 17.10, 14.06. MS. Molecular weight calculated for C<sub>19</sub>H<sub>33</sub>N, Cal. 275.47, Found 276.6 (MH ~).
Synthesis of Heptatriaconta-6,9,28,31-tetraen-19-one 7
To a 500 mL flame dried 2 neck round bottom flask, freshly activated Mg filings (0.144 g, 6 mmol) were added and the flask was equipped with a magnetic stir bar and reflux condenser. This system was degassed, purged with argon and mL of anhydrous ether was added to the flask by syringe. Bromide 3 (1.65 g, 5 mmol) was dissolved in anhydrous ether (10 mL) and added dropwise to the flask by syringe. An exothermic reaction was observed (to confirm / accelerate Grignard reagent formation, 2 mg of iodine was added and immediately discoloration was observed confirming Grignard reagent formation) and the ether started refluxing. After the addition was complete, the reaction mixture was kept at 35 ° C for 1 h and then cooled in an ice bath. Cyanide 4 (1.38 g, 5 mmol) was dissolved in anhydrous ether (20 mL) and added dropwise to the reaction mixture with stirring. An exothermic reaction was observed
<img file="MX338780B_D0197.tif" />
201
IMPIOS
MEXICAN INSTITUTE
PROPERTY C \, industrial
<img file="MX338780B_D0198.tif" />
and the reaction mixture was stirred overnight at room temperature. The reaction was quenched by adding 10 mL of acetone dropwise followed by ice-cold water (60 mL). The reaction mixture was treated with aqueous H2SO4 (10 volume%, 200 mL) until the solution was homogenized and the layers were separated. The aqueous phase was extracted with ether (2x100 mL). The combined ether layers were dried (Na2SO<sub>4</sub>) and concentrated to obtain the crude product which was purified by column chromatography (silica gel, 0-10% ether in hexanes). The pure product fractions were evaporated to provide the pure ketone 7 as a colorless oil (2g, 74%).<sup>1</sup>H NMR (CDCI3 400 MHz) δ = 5.33-5.21 (m, 8H), 2.69 (t, 4H), 2.30 (t, 4H), 2.05-1.95 (m, 8H), 1.55-1.45 (m, 2H) , 1.35-1.15 (m, 18H), 0.82 (t, 3H). <sup>13</sup>C NMR (CDCIs) δ = 211.90, 130.63, 130.54, 128.47, 128.41,
43.27, 33.04, 32.01, 30.93, 29.89, 29.86, 29.75, 29.74, 27.69, 26.11, 24.35, 23.06, 14.05. MS. Molecular weight calculated for C<sub>37</sub>H66O <Cal. 526.92, Found 528.02 (M + H<sup>+</sup>) .
Example 2: Alternative synthesis of ketone 7
<img file="MX338780B_D0199.tif" />
202
INSTITUTO MÍXICANO DE,> PROHEDAD industrial
<img file="MX338780B_D0200.tif" />
Scheme 2
<img file="MX338780B_D0201.tif" />
6th
Br
<img file="MX338780B_D0202.tif" />
+
HO
<img file="MX338780B_D0203.tif" />
6b
PCC ch<sub>2</sub>ci<sub>2</sub> or
<img file="MX338780B_D0204.tif" />
Synthesis of compound 6b
To a 500 mL flame dried round bottom flask, freshly activated Mg filings (2.4 g, 100 mmol) were added and the flask was equipped with a magnetic stir bar, addition funnel, and reflux condenser. This system was degassed and purged with argon and 10 mL of anhydrous ether was added to the flask by means of a syringe. Bromide 3 (26.5 g, 80.47 mmol) was dissolved in anhydrous ether (50 mL) and added to the addition funnel. About 5 mL of this ether solution was added to the Mg filings while stirring vigorously. An exothermic reaction was observed (to confirm / accelerate Grignard reagent formation, 5 mg of iodine was added and immediately discoloration was observed confirming Grignard reagent formation) and the ether started refluxing. The rest of the bromide solution was added dropwise while
IMPI
203 f> £ THE INDUSTRIAL FRCfILOAD
<img file="MX338780B_D0205.tif" />
MEXICAN INSTITUTE bnr it © crreitrun. , kept the reaction at a slight reflux by cooling the flask in water. After the addition was complete, the reaction mixture was kept at 35 ° C for 1 h and then cooled in an ice bath. Ethyl formate (2.68 g, 36.2 mmol) was dissolved in anhydrous ether (40 mL) and transferred to the addition funnel and added dropwise to the reaction mixture with stirring. An exothermic reaction was observed and the reaction mixture started to reflux. After the start of the reaction, the remainder of the ethereal formate solution was quickly squirted and the reaction mixture was stirred for an additional period of 1 h at room temperature. The reaction was quenched by adding 10 mL of acetone dropwise followed by ice-cold water (60 mL). The reaction mixture was treated with aqueous H2SO4 (10% by volume, 300 mL) until the solution was homogenized and the layers were separated. The aqueous phase was extracted with ether (2x100 mL). The combined ether layers were dried (Na<sub>2</sub>SO, j) and concentrated to obtain the crude product which was purified by column chromatography (silica gel, 0-10% ether in hexanes). The slightly less polar fractions were concentrated to obtain formate 6a (1.9 g) and the pure product fractions were evaporated to provide pure product 6b as a colorless oil (14.6 g, 78%).
Synthesis of compound 7
204
ΙΜΡΙ
INSTITUTO MtXiCANO f; f A PRO? 1H? AO INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX338780B_D0206.tif" />
<td></td><td>To a solution</td><td>from alcohol 6b (3 g, 5.68 mmol)</td><td>in</td><td>CH<sub>2</sub>C1<sub>2</sub></td>
<td> (60</td><td colspan="2">mL), 4 molecular sieves were added</td><td>TO</td><td>newly</td>
<td colspan="2">activated (50 g) and</td><td>PCC was added to this solution</td><td>in</td><td>powder</td>
<td> (4.9</td><td>g, 22.7 mmol)</td><td colspan="2">per serving over a period</td><td>of 20</td>
minutes and the mixture was stirred additionally for 1 hour (Note: close monitoring of the reaction is necessary to obtain good performance as long reaction times produce lower yield) and the TLC of the reaction mixture was controlled every 10 minutes (5% ether in hexanes). After completion of the reaction, the reaction mixture was filtered through a pad of silica gel, and the residue was washed with CH2CI2 (400 mL). The filtrate was concentrated and the crude product obtained in this way was further purified by column chromatography (silica gel, 1% Et<sub>2</sub>Or in hexanes) to isolate pure product 7 (2.9 g, 97%) as a colorless oil. <sup>X</sup>H NMR (CDCI3, 400 MHz) δ = 5.33-5.21 (m, 8H), 2.69 (t, 4H), 2.30 (t, 4H), 2.05-1.95 (m, 8H), 1.55-1.45 (m, 2H) , 1.35-1.15 (m, 18H), 0.82 (t, 3H). <sup>13</sup>C NMR (CDCI3) δ = 211.90, 130.63,
130.54, 128.47, 128.41, 43.27, 33.04, 32.01, 30.93, 29.89,
29.86, 29.75, 29.74, 27.69, 26.11, 24.35, 23.06, 14.05. MS.
Molecular weight calculated for C37H66O, Cal. 526.92, Found 528.02 (M + H<sup>+</sup>) .
Example 3: Synthesis of asymmetric ketones 25 and 27
205
Scheme 3
<img file="MX338780B_D0207.tif" />
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE
Di IA INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY
<img file="MX338780B_D0208.tif" />
<sup>0</sup> \
Br
BrMg
Mg
Et<sub>2</sub>OR
26a
<img file="MX338780B_D0209.tif" />
H<sup>+</sup>
<img file="MX338780B_D0210.tif" />
Synthesis of heptatriaconta-6,9,28-trien-19-one 25
Freshly activated Mg filings (132 mg, 0.0054 mol) were added to a dry 50 mL 2 neck round bottom flask and the flask was equipped with a magnetic stir bar and reflux condenser. This system was degassed and purged with nitrogen and 10 mL of anhydrous ether was added to the flask by syringe. Bromide 24 (1.8g, 0.0054mol) was dissolved in anhydrous ether (10mL) and added dropwise to the flask by syringe. An exothermic reaction (reaction started with
206
ΙΜΡΙ
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF. INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY
<img file="MX338780B_D0211.tif" />
dibromoethane) and ether started refluxing. After the addition was complete the reaction mixture was kept at 35 ° C for 1h and then cooled in an ice bath at 10-15 ° C. Cyanide 4 (0.5 g, 0.0018 mol) was dissolved in dry THF (5 mL) and added dropwise to the reaction with stirring. An exothermic reaction was observed and the reaction mixture was refluxed (at 70 ° C) for 12h and quenched with an ammonium chloride solution. It was then treated with 25% HC1 solution until the solution was homogenized and the layers were separated. The aqueous phase was extracted with ether. The combined ether layers were dried and concentrated to obtain the crude product which was purified by column chromatography. The pure product fractions were evaporated to provide the pure ketone 25 as a colorless oil.
Yield: 0.230 g (24%). <sup>1</sup>H-NMR (CDC13, 400MHz): δ =
5.37-5.30 (m, 6H), 2.77-2.74 (t, 2H), 2.38-2.34 (t, 4H),
2.05-1.95 (m, 8H), 1.56-1.52 (m, 4H), 1.35-1.25 (m, aliphatic protons), 0.89-0.85 (t, 6H). IR (cm-1): 2924,
2854,1717,1465,1049,721.
Synthesis of heptatriaconta-6,9-dien-19-one 27
To a 500 mL flame-dried 2-neck round bottom flask, freshly activated Mg filings (0.144 g, 6 mmol) were added and the flask was equipped with a magnetic stir bar and reflux condenser.
<img file="MX338780B_D0212.tif" />
PI £
MEXICAN INSTITUTE 'ΛDE IA PROPIEDAD V *'
207 industrial »
This system was degassed and purged with argon and mL of anhydrous ether was added to the flask by means of a syringe. Commercially available bromide 26 (2.65 g, 5 mmol) was dissolved in anhydrous ether (10 mL) and added dropwise to the flask by syringe. After the addition was complete, the reaction mixture was kept at 35 ° C for 1 h and then cooled in an ice bath. Cyanide 4 (1.38 g, 5 mmol) was dissolved in anhydrous ether (20 mL) and added dropwise to the reaction mixture with stirring. An exothermic reaction was observed and the reaction mixture was stirred overnight at room temperature. The reaction was quenched by adding 10 mL of acetone dropwise followed by ice-cold water (60 mL). The reaction mixture was treated with aqueous H2SO4 (10 volume%, 200 mL) until the solution was homogenized and the layers were separated. The aqueous phase was extracted with ether (2x100 mL). The combined ether layers were dried (Na<sub>2</sub>SC> 4) and concentrated to obtain the crude product which was purified by column chromatography to provide pure ketone 27 as a colorless oil. 1H-NMR (CDC13, 400MHz): δ = 5.42-5.30 (m, 4H), 2.79-2.78 (t, 2H), 2.40-2.37 (t, 4H), 2.08-2.03 (m, 4H), 1.58-1.54 (m, 4H), 1.36-1.26 (br m, aliphatic protons), 0.91-0.87 (t,
<img file="MX338780B_D0213.tif" />
6H). IR (cm-1): 2924, 2854, 1716, 1465, 1375, 721.
<img file="MX338780B_D0214.tif" />
208
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF PROPERTY
INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX338780B_D0215.tif" />
Example 4: Synthesis of asymmetric ketones with Ci chain<sub>2</sub>.
Scheme 4
<img file="MX338780B_D0216.tif" />
<img file="MX338780B_D0217.tif" />
Freshly activated Mg filings (175 mg, 0.0072 mol) were added to a 50 mL dry 2-neck round bottom flask and the flask was equipped with a magnetic stir bar and reflux condenser. This system was degassed and purged with argon and 10 mL of anhydrous ether was added to the flask by means of a syringe. Bromide 28 (1.5g,
0.006 mol) was dissolved in anhydrous ether (7 mL) and added dropwise to the flask using a syringe. An exothermic reaction (reaction started with dibromoethane) was observed and the ether started refluxing. After the addition was complete the reaction mixture was kept at 35 ° C for lh and then cooled in an ice bath at 10-15 ° C. Cyanide 4 (lg, 0.0036mol) was dissolved in anhydrous ether (7 mL ) and added dropwise to the reaction with stirring. An exothermic reaction was observed and the reaction mixture was refluxed for 12h and quenched with a solution of
IMPI
<img file="MX338780B_D0218.tif" />
209 ammonium chloride. It was then treated with 25% HCI solution until the solution was homogenized and the layers were separated. The aqueous phase was extracted with ether. The combined ether layers were dried and concentrated to obtain the crude product which was purified by column chromatography. The pure product fractions were evaporated to provide pure ketone 29 as a colorless oil. Yield: 0.65 g (26%).<sup>1</sup>H-NMR (δ ppm): 5,388-5,302 (m,
4H), 2.77 - 2.74 (t, 2H), 2.38 - 2.34 (t, 4H), 2.04-2.01 (m, 4H), 1.34 - 1.18 (m, 36H), 0.89 - 0.85 (m 6H). IR (cm<sup>_1</sup>): 3009, 2920, 2851, 1711 (C = O), 1466, 1376, 1261.
Example 5: Synthesis of asymmetric ketones with chain 31 Cío Scheme 5
<img file="MX338780B_D0219.tif" />
To a 50 mL dry 2-neck round bottom flask, freshly activated Mg filings (266 mg,
210
ΙΜΡΙ
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY
<img file="MX338780B_D0220.tif" />
0.0109 mol) and the flask was equipped with a magnetic stir bar and a reflux condenser. This system was degassed and purged with nitrogen and 10 mL of anhydrous ether was added to the flask by syringe. The bromide (2.43 g, 0.0109 mol) was dissolved in anhydrous ether (7 mL) and added dropwise to the flask by syringe. An exothermic reaction (reaction started with dibromoethane) was observed and the ether started refluxing. After completing the addition the reaction mixture was kept at 35 ° C for 1h and then cooled in an ice bath at 10-15 ° C. Cyanide (1 g, 0.0036 mol) was dissolved in anhydrous ether (7 mL ) and added dropwise to the reaction with stirring. An exothermic reaction was observed and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 hr. THF (4ml) was added to the reaction mixture and heated at 45-50 ° C for 4 hr until the cyano derivative was completely consumed. The reaction was quenched by the addition of 3mL of acetone dropwise followed by ice-cold water. The reaction mixture was treated with 25% HC1 solution until the solution was homogenized and the layers were separated. The aqueous phase was extracted with ether. The combined ether layers were dried and concentrated to obtain the crude product which was purified by column chromatography. The pure product fractions were evaporated to provide the pure ketone as a colorless oil. Yield: 0.93 gms (61%).<sup>1</sup>H-NMR (δ ppm): 5.37211
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OE INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY
<img file="MX338780B_D0221.tif" />
5.302 (m, 4H), 2.77 - 2.74 (t, 2H), 2.38 - 2.34 (t, 4H),
2.05-2.00 (m, 4H), 1.55 - 1.52 (m, 2H), 1.35 - 1.24 (m, 34H), 0.89 - 0.84 (m 6H). IR (cm -<sup>1</sup>): 3009, 2925, 2854, 1717 (C = O), 1465, 1376.
Example 6
Scheme 6
Synthesis of asymmetric ketones with cholesterol
<img file="MX338780B_D0222.tif" />
<img file="MX338780B_D0223.tif" />
H<sup>+</sup>
<img file="MX338780B_D0224.tif" />
Using a procedure similar to that used for the synthesis of ketone 31, cholesteryl chloride that was converted to the corresponding magnesium chloride followed by addition to linoleyl cyanide provided ketone 33.
Example 7: Synthesis of asymmetric ketones with cholesterol 35
<img file="MX338780B_D0225.tif" />
Treatment of the cholesterol chloroformate with 3bromopropylamine provided the bromide 34 which became the corresponding Grignard 34a reagent which in treatment with the linoleyl cyanide provided the corresponding asymmetric ketone 35 in good yield.
Example 8: Synthesis of asymmetric ketone 40
IMPI
<img file="MX338780B_D0226.tif" />
213
Scheme 8
<img file="MX338780B_D0227.tif" />
o = <. . . . . ...
Synthesis of compound 37
To a round bottom flask with two 500ml necks containing LiAlH<sub>4</sub> (1.02g, 0.0269 mol) Anhydrous THF (20 mL) was added at room temperature under a nitrogen atmosphere. The suspension was stirred for 1 h at room temperature and then cooled to 0 ° C. To this mixture was added a solution of compound 1 (5g, 0.01798 mol) in anhydrous THF (50 mL) slowly while maintaining the internal temperature at 0 ° C. After the addition was complete, the reaction mixture was warmed to room temperature and stirred for 1 h. The progress of the reaction was monitored by TLC. On completion of the reaction, the mixture was cooled to 0 ° C and quenched with saturated Na solution.<sub>2</sub>SW<sub>4</sub> aqueous. The reaction mixture was stirred for 30 minutes and the solid formed was filtered through a celite pad and washed with ethyl acetate (100 mL). The filtrate and the washes are
214
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY
<img file="MX338780B_D0228.tif" />
they combined and evaporated on a rotary evaporator to provide compound 37 as a colorless liquid, which was taken as such for the next step without any purification. Yield: (4.5g, 95%); · * · Η NMR (400MHz, CDCI3) δ = 5.39-5.28 (m, 6H), 3.64-3.61 (t, 2H), 2.81-2.78 (t, 4H),
2.10-2.01 (m, 4H), 1.59-1.51 (m, 2H), 1.29-1.22 (m, aliphatic protons), 0.98-0.94 (t, 3H).
Synthesis of compound 38
Compound 37 (14 g, 0.0530 mol) was dissolved in DCM (300 ml) in a 500 ml two neck round bottom flask and cooled to 0 ° C. To this solution, trethylamine (29.5 ml, 0.2121 mol) was added slowly under an inert atmosphere. The reaction mixture was then stirred for 10-15 minutes and mesyl chloride (6.17 mL, 0.0795 mol) was added slowly. After the addition was complete, the reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred for 20 h. The reaction was monitored by TLC. On completion, the reaction mixture was diluted with water (200 mL), stirred for a few minutes, and the organic layer was separated. The organic phase was further washed with brine (1 x 70 mL), dried over Na<sub>2</sub>SO4.and the solvent was removed on a rotary evaporator to obtain crude compound 38 as a tan oil which was used as such for the following reaction. Yield: (17g, 93%)<sup>2</sup>H NMR (400MHz, CDCI3) δ =
215
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY
<img file="MX338780B_D0229.tif" />
5.39-5.31 (m, 6H), 4.22-4.19 (t, 2H), 2.99 (s, 3H), 2.81-2.78 (m, 4H), 2.08-2.01 (m, 4H), 1.75.1.69 (m, 2H ), 1.39-1.29 (m, aliphatic protons), 0.98-0.94 (t, 3H).
Synthesis of compound 39
Mesylate 38 (10 g, 0.2923 mol) was dissolved in anhydrous ether (300 mL) in a two neck round bottom flask
1000 mL and MgBr2.Et2O complex (22.63 g, 0.0877 mol) was added to this under nitrogen atmosphere. The resulting mixture was then heated under reflux for 26 h. After completion of the reaction (by TLC), the reaction mixture was diluted with ether (300 mL) and ice water (200 mL), and the ether layer was separated. The organic layer was then washed with 1% K2CO3 (100 mL) followed by brine (80 mL). The organic phase was then dried over Na2SO<sub>4</sub> Anhydrous and the solvent was evaporated in vacuo to give the crude material that was subjected to silica gel chromatography (60-120 mesh) using 0-1% ethyl acetate in hexanes as the eluent system to provide the desired compound 39 as a oil. Yield: (7g, 73%)<sup>1</sup>H NMR (400MHz, CDCI3) δ = 5.39-5.31 (m, 6H), 3.41-3.37 (t, 2H),
2.81-2.78 (m, 4H), 2.08-2.02 (m, 4H), 1.86-1.80 (m, 2H),
1.42-1.29 (m, aliphatic protons), 0.98-0.94 (t, 3H).
Asymmetric ketone synthesis 40
To a 500mL two neck round bottom flask
216
ΙΜΡΙ
Mexican INSTITUTE
DF THE INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY
<img file="MX338780B_D0230.tif" />
Flame dried, equipped with a magnetic stir bar and a reflux condenser, freshly activated Mg filings (0.88 g, 0.03636 mol) were added. This system was degassed, purged with argon and ether (150 mL) was added. A few drops of bromine compound 4 (11.89 g, 0.03636 mol) in 50 ml of ether were added at the start to start the reaction (note: a catalytic amount of 1,2-dibromoethane was also added to accelerate reagent formation de grignard). Upon initiation, the remaining solution of the bromine compound was slowly added to the ethereal solution at reflux. After the addition was complete, the reaction mixture was refluxed at 40 ° C for 1.5 hr. It was then cooled to 10 ° C and linoleyl cyanide 4 (5 g,
0.01818 mol) in 30 mL of dry ether was added dropwise and the resulting mixture was then heated at reflux for 20 h at 40 ° C. The progress of the reaction was monitored by TLC. After completing consumption of the cyano 40 derivative (by TLC), the mixture was cooled to room temperature and quenched with 30 mL of acetone followed by ice water (50 mL). This solution was further acidified with
10% HC1 solution and the ether layer was separated. The aqueous phase was further extracted with diethyl ether (2 x 100 mL). Solvent removal after drying with / over Na2SO<sub>4</sub> anhydrous provided the crude ketone which was purified by silica gel column chromatography (mesh
217
IMPIOUS
-. MEXICAN INSTITUTE Τχ; OF PROPERTY - «INDUSTRIAL
100-200) using 0-5% ether in hexanes as the eluent system to give the title compound 40 as a pale yellow oil. Yield: (4.8g, 50.5%)<sup>1</sup>H NMR (400MHz, CDC1<sub>3</sub>) δ = 5.38-5.28 (m, 10H), 2.80-2.74 (m, 6H), 2.38-2.34 (t, 4H),
2.08-2.00 (m, 8H), 1.55-1.52 (m, 4H), 1.35-1.26 (m, aliphatic protons), 0.98-0.94 (t, 3H), 0.89-0.85 (t, 3H). HPLC98.04%.
Example 9: Oligonucleotide synthesis:
All oligonucleotides were synthesized on an AKTAoligopilot synthesizer. Commercially available controlled pore glass solid support (dT-CPG, 500A, Main Synthesis) and RNA phosphoramidites with standard protecting groups, 5'-O-dimethoxytryl N6-benzoyl-2'-tbutyldimethylsilyl-adenosine-3'- were used ON, Ν'-diisopropyl-2-cyanoethylphosphoramidite, 5'-O-dimethoxytryl-N4-acetyl-2 '-tbutyldimethylsilyl-cytidine-3'-0-N, Ν'-diisopropyl-2-cyanoethylphosphoramidite, 5'-0-dimethoxytryl-N2-isobutril-2 't-butyldimethylsilyl-guanosine-3'-ON, Ν'-diisopropyl-2-cyanoethylphosphoramidite and 5'-O-dimethoxytrylyl-2'-tbutyldimethylsilyl-uridine-3'-ON, N'-diisopropyl-2-cyanoethylphosphoramidite (Pierce Nucleic Acids Technologies) for the synthesis of oligonucleotides. 2'-F phosphoramidites, 5'-0-dimethoxytryl-N4-acetyl-2'-flurocytidine-3'-ON, N'-diisopropyl-2-cyanoethyl-phosphoramidite were purchased and
<img file="MX338780B_D0231.tif" />
218
<img file="MX338780B_D0232.tif" />
5'-0-dimethoxytryl-2'-fluro-uridine-3'-ON, N'-diisopropyl-2-cyanoethyl-phosphoramidite from (Promega). All phosphoramidites were used at a concentration of 0.2M in acetonitrile (CH<sub>3</sub>CN) except for guanosine which was used at a concentration of 0.2M in 10% THF / ANC (v / v). A coupling / recycle time of 16 minutes was used. The activator was 5-ethyl thiotetrazole (0.75M, American International
Chemicals), for the PO oxidation Iodine / Water / Pyridine was used and for the PS oxidation PADS (2%) in 2,6-lutidine / ACN (1: 1 v / v) was used.
Conjugated chains of 3 'ligand were synthesized using solid support containing the corresponding ligand. For example, the introduction of cholesterol units into the sequence was carried out from hydroxyprolinol-cholesterol phosphoramidite. Cholesterol was linked to trans-4-hydroxyprolinol through a 6-aminohexanoate bond to obtain a portion of hydroxyprolinolcholesterol. Labeled 5 ', Cy-3 and Cy-5.5 (fluorophore) siRNAs were synthesized from the corresponding phosphoramidite (Cy-3) Quasar-570 purchased from Biosearch Technologies. Conjugation of the ligands to the 5 'end and / or internal position is accomplished by using the suitably protected ligand-phosphoramidite backbone. An extended 15 min coupling of 0.1M phosphoramidite solution in CH<sub>3</sub>Anhydrous CN in the presence of
IMPI
219
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF ΙΛ PROPERTY
INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX338780B_D0233.tif" />
activator 5- (ethylthio) -ΙΗ-tetrazole to an oligonucleotide attached to a solid. The oxidation of the internucleotide phosphite to the phosphate was carried out using standard iodine-water as reported (1) or by treatment with terbutyl hydroperoxide / acetonitrile / water (10: 87: 3) with oligonucleotide conjugated with 10 min. waiting for oxidation. Phosphorothioate was introduced by oxidation of the phosphite to phosphorothioate using a sulfur transfer reagent such as DDTT (purchased from AM Chemicals), PADS, and or Beaucage reagent. Cholesterol phosphoramidite was synthesized at the site and used at a concentration of 0.1 M in dichloromethane. The coupling time for cholesterol phosphoramidite was 16 minutes.
After completing the synthesis, the support was transferred to a 100 ml glass bottle (VWR). The oligonucleotide was cleaved from the support with simultaneous deprotection of the base groups and phosphate with 80 mL of a mixture of ethanolic ammonia [ammonia: ethanol (3: 1)] for 6.5h at 55 ° C. The bottle was chilled on ice for a short period of time and then the ethanolic ammonia mixture was filtered into a new 250 ml bottle. The CPG was washed with x 40 mL portions of ethanol / water (1: 1 v / v). The volume of the mixture was then reduced to ~ 30 ml by rotary evaporator. The mixture was then frozen in dyince [SIC] and dried under vacuum in a speed vac type centrifugal concentrator.
220
IMPI ,,,.
INSTITUTO MtA'.CANO β ** 'OF PROPERTY <*** INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX338780B_D0234.tif" />
The dry residue was resuspended in 26 ml of triethylamine, triethylamine trihydrofluoride (TEA.3HF) or pyridine-HF and DMSO (3: 4: 6) and heated at 60 ° C for 90 minutes to remove the ter groups -butyldimethylsilyl (TBDMS) at the 2 'position. The reaction was then quenched with 50 ml of 20mM sodium acetate and the pH adjusted to 6.5, and stored in a freezer until purification.
The oligonucleotides were analyzed by high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) before purification and selection of the buffer and the column depends on the nature of the sequence and / or conjugated ligand.
Ligand-conjugated oligonucleotides were purified by preparative reverse phase HPLC. Unconjugated oligonucleotides were purified by anion exchange HPLC on a TSK gel column packed in place. The buffers were 20 mM sodium phosphate (pH 8.5) in 10% CH<sub>3</sub>CN (buffer A) and 20 mM sodium phosphate (pH 8.5) in 10% CH<sub>3</sub>CN, NaBr 1M (buffer B). Fractions containing full length oligonucleotides were pooled, desalted, and lyophilized. Approximately 0.15 OD of the desalted oligonucleotides were diluted to 150 µ 150 in water and then pipetted into special flasks for CGE and LC / MS analysis. Compounds were finally analyzed by LC-ESMS and CGE.
For the siRNA preparation, amounts were heated
<img file="MX338780B_D0235.tif" />
<img file="MX338780B_D0236.tif" />
221 Equimolar sense and antisense strands in lxPBS at 95 ° C for 5 min and slowly cooled to room temperature. Duplex integrity was confirmed by HPLC analysis.
Table 7. SiRNA duplexes for FVII addressing and
Luc
<td>Duplex</td><td>Sense/ Antisense</td><td>Sequence 5'-3 '</td><td>SEQ ID NOT:</td><td>Diana</td>
<td></td><td> 1000/2434</td><td>CUU ACG CUG AGU ACU UCG AdTdT U * CG AAG fUAC UCA GCG fUAA GdT * dT</td><td></td><td>Luc</td>
<td></td><td> 2433/1001</td><td>C * UfU ACG CUG AGfU ACU UCG AdT * dT UCG AAG UAC UCA GCG UAA GdTdT</td><td></td><td>Luc</td>
<td></td><td> 2433/2434</td><td>C * UfU ACG CUG AGfU ACU UCG AdT * dT U * CG AAG fUAC UCA GCG fUAA GdT * dT</td><td></td><td>Luc</td>
<td></td><td> 1000/1001</td><td>CUU ACG CUG AGU ACU UCG AdTdT UCG AAG UAC UCA GCG UAA GdTdT</td><td></td><td>Luc</td>
<td>AD-1596</td><td></td><td>GGAUCAUCUCAAGUCUUACdTdT GUAAGACUUGAGAUGAUCCdTdT</td><td></td><td>FVII</td>
<td>AD-1661</td><td></td><td>GGAfUfCAfUfCfUfCAAGfUfCfUfUAf CdTsdT GfUAAGAfCfUfUGAGAfUGAfUfCfCdT * dT</td><td></td><td>FVII</td>
222
Note: L8 is
<img file="MX338780B_D0237.tif" />
Oh
<img file="MX338780B_D0238.tif" />
OR'
NH<sub>2</sub> lowercase is nucleotide
2'-0-methyl modified, * are phosphorothioate backbone bonds, fN is a 2'-fluoro nucleotide, dN is 2'-deoxy nucleotide.
Example 10: Serum stability test for siRNA
A medium performance test for initial sequence-based stability screening was performed using the stains all approach. To perform the assay, a siRNA duplex was incubated in 90% human serum at 37'C. Samples of the reaction mixture were inactivated at various time ranges (0 min., 15, 30, 60, 120 and 240 min.) And subjected to electrophoretic analysis (Figure 1). RNA cleavage over time provided information related to the susceptibility of the siRNA duplex to nuclease degradation in serum.
A serum and radiolabeled dsRNA stability assay was used to further characterize siRNA cleavage events. First, a siRNA duplex was labeled at the 5 'end with<sup>32</sup>P either in the sense chain as antisense. The labeled siRNA duplex was incubated with 90% human serum at 37 ° C, and a sample was removed from the
223
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OE INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY
<img file="MX338780B_D0239.tif" />
solution and went extinct for ever increasing time ranges.
The samples were analyzed by electrophoresis.
Example 11: FVII evaluation in vivo using liposomes derived from cationic lipids
In vivo Silencing Experiments of Rodent Factor VII and ApoB.
C57BL / 6 mice (Charles River Labs, MA) and Sprague-Dawley rats (Charles River Labs, MA) received either saline or siRNA in desired formulations through injection into the tail vein in a volume of 0.01 mL / g. At various time ranges after administration, animals were anesthetized by inhalation of isofluorane and blood was collected in serum separator tubes by retroorbital bleeding. Serum levels of Factor VII protein were determined in samples using a chromogenic assay (Coaset Factor VII, DiaPharma Group, OH or Biophen FVII, Aniara Corporation, OH) according to manufacturers' protocols. A standard curve was generated using serum collected from animals treated with saline. In experiments where liver mRNA levels were assessed, animals were sacrificed and livers were removed and instantly frozen in liquid nitrogen at various time ranges after administration. The frozen liver tissue was pulverized.
<img file="MX338780B_D0240.tif" />
224
Tissue specimens were prepared and liver levels of Factor VII and apoB mRNA were determined using a
Branched DNA (QuantiGene Assay, Panomics, CA).
Example 12: Preparation
1,2-Di-O-alkyl-sn3 Carbomoylglyceride (PEG-DMG) <sup>r</sup>o ^ V ^ oh the R <sup>3</sup> ^ 14 ^ 29 Ib R * C16H33 le R <sup>3</sup> C18H37
DSC, TEA DCM
0 ° C-RT <sup>Ρ</sup>Ο '^^ Ο<sup>Λ</sup>Ο-Ν<sup>></sup>'or C
R '° O llck R - C-j4H<sub>2</sub>g llbR = C<sub>16</sub>H<sub>33 </sub>lie R = C18H37
H<sub>2</sub>N- ~ / \ O ^<sub>or</sub>^ OMe
III mPEG<sub>2</sub>ooo-NH<sub>2</sub>
Py / DCM 0 ° C-RT <sub>D</sub>Ó H
IVa R = C<sub>14</sub>H<sub>29 </sub>IVb R = C<sub>16</sub>H<sub>33 </sub>IVc R = C<sub>18</sub>H<sub>37</sub>
OMe
IVa Preparation
1,2-Di-O-tetradecyl-sn-glyceride la (30g, 61.80mmol) and N, Ν'-succinimidylcarbonate (DSC, 23.76g, 1.5eq.) Were placed in dichloromethane (DCM, 500mL) and stirred over a mixture of ice water. Triethylamine (TEA, 25.30 mL, 3 eq.) Was added to the stirring solution, and then the reaction mixture was allowed to stir overnight at room temperature. The progress of the reaction was monitored by TLC. The reaction mixture was diluted with DCM (400 mL) and the organic layer was washed with water (2X500 mL),
225
IMPIOUS
<img file="MX338780B_D0241.tif" />
aqueous NaHCO solution<sub>3</sub> (500 mL) followed by standard processing. The obtained residue was dried at room temperature under high vacuum overnight. After drying the crude carbonate Ha thus obtained, it was dissolved in dichloromethane (500 mL) and stirred on an ice bath. MPEG was added to the stirred solution<sub>2</sub>ooo<sup>-</sup>NH<sub>2</sub> (III, 103.00 g, 47.20 mmol, purchased from NOF Corporation, Japan) and anhydrous pyridine (Py, 80 mL, excess) in argon. The reaction mixture was then allowed to stir at room temperature overnight. Solvents and
<td>volatile</td><td>I know</td><td>they eliminated the</td><td>empty and the</td><td>residue dissolved in</td>
<td>DCM (200</td><td>mL)</td><td>and it was loaded</td><td colspan="2">to a silica gel column</td>
<td>packed</td><td>in</td><td>acetate</td><td>ethyl.</td><td>Column eluted</td>
<td colspan="2">initially</td><td>with acetate</td><td>ethyl</td><td>and then with</td>
<td>gradient</td><td>of</td><td>5-10% of</td><td>methanol</td><td>in dichloromethane for</td>
provide the desired PEG-Lipid IVa as a white solid (105.30g, 83%). <sup>3</sup>H NMR (CDC1<sub>3</sub>, 400 MHz) = 5.20-5.12 (m, 1H), 4.18-4.01 (m, 2H), 3.80-3.70 (m, 2H), 3.70-3.20 (m, -O-CH<sub>2</sub>-CH<sub>2</sub>-O, PEG-CH<sub>2</sub>), 2.10-2.01 (m, 2H), 1.70-1.60 (m, 2H), 1.56-1.45 (m, 4H), 1.31-1.15 (m, 48H), 0.84 (t, J = 6.5Hz, 6H). MS Rank Found: 2660-2836.
IVb Preparation
1,2-Di-O-hexadecyl-sn-glyceride Ib (1.00 g, 1848 mmol) and DSC (0.710 g, 1.5 eq.) Were mixed in dichloromethane (20 mL) and cooled to 0 ° C in a mixture of frozen water. I know
226
<img file="MX338780B_D0242.tif" />
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE
OF THE PROPERTY ·"
INDUSTRIAL added triethylamine (1.00 mL, 3 eq.) And the reaction mixture was stirred overnight. The reaction was followed by TLC, diluted with DCM, washed with water (2 times), NaHCC solution> 3, and dried over sodium sulfate. Solvents were removed under reduced pressure and the resulting Ilb residue was maintained under high vacuum overnight. This compound was used directly for the next reaction without further purification. MPEG dissolved<sub>2</sub>ooo<sup>-</sup>NH<sub>2</sub> III (1.50g, 0.687 mmol, purchased from NOF Corporation, Japan) and Ilb (0.702g, 1.5 eq.) In dichloromethane (20 mL) in argon. The reaction was cooled to 0 ° C. Pyridine (1 mL, excess) was added and the reaction was stirred overnight. The reaction was monitored by TLC.
Solvents and volatiles were removed in vacuo and the residue was purified by chromatography (first ethyl acetate followed by 5-10% MeOH / DCM as elution gradient) to obtain the required compound IVb as a white solid (1.46 g, 76 %). <sup>X</sup>H NMR (CDC1<sub>3</sub>, 400 MHz) δ = 5.17 (t, J = 5.5Hz, 1H), 4.13 (dd, J = 4.00Hz, 11.00 Hz, 1H), 4.05 (dd, J = 5.00Hz, 11.00 Hz, 1H), 3.82- 3.75 (m, 2H), 3.70-3.20 (m, -O-CH<sub>2</sub>-CH<sub>2</sub>-OR-,
PEG-CH<sub>2</sub>), 2.05-1.90 (m, 2H), 1.80-1.70 (m, 2H), 1.61-1.45 (m,
6H), 1.35-1.17 (m, 56H), 0.85 (t, J = 6.5Hz, 6H). MS Rank Found: 2716-2892.
IVc Preparation
1,2-Di-O-octadecyl-sn-glyceride Ic (4.00 g,
T
<img file="MX338780B_D0243.tif" />
227
OF THE. INDUSTRY PROPERTY.!.
<img file="MX338780B_D0244.tif" />
6.70 mmol) and DSC (2.58 g, 1.5 eq.) In dichloromethane (60 mL) and cooled to 0 ° C in a mixture of ice water. Triethylamine (2.75 mL, 3 eq.) Was added and the reaction mixture was stirred overnight. The reaction was followed by TLC, diluted with DCM, washed with water (2 times), NaHCO solution<sub>3</sub> and dried over sodium sulfate. Solvents were removed under reduced pressure and the residue was maintained under high vacuum overnight. This compound was used directly for the next reaction without further purification. MPEG dissolved<sub>2</sub>ooo<sup>_</sup>NH<sub>2</sub> III (1.50g, 0.687 mmol, purchased from NOF Corporation, Japan) and lie (0.760g, 1.5 eq.) In dichloromethane (20 mL) in argon. The reaction was cooled to 0 ° C. Pyridine (1 mL, excess) was added and the reaction was stirred overnight. The reaction was monitored by TLC. Solvents and volatiles were removed in vacuo and the residue was purified by chromatography (ethyl acetate followed by 5-10% MeOH / DCM as elution gradient) to obtain the desired compound IVc as a white solid (0.92 g, 48% ). <sup>X</sup>H NMR (CDC1<sub>3</sub>, 400 MHz) δ = 5.22-5.15 (m, 1H), 4.16 (dd, J = 4.00Hz,
11.00 Hz, 1H), 4.06 (dd, J = 5.00Hz, 11.00 Hz, 1H), 3.813.75 (m, 2H), 3.70-3.20 (m, -O-CH<sub>2</sub>-CH<sub>2</sub>-O-, PEG-CH<sub>2</sub>), 1.80-1.70 (m, 2H), 1.60-1.48 (m, 4H), 1.31-1.15 (m, 64H), 0.85 (t, J =
6.5Hz, 6H). MS Rank Found: 2774-2948.
Example 13:
228
HO '
<img file="MX338780B_D0245.tif" />
2004
MsCI, DCM
TEA, DMAP
<img file="MX338780B_D0246.tif" />
<img file="MX338780B_D0247.tif" />
2005
NaN<sub>3</sub>, DMF
<img file="MX338780B_D0248.tif" />
2006
Synthesis of 2005: To a solution of 2004 (50g, 95mmol) in DCM (400ml) in Ar atmosphere, TEA (53mL, 378mmol) and DMAP (1.2g, 9.5mmol) were added and stirred at temperature atmosphere in Ar atmosphere. The reaction mass was cooled to -5 ° C and the mesyl chloride solution (15 mL, 190 mmol) in DCM (100 ml) was slowly added at a temperature below -5 ° C and allowed to warm to RT after addition. After 30 minutes (TLC), the reaction mass was quenched with ice water (20 ml). The organic layer was separated, washed with IN HC1 (30 ml), water, brine, dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated under reduced pressure to obtain pure product (55g, 95.5%) as a yellow liquid. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDC1<sub>3</sub>): δ 0.89 (t, 6H, J = 6.8), 1.2-1.5 (m, 36H), 1.67 (m, 4H), 2.05 (q, 8H, Jl = 6.8, J2 = 6.8), 2.77 (t, 4H , J = 6.4), 2.99 (s, 3H), 4.71 (m, 1H) and 5.36 (m, 8H). Synthesis 2006: To a solution of 2005 (50g, 82 mmol) in DMF (500 mL) under argon atmosphere, NaN was added<sub>3</sub> (27g, 410mmol) and heated to 70 ° C and the temperature was maintained for
<img file="MX338780B_D0249.tif" />
229
<img file="MX338780B_D0250.tif" />
four hours (TLC). The mixture was diluted with water and extracted with ethyl acetate (3x250 ml). The organic layer was washed with water, brine, dried over Na2SO<sub>4</sub> and evaporated under reduced pressure to give the crude product, which was purified by chromatography on silica gel using hexanes / ether as the eluent. The product was eluted with 2% ether hexanes to obtain 2006 (36g, 86%) as a pale yellow liquid, 'ή NMR (400MHz, CDC13): δ 0.90 (t, 8H), 1.30 (m, 36H), 1.49 (t, 4H,
J = 6.4 Hz) 2.04 (q, 8H, J1 = 7.6, J2 = 14Hz), 2.77 (t, 4H, J = 6.4 Hz), 3.22 (m, 1H), 5.34 (m, 8H). <sup>13</sup>C NMR (400 MHz, CDC1<sub>3</sub>): δ 14.1, 22.5, 25.6, 26.1, 27.2, 29.2, 29.3, 29.45,
29.65, 31.5, 34.1, 63.1, 127.9, and 130.1. IR (KBr): 2098.
Example 14: Formulation of siRNA using preformed vesicles The cationic lipid containing particles were made using the preformed vesicles method. The cationic lipid, DSPC, cholesterol and PEG-lipid were solubilized in ethanol at a molar ratio of 40/10/40/10, respectively. The lipid mixture was added to an aqueous buffer (50mM citrate, pH 4) mixing to a final concentration of ethanol and lipids of 30% (vol / vol) and 6.1 mg / mL respectively and allowed to equilibrate at room temperature for 2 min before extrusion. The hydrated lipids were extruded through two stacked 80nm pore size filters (Nuclepore) at 22 ° using Lipex Extruder (Northern Lipids,
230
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE PE LA PROi'iErWD
IHDLSTHíAL
<img file="MX338780B_D0251.tif" />
Vancouver, BC) until obtaining a vesicle diameter of 70-90 nm, as determined by the Nicomp analysis. This generally required 1-3 passes. For some cationic lipid mixtures that did not form small vesicles that hydrate the lipid mixture with a lower pH buffer (50mM citrate, pH 3) to protonate the phosphate group in the main group DSPC helped to form stable vesicles of 70 -90 nm.
FVII siRNA (solubilized in 50mM citrate, aqueous pH 4 solution containing 30% ethanol) was added to the vesicles, pre-equilibrated to 35 ° C, at a rate of ~ 5mL / min. After achieving a final siRNA / lipid target ratio of 0.06 (w / w), the mixture was incubated for an additional 30 min at 35 ° C to allow reorganization of the gallbladder and encapsulation of siRNA FVII. Ethanol was removed and the external buffer was replaced with PBS (155mM NaCl, 3mM Na2HPO4, lmM KH2PO4, pH 7.5) either by dialysis or diafiltration by transgenital flow. The fine ratio of encapsulated siRNA-to-lipid was determined after removing the encapsulated siRNA using size exclusion columns or ion exchange columns.
Example 15: In Vivo Determination of the Efficacy of Novel Lipid Formulations
Test formulations were initially evaluated
231
<img file="MX338780B_D0252.tif" />
to determine their FVII gene silencing in females 7-9 weeks of age, 15-25g, female C57B1 / 6 mice at 0.1, 0.3, 1.0 and 5.0 mg / kg with 3 mice per treatment group. All studies included animals that received either phosphate buffered saline (PBS, control group) or a reference formulation. The formulations were diluted to the proper concentration in PBS immediately prior to testing. Mice were weighed and appropriate dose volumes (10 Ql / g body weight) calculated. Test and reference formulations as well as PBS (for control animals) were administered intravenously through the lateral tail vein. Animals were anesthetized 24 h later with an intraperitoneal injection of Ketamine / Xylazine and 500-700 Ü1 of blood was collected by cardiac puncture in serum separator tubes (BD Microtainer). Blood was centrifuged at 2,000 xg for 10 min at 15 ° C and serum was collected and stored at -70 ° C until analysis. Serum samples were thawed at 37 ° C for 30 min, diluted in PBS, and aliquoted into 96-well assay plates. Factor VII levels were assessed using a chromogenic assay (Biophen FVII kit, Hyphen BioMed) according to the manufacturer's instructions and the absorbance measured / measured in a microplate reader equipped with a 405nm wavelength filter. FVII levels in
232
<img file="MX338780B_D0253.tif" />
Mexican INSTITUTE OF PROPERTY plasma ED50s (doses resulting in a 50% reduction in plasma FVII levels compared to control animals) were quantified and calculated using a standard curve generated from a pooled serum sample of control animals. Those formulations of interest that show high levels of FVII silencing (ED50 «0.1 mg / kg) were retested in independent studies at a lower dose range to confirm potency and establish ED50.
Figure 3 provides a Table presenting the EC50 of examples of compounds tested using this method.
Example 15a: Determination of pKA of the formulated lipids
The pKa's of different ionizable cationic lipids were determined essentially as described in (Eastman et al 1992 Biochemistry 31: 4262-4268) using the 2- (p-toluidino) -6naphthalenesulfonic acid (TNS) fluorescent probe, which is non-fluorescent in water but becomes noticeably fluorescent when attached to membranes. Vesicles composed of cationic lipid / DSPC / CH / PEG-c-DOMG (40: 10: 40: 10 molar ratio) were diluted to O.lmM in buffers (130mM NaCl, lOmM of
CH<sub>3</sub>COONH<sub>4</sub>, lOmM of MES, lOmM of HEPES) of different pH, ranging from 2 to 11. An aliquot of aqueous TNS solution (final 1 DM) was added to the diluted vesicles and after a
233
<img file="MX338780B_D0254.tif" />
Equilibration period of 30 seconds the fluorescent of the TNS containing solution was measured at excitation and emission wavelengths of 321nm and 445nm, respectively. The pKa of the cationic lipid-containing vesicles was determined by plotting the measured fluorescence against the pH of the solutions and fitting the data to a sigmoidal curve using the commercial graphing program Igor Pro.
Figure 3 provides a Table representing the pKa of examples of compounds tested using this method.
Example 16: Synthesis of lipids bound to guanidinium Analogues of guanidinium
Preparation of compound 7204:
ho
• OH
7012 Oh
PTSA, toluene, reflux
HO.
7013
7202
MsO.
MsCI, TEA, DCM
7201
1M LAH, THF, 65 ° C
7203
Pyrazole carboxyidine, HCL, DPEA
7204
Preparation of compound 7013: To a mixture of 1,2,4-
<img file="MX338780B_D0255.tif" />
234
<img file="MX338780B_D0256.tif" />
butanotriol (7012, 21.2 g, 200 mmol, 5.0 eq.), dilinoleil eq. ) Ketone acid (21.0 g, 40.0 mmol, 1.0 toluenesulfonic (0.76 g, 4.0 mmol, 0.1 eq.) in toluene was refluxed under Dean-stock conditions overnight. After completing the reaction, it was cooled, the Solvent and purified by column chromatography using hexane and ethyl acetate (15%) as a gradient provided the desired ketal (7013) in 47% yield as an oil.<sup>1</sup>H NMR (400 MHz, CDC1<sub>3</sub>) δ 5.48 - 5.24 (m, 8H),
<td> 4.32</td><td>- 4.17 (m, IH),</td><td> 4.08</td><td>(dd, J</td><td> = 7.</td><td> 8, 6.1,</td><td>1Η), 3.</td><td> 86 - 3.74</td>
<td>(m,</td><td>2H), 3.53 (t, J</td><td> = 8.0,</td><td>IH), 2</td><td> .77</td><td>(t, J =</td><td>6.4, 4Η</td><td> ), 2.30 -</td>
<td> 2.19</td><td>(m, IH), 2.05</td><td>(q, J</td><td> = 6.8,</td><td>8h:</td><td>I, 1.88</td><td> - 1.75</td><td>(m, 2Η),</td>
<td> 1.69</td><td>- 1.51 (m, 4H),</td><td> 1.42</td><td> - 1.19</td><td>(m,</td><td>36H), 0</td><td>.89 (t,</td><td>J = 6.8,</td>
<td>6H).</td><td>Calculated mass</td><td>for</td><td>C41H74O3</td><td>is</td><td> 614.5;</td><td colspan="2">637.3 found</td>
(+ Na).
Synthesis of compound 7201: To a solution of compound 7013 (11.6 g, 18.9 mmol, 1.0 eq.) And triethylamine (5.45 mL, 37.7 mmol, 2.0 eq.) In dichloromethane at 0 ° C was added dropwise a solution of chloride of methanesulfonyl (1.74 mL, 22.67 mmol, 1.2 eq.), and the reaction was continued at room temperature for 1 h. After completing the reaction, it was washed with water, brine and the combined organics were dried over MgSO<sub>4</sub>. The concentrated mixture was purified by column chromatography using hexane and ethyl acetate (20%) as gradients to obtain a derivative.
<img file="MX338780B_D0257.tif" />
IJV
235
<td>mesylate</td><td>(7201) as an oil in</td><td>93% yield. <sup>1</sup>H NMR</td>
<td>(400 MHz,</td><td>CDC1<sub>3</sub>) δ 5.48 - 5.22 (m,</td><td>8H), 4.35 (qd, J = 10.0,</td>
<td>4.9, 2H),</td><td colspan="2">4.25 - 4.14 (m, 1H), 4.13 - 4.03 (m, 1H), 3.53 (t,</td>
<td>J = 7.6,</td><td>1H), 3.02 (s, 3H), 2.77</td><td>(t, J = 6.4, 4H), 2.13 -</td>
<td>1.85 (m,</td><td>10H), 1.57 (dd, J = 18.2,</td><td>9.2, 4H), 1.44 - 1.15 (m,</td>
<td colspan="2">36H), 0.89 (t, J = 6.7, 6H). Mass</td><td>calculated for C42H<sub>76</sub>OR<sub>5</sub> is</td>
<td colspan="2">693.1; 693.2 found.</td><td></td>
Synthesis of compound 7202: To a solution of compound 7201 (2.0 g, 3.0 mmol, 1.0 eq.) In DMF was added
NaN<sub>3</sub> solid (0.98 g, 15.0 mmol, 5.0 eq.) at room temperature and the reaction continued at 65 ° C until completion of the reaction. The reaction mixture was poured into ice-cold water, extracted into ethyl acetate, the combined organics dried over Na2SO<sub>4</sub>They were concentrated, purified by column chromatography using hexane and ethyl acetate (5%) as gradients to obtain a pure azido derivative (7202) in 89% yield. <sup>X</sup>H NMR (400 MHz, CDC1<sub>3</sub>) δ 5.53 - 5.19 (m, 8H), 4.21 - 3.97 (m, 2H), 3.57 - 3.29 (m, 3H),
2.76 (t, J = 6.4, 4H), 2.04 (q, J = 6.8, 8H), 1.80 (m, 2H), 1.66 - 1.43 (m, 4H), 1.40 - 1.07 (m, 36H), 0.88 (t , J = 6.8,
6H). Mass calculated for C<sub>4</sub>iH<sub>73</sub>OR<sub>3</sub>OR<sub>2</sub> is 640.0; 612.5 found (-N2).
Synthesis of compound 7203: To a solution of compound 7202 (1.7 g, 2.65 mmol, 1.0 eq.) In anhydrous tetrahydrofuran, a solution was added dropwise
MEXICAN INSTITUTE W¡sáanrZ, ¡*
OF INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY
Λί
236
IMPI
1M LAH (3.98 mL, 3.98 mmol, 1.5 eq.) At 0 ° C. The reaction was continued at room temperature, after completion of the reaction it was quenched with saturated Na2SO solution<sub>4 </sub>gently at 0 ° C. The compound was extracted in an excess amount of ethyl acetate, the organic layer was washed with brine, dried over Na2SO<sub>4</sub>, concentrated and further dried in vacuo to obtain a pure amine (7203) in
90% yield and this was used directly without further purification. <sup>X</sup>H NMR (400 MHz, CDC1<sub>3</sub>) δ 5.51 - 5.16 (m, 8H), 4.13 (dd, J = 9.3, 3.6, 1H), 4.03 (dd, J = 7.5, 6.1,
1H), 3.46 (t, J = 7.8, 1H), 2.96 - 2.67 (m, 6H), 2.20 - 1.92 (m, 8H), 1.82 - 1.49 (m, 6H), 1.46 - 1.12 (m, 38H), 0.88 (t,
J = 6.8, 6H). Mass calculated for C<sub>4</sub>iH7sNO2 is 614.0; 614.5 found.
Synthesis of compound 7204: (ALNY-232): To a solution of amine 7203 (0.61 g, 1.0 mmol, 1.0 eq.) And DIPEA (1.84 mL, 10.0 mmol, 10.0 eq.) In a solvent mixture (DCM: DMF ) lH-pyrazole-l-carboxamidine hydrochloride (1.46 g, 10.0 mmol, 10.0 eq.) was added in portions at room temperature under an argon atmosphere. The reaction was continued overnight, after completion of the reaction it was poured onto ice and extracted with ethyl acetate. The combined organics were washed with water, brine, dried with Na2SO<sub>4</sub> and purified by preparative chromatography to obtain 0.16 g (25%) of the pure guanidine derivative (7204). 1H NMR (400 MHz,
237
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE I heard THE INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY
<img file="MX338780B_D0258.tif" />
<td>CDC13</td><td>) δ 11.76 (s, 1H), 7.99</td><td>(t,</td><td>J = 6.3, 1H),</td><td>7.44 (s,</td><td>2H),</td>
<td> 5.48</td><td>-5.20 (m, 8H), 4.24-4</td><td> .00</td><td>(m, 2H), 3.54</td><td>(dd, J =</td><td> 7.3,</td>
<td> 6.2,</td><td>1H), 3.32 (d, J = 3.0,</td><td>2H)</td><td>, 3.09 (dt, J</td><td> = 10.5,</td><td> 5.3,</td>
<td>1 HOUR) ,</td><td>2.76 (t, J = 6.5, 4H),</td><td> 2.0</td><td>3 (q, J = 6.8</td><td>, 8H), 1.</td><td> . 90 -</td>
<td> 1.77</td><td>(m, 1H), 1.76 - 1.49 (m,</td><td>6H)</td><td> , 1.48 - 1.05</td><td>(m, 34H),</td><td> 0.87</td>
(dd, J = 6.8, 6H). <sup>13</sup>C NMR (101 MHz, cdcl<sub>3</sub>) δ 158.96, 130.41, 130.36, 130.33, 128.18, 128.14, 113.52, 77.54, 77.22, 76.90,
76.60, 72.36, 69.54, 46.09, 38.39, 37.68, 37.01, 34.09,
31.74, 30.10, 29.92, 29.78, 29.76, 29.56, 29.55, 29.53,
27.47, 27.46, 27.41, 25.84, 24.37, 24.12, 22.79, 14.31, 8.86. Mass calculated for C42H77N3O2 is 656.0; 656.2 found.
Example 17: Synthesis of ester bound lipids
Ester analogs
Scheme 1
Mg
7001
OR
VX /<sup>N</sup>
-40 ° C to rtTHF
7002 .0 LAH / THF
HO.
| HCI edci / dmap / dipea / ch<sub>2</sub>ci<sub>2</sub>
Experimental
Compound 7002: Magnesium (711 mg, 29.25 mmol) was placed
7004
7003
238
<img file="MX338780B_D0259.tif" />
in a round jar. THF (30 mL) and 2-3 mg I were added<sub>2</sub>. The mixture was heated to 50 ° C and oleyl bromide (7001, 6.46 g, 19.50 mmol) was gently added. By adding ~ 1 mL of oleyl bromide, the formation of the Grignard reagent was initiated.
After the addition of the oleiol bromide residue, the Grignard reagent was stirred at room temperature for 60 min, then gently added to a solution of 1,1'carbonyldiimidazole (1.54 g, 9.51 mmol) in THF (100 mL) at -50 ° C. The reaction mixture was kept under stirring at -50 ° C for 30 min and then at room temperature for 60 min. The reaction was quenched with 40 mL NH<sub>4</sub>Saturated aqueous C1 and the mixture was extracted with Et<sub>2</sub>O and H<sub>2</sub>O. The organic layer was dried over MgSO<sub>4</sub>, filtered and concentrated. The crude material was purified by silica gel column chromatography (0-5% Et<sub>2</sub>0 in Hexane) to give compound 7002 (2.70 g, 5.09 mmol, 53%, Rf = 0.48 developed with 5% EtOAc in hexane). Molecular weight for C37H71O (M + H)<sup>+</sup> Cale. 531.55, found
531.5.
Compound 7003: To a solution of compound 7002 (1.36 g, 2.56 mmol) in THF (25 mL), 1 M of lithium aluminum hydride in THF (5.12 mL, 5.12 mmol) was added at 0 ° C. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 hours. The reaction was quenched with Na<sub>2</sub>SW<sub>4</sub> saturated aqueous (20 mL), then extracted with Et<sub>2</sub>O and H<sub>2</sub>O. The organic layer was dried over MgSO<sub>4</sub>, filtered and concentrated. The raw material is
239
<img file="MX338780B_D0260.tif" />
purified by silica gel column chromatography (0-5%
Et<sub>2</sub>O in Hexane) to give compound 7003 (942 mg, 1.77 mmol, 69%, R<sub>F</sub> = 0.26 developed with 5% EtOAc in hexane).
Compound 7004: To a solution of compound 7003 (940 mg, 1.76 mmol) and 4 (dimethylamino) butyric acid hydrochloride (355 mg, 2.12 mmol) in CH<sub>2</sub>C1<sub>2</sub> (15 mL), diisopropylethylamine (0.920 mL, 5.28 mmol), N- (3-dimethylaminopropyl) -N'-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride (406 mg, 2.12 mmol) and DMAP (43 mg, 0.352 mmol) were added. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 14 hours. The reaction mixture was diluted with CH2CI2 (100 mL) and washed with NaHCO<sub>3</sub> ac. saturated. (50 mL). The organic layer was dried over MgSOi, filtered, and concentrated. The crude product was purified by silica gel column chromatography (0-5% MeOH in CH2CI2) to give compound 7004 (817 mg, 1.26 mmol, 72%, R<sub>F</sub> = 0.29 developed with 5% MeOH in CH2CI2). Molecular weight for C4<sub>3</sub>H<sub>84</sub>NO2 (M + H)<sup>+</sup>Calc. 646.65, Found 646.5.
Scheme 4
7016
MeOH / THF, rt
HO7017
Oh
EDCI, DMAP, DIPEA DCM, rt
7018
W _F I
MEXICAN INSTITUTE X '/ hee
OF THE PROPERTY M r. »¿3
INDuJTRiaL ^ ¡¿r
240
Compound 7017: To a stirred solution of ketone 7016 (1.5 g, 2.84 mmol, 1.0 eq.) In methanol and THF (2: 1) solid NaBHi (0.16 g, 4.26 mmol, 1.5 eq.) Was added at 0 ° C in portions and the reaction was continued at room temperature until completion of the reaction. The reaction was quenched with dropwise addition of 2N HCl solution at freezing temperature, the organic solvent was evaporated and redissolved in ethyl acetate, washed with water, brine, the combined organics were dried over MgSOa, concentrated and purified by column chromatography using hexane: ethyl acetate (20%) as gradients to obtain 7017 pure alcohol at 94% (1.42
g) yield. <sup>1</sup>H NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3) δ 5.49 - 5.20 (m, 6H), 3.57 (s, IH), 2.76 (t, J = 6.4, 2H), 2.13 - 1.88 (m,
9H), 1.51 - 1.12 (m, 53H), 0.95 - 0.75 (m, 6H). Mass calculated for C37H70O: 530.5, found 531.5.
Compound 7018: Prepared by similar experimental conditions used for compound 7010, using alcohol 7017 (1.42 g, 2.68 mmol, 1.0 eq.), N, N-dimethylamino butyric acid hydrochloride (0.53 g, 3.21 mmol, 1.2 eq.), DIPEA ( 1.48 mL, 8.0 mmol, 3.0 eq.), EDCI (0.56 g, 2.94 mmol, 1.1 eq.), DMAP (0.065 g, 0.53 mmol, 0.1 eq.) In DCM provided 1.34 g (78%) of the pure product 7018. <sup>1</sup>H NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3) δ 5.47 - 5.20 (m, 8H), 4.92 - 4.77 (m, IH), 2.76 (t, J = 6.3, 2H), 2.28 (dt, J = 16.6, 7.5, 4H) , 2.20 (s, 6H), 2.08 - 1.89 (m, 8H), 1.83 - 1.70 (m, 2H), 1.48 (d, J = 5.2, 4H), 1.38
IMPI
<td></td><td></td><td></td><td> 241</td><td>1 MEXICAN PROPERTY INSTITUTE INDUSTRIAL</td><td></td>
<td>1.16 (m,</td><td>40H),</td><td> 0.91 - 0</td><td>.80 (m, 6H). <sup>13</sup>C</td><td colspan="2">NMR (101 MHz, cdcl<sub>3</sub>) δ</td>
<td> 173.61,</td><td colspan="3"> 130.51, 130.40, 130.35, 130</td><td> .13, 130.05,</td><td> 128.16,</td>
<td> 128.13,</td><td> 77.55</td><td> , 77.23,</td><td> 76.91, 74.46,</td><td> 59.18, 45.68,</td><td> 34.36,</td>
<td> 32.84,</td><td> 32.69,</td><td> 32.13,</td><td> 31.75, 29.99,</td><td> 29.92, 29.89,</td><td> 29.78,</td>
<td> 29.76,</td><td> 29.72,</td><td> 29.67,</td><td> 29.58, 29.54,</td><td> 29.52, 29.40,</td><td> 29.36,</td>
<td> 27.45,</td><td> 27.43,</td><td> 25.84,</td><td> 25.57, 23.39,</td><td> 22.91, 22.80,</td><td> 14.36,</td>
<td> 14.31.</td><td>Mass</td><td>calculated</td><td colspan="3">for C43H81NO2: 643.6, found</td>
<td> 644.5.</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td>
Scheme 5
NaBH.
MeOH / THF. rt
7019
7020 <sup>1</sup> or
Oh
EDCI, DMAP, DIPEA DCM, rt
<img file="MX338780B_D0261.tif" />
7021 by conditions
Compound
7020: Similar experimental preparations used as compound 7017, using ketone 57 (0.75 g, 1.43 mmol, 1.0 eq.) In methanol and
THF (2: 1) NaBH was added<sub>4</sub> solid (0.08 g, 2.14 mmol, 1.5 eq.) in methanol: THF, provided 0.63 g (84%) of the pure alcohol 7020. <sup>X</sup>H NMR (400 MHz, CDC1<sub>3</sub>) δ 5.48 - 5.20 (m, 10H),
3.57 (s, 1H), 2.88 - 2.65 (m, 6H), 2.06 (dq, J = 14.0, 7.1,
8H), 1.50 - 1.18 (m, 35H), 0.96 (t, J = 7.5, 3H), 0.88 (dd, J = 12.8, 6.2, 3H). Mass calculated for C<sub>37</sub>H<sub>6</sub>6O: 526.5, found 527.5.
IMPÍ
MEXICAN INSTITUTE 'nt IA FHOFIÍOAO Ο «« ί (Μ »ί &
IMOUJTF.fAL U *
242
Preparation of compound 7021: Prepared by similar experimental conditions used for compound 7010, using alcohol 7020 (0.62 g, 1.18 mmol, 1.0 eq.), N, N-dimethylamino butyric acid hydrochloride (0.23 g, 1.41 mmol, 1.2 eq. ), DIPEA (0.65 mL, 3.54 mmol, 3.0 eq.), EDCI (0.24 g, 1.3 mmol, 1.1 eq.), DMAP (0.028 g, 0.23 mmol, 0.1 eq.) In DCM provided 0.63 g (84%) of the pure product 7021.
<sup>X</sup>H NMR (400 MHz, CDC1<sub>3</sub>) δ 5.46 - 5.19 (m, 8H), 4.91 - 4.78 (m, IH), 2.85 - 2.68 (m, 6H), 2.29 (dt, J = 15.2, 7.5, 4H), 2.20 (s, 6H), 2.11 - 1.95 (m, 8H), 1.78 (dd, J = 14.8, 7.5, 2H),
1.49 (d, J = 5.5, 4H), 1.40 - 1.17 (m, 32H), 0.96 (t, J =
7.5, 3H), 0.87 (t, J = 6.8, 3H). <sup>13</sup>C NMR (101 MHz, CDC1<sub>3</sub>) δ 168.17, 126.73, 125.15, 124.98, 124.93, 123.06, 123.04,
122.75, 122.72, 122.43, 121.91, 72.13, 71.81, 71.49, 69.04,
53.75, 40.25, 28.95, 27.27, 26.33, 24.47, 24.45, 24.36,
24.33, 24.29, 24.15, 24.10, 22.05, 22.04, 22.00, 20.42,
20.41, 20.32, 20.15, 17.96, 17.38, 15.35, 9.08, 8.88. Mass calculated for C43H77NO2: 639.6, found 640.5.
243
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY
<img file="MX338780B_D0262.tif" />
Scheme 6
<img file="MX338780B_D0263.tif" />
7023
Compound 7023: To a solution of compound 7022 in a mixture of methanol: ethylacetate solvent (2: 1), 10% Pd / C was added, the air was removed in vacuo, purged with argon, the cycle was repeated (2x), finally purged with H<sub>2</sub> and the reaction was continued under H<sub>2</sub> at room temperature overnight. After the completion of the reaction, it was filtered through a small pad of celite, washed with ethyl acetate, the solvent was evaporated and purified by column chromatography using dichloromethane: methanol (5%) as gradients to obtain white solid forms of compound 7023 in 64% (0.64 g) of yields.<sup>1</sup>H NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3) δ 5.37 (s, OH), 4.85 (p, J = 6.2, 1H), 2.29 (dt, J = 14.8, 7.5, 4H),
2.21 (s, 6H), 1.84 - 1.71 (m, 2H), 1.49 (d, J = 5.4, 4H),
1.36 - 1.13 (m, 64H), 0.87 (t, J = 6.8, 6H). <sup>13</sup>C NMR (101 MHz, cdcl<sub>3</sub>) δ 173.58, 77.54, 77.22, 76.91, 74.49, 59.17, 45.64,
34.36, 32.83, 32.70, 32.15, 29.92, 29.88, 29.81, 29.78,
29.58, 25.55, 23.36, 22.91, 14.33. Mass calculated for
C43H87NO2: 649.6, found 650.8.
<img file="MX338780B_D0264.tif" />
244
<img file="MX338780B_D0265.tif" />
Example 18: Synthesis of ester.
Scheme 1: Synthesis series M (esters)
<img file="MX338780B_D0266.tif" />
EDC / DMAP
<img file="MX338780B_D0267.tif" />
<img file="MX338780B_D0268.tif" />
DLin-M-Cl-DMA
DLin-M-Cl-DMA. A solution of dilinolenylmethanol (0.50 g), N, N-dimethylglycine (0.53 g), 4-N, N-dimethylaminopyridine (0.60 g), and l-Ethyl-3- (3dimethylaminopropyl) carbodiimide hydrochloride (0.50 g) in methylene (5 mL) were stirred at room temperature. The reaction was monitored by TLC. When all of the dilinolenylmethanol was converted, the reaction mixture was washed with dilute hydrochloric acid followed by dilute sodium bicarbonate solution. The organic fractions were dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate, filtered, and the solvent was removed. The residue was transmitted to a silica gel column using 0-3% gradient elution methanol / methylene chloride, resulting in DLin-M-ClDMA (0.35 g) as a colorless oil.
<sup>X</sup>HNMR: (CDC1<sub>3</sub>) δ.0.91 (t; J = 6.8Hz; 6H); 2.07 (m; 8H);
2.42 (s; 6H); 2.79 (t; J = 6.5Hz; 4H); 3.21 (s; 2H); 4.97 (m;
IMP
245
INSTITUTO MlZftWO PE LA PROCEDA. ';
<img file="MX338780B_D0269.tif" />
1 HOUR); 5.37 (m; 8H)
DLÍn-M-C4-DMA
<img file="MX338780B_D0270.tif" />
N, N-Dimethyl-5-aminopentanoic acid. Bromovaleric acid (2 g) was dissolved in aqueous dimethylamine solution and stirred at room temperature overnight. The solvent was removed on a rotary evaporator and the residue was treated with an aqueous solution containing one equivalent of sodium bicarbonate. The solvent was removed, the residue was suspended in ethanol and filtered. The solvent was removed from the filtrate and the residue was suspended in methylene chloride and suspended again. After filtration, removal of the solvent from the filtrate resulted in an oil (1.3 g) that crystallized smoothly on storage.
DLin-M-C4-DMA; as described for DLin-M-Cl-DMA using N, N-dimethyl-5-aminopentanoic acid.
<sup>X</sup>HNMR: (CDC1<sub>3</sub>) δ. 0.91 (t; J = 6.9Hz; 6H); 1.67 (m; 2H);
2.07 (m; 8H); 2.32 (s; 6H); 2.37 (m; 4H); 2.79 (t; J = 6.5Hz;
4H); 4.88 (m; 1H); 5.37 (m; 8H)
DLin-M-C5-DMA
246
<img file="MX338780B_D0271.tif" />
<img file="MX338780B_D0272.tif" />
N, N-dimethyl-6-aminobutanoic acid; as described for N, N-dimethyl-5-aminopentanoic acid using 6bromobutanoic acid.
DLin-M-C5-DMA; as described for DLin-M-Cl-DMA using N, N-dimethyl-6-aminobutanoic acid.
<sup>1</sup>HNMR: (CDC1<sub>3</sub>) δ.0.91 (t; J = 6.9Hz; 6H); 1.66 (m); 2.07 (m; 8H); 2.31 (t; J = 7.5Hz; 2H); 2.39 (s; 6H); 2.47 (bm; 2H);
4.88 (m; IH); 5.37 (m; 8H)
DLen-K5-C2-DMA
Len-Br. A solution of linolenyl mesylate (2.2 g) and lithium bromide (2.5 g) in acetone (25 mL) was stirred at room temperature overnight. Methylene chloride was added and the solution was washed twice with water. The organic fractions were dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate, filtered, and the solvent was removed. The residue was transmitted to a silica gel column using 0-2% gradient ethyl acetate / hexane elution, resulting in Len-Br (2.1 g) as a colorless oil.
<img file="MX338780B_D0273.tif" />
DLen-M-format. A solution of Len-Br (2.1 g) in anhydrous diethyl ether (60 mL) was treated with magnesium filings (180 mg) at reflux overnight. The solution was allowed to cool and ethyl format (0.5 mL) was added dropwise. The reaction was stirred at room temperature for three hours. Aqueous sulfuric acid (5%, 40 mL) was added and the solution was extracted with diethyl ether. The organic fraction was washed with saline, dried with anhydrous magnesium sulfate, filtered, and the solvent was removed. The residue was transmitted to a silica gel column using 0-3% gradient ethyl acetate / hexane elution, resulting in DLen-M format as a colorless oil.
DLen-M. The crude DLen-M-format prepared above was treated with 5% sodium hydroxide solution in water / ethanol (10 mL, 10:90 v / v) for 30 minutes. The solution was diluted with water and extracted with methylene chloride. The organic fractions were dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate, filtered, and the solvent was removed. The residue was transmitted to a silica gel column using 0-10% gradient elution methanol / methylene chloride, resulting in
DLen-M as a colorless oil.
DLen-ketone. A solution of DLEN-M (prepared above) in methylene chloride (20 mL) was treated with pyridinium chlorochromate (1 g) at room temperature for two hours. Diethyl ether (50 mL) was added and the
<img file="MX338780B_D0274.tif" />
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY
248 Resulting suspension was washed through a pad of silica gel (2x). Solvent was removed and the residue was transferred to a silica gel column using 0-2% ethyl acetate / hexane gradient, resulting in DLencetone (0.57 g) as a colorless oil.
DLen-K5-C2-OH. A solution of DLen-ketone (0.57 g), pyridinium ptoluenesulfonate (0.10 g) and butan-1,2,4-triol (0.50 g) in toluene (100 mL) was refluxed in a Dean & Stark apparatus during the night. The reaction mixture was partitioned between methylene chloride and brine. The organic fractions were dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate, filtered, and the solvent was removed. The residue was transmitted to a silica gel column using methylene chloride, resulting in DLen-K5-C2-OH (0.52 g) as a colorless oil.
Procedure 09-028 (April 17, 2009): DLen-K5-C2OMs. A solution of DLen-K5-C2-OH (0.52 g) in methylene chloride (20 mL) was treated with anhydrous methanesulfonyl (0.40 g) and triethylamine (0.7 mL) at room temperature overnight. The organic fraction was washed with saline, dried with anhydrous magnesium sulfate, filtered, and the solvent was removed. The residue was used in subsequent reactions without further purification.
DLen-K5-C2-DMA A solution of crude DLen-K5-C2-OMs in
2.0 M dimethylamine in THF (15 mL) was stirred at temperature
<img file="MX338780B_D0275.tif" />
249
<img file="MX338780B_D0276.tif" />
environment for two days. Solvent was removed on a rotary evaporator and the residue was transmitted to silica gel using 0-6% gradient methanol / methylene chloride, resulting in DLen-K5-C2-DMA (0.34 g) as a colorless oil.
<td><sup>X</sup>HNMR</td><td>: (CDC1<sub>3</sub>) δ.0.95 (t; J = 7.5Hz; 6H); 1.56 (m;</td><td>4H); 1.70</td><td>(m;</td>
<td>1 HOUR) ;</td><td>1.81 (m; 1H); 2.05 (m; 8H); 2.27 (s; 6H);</td><td>2.36 (m;</td><td>1 HOUR) ;</td>
<td> 2.46</td><td>(m; 1H); 2.79 (t; J = 6.0Hz; 8H); 3.27 (t;</td><td>J = 7.2Hz;</td><td>1 HOUR) ;</td>
<td> 4.06</td><td>(m; 2H); 5.34 (m; 12H)</td><td></td><td></td>
DO-K5-C2-DMA
C-Br; as described for Len-Br using oleyl mesylate.
DO-M-format; as described for DLen-M-format using O-Br.
SUN; as described for DLen-M using DO-Mformat.
DO-ketone; as described for DLen-ketone using
SUN.
DO-K5-C2-OH; as described for DLen-K5-C2-OH using DO-ketone.
DO-K5-C2-OMs; as described for DLen-K5-C2-OMs
250
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY!
<img file="MX338780B_D0277.tif" />
using DO-K5-C2-OH.
<td></td><td>DO-K5-C2-DMA;</td><td>as described for</td><td colspan="2">DLen-K5-C2-DMA</td>
<td colspan="2">using DO-K5-C2-OMs</td><td> •</td><td></td><td></td>
<td></td><td><sup>X</sup>HNMR: (CDC1<sub>3</sub>)</td><td>δ.0.86 (t; J = 6.8Hz; 6H);</td><td>1.55 (m;</td><td>4H);</td>
<td> 1.64</td><td>(m; 1H); 1.79</td><td>(ddd; J = 12.6Hz, J '= 11.2Hz,</td><td>J = 6.2Hz;</td><td>1 HOUR) ;</td>
<td> 1.99</td><td>(m; 8H); 2.20</td><td>(s; 6H); 2.2 6 (ddd; J = 12</td><td>.2Hz, J '= 9.</td><td>5Hz;</td>
<td>J = 5.</td><td>9Hz; 1 HOUR) ; 2.38</td><td>(ddd; J = 11.9Hz, J '= 9.7Hz,</td><td>J = 5.6Hz;</td><td>1 HOUR) ;</td>
<td> 3.46</td><td colspan="2">(t; J = 7.3Hz; 1H); 4.05 (m; 2H); 5.32 (m;</td><td>4H)</td><td></td>
DLin-M-C3-A
<img file="MX338780B_D0278.tif" />
Procedure 09-071 (July 14, 2009): DLin-M-C3-A. A solution of dilinolenylmethanol (0.51 g), N-BOC-4aminobutyric acid (0.53 g), 4-N, N-dimethylaminopyridine (0.39 g), and l-Ethyl-3- (3-dimethylaminopropyl) carbodiimide hydrochloride (0.30 g) in methylene chloride (5 mL) were stirred at room temperature overnight. The reaction mixture was washed with dilute hydrochloric acid. The organic fractions were dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate, filtered, and the solvent was removed. The residue was treated with trifluoroacetic acid (2 mL) at room temperature for one hour. The solution was diluted with methylene chloride, washed with water, and then washed with sodium bicarbonate
<img file="MX338780B_D0279.tif" />
251
<img file="MX338780B_D0280.tif" />
aqueous. The organic fractions were dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate, filtered, and the solvent was removed. The residue was transmitted to a silica gel column using 0-10% gradient elution methanol / methylene chloride, resulting in DLin-M-C3-A (0.45 g) as a colorless oil.
<sup>X</sup>HNMR: (CDC1<sub>3</sub>) δ.0.87 (t; J = 6.8Hz; 6H); 1.75 (p; J = 7.3Hz; 2H); 2.03 (m; 8H); 2.32 (t; J = 7.4Hz; 2H); 2.75 (m; 6H); 4.84 (p; J = 6.2Hz; 1H); 5.35 (m; 8H)
DLin-M-C3-MA
DLin-M-C3-Br. A solution of dilinolenylmethanol (0.5 g) in methylene chloride (20 mL) was treated with 4bromobutyryl chloride (0.40 g) and triethylamine (1 mL) with stirring at room temperature overnight. The reaction mixture was diluted with water, acidified with hydrochloric acid, and extracted with methylene chloride. The organic fractions were dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate, filtered, and the solvent was removed. Crude DLin-M-C3-Br was used in subsequent reactions without further purification.
Procedure 09-061 (June 16, 2009): DLin-M-C3MA. A solution of DLin-M-C3-Br (0.51 g) was treated with a solution of methylamine in THF / methylene chloride (50 mL;
252
<img file="MX338780B_D0281.tif" />
INDUSTRIAL
20/30 v / v) at room temperature. The reaction was monitored by TLC. When the reaction was complete the solvent was removed on a rotary evaporator. The residue was partitioned between methylene chloride and dilute hydrochloric acid. The organic phase was washed with dilute aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution, dried with anhydrous magnesium sulfate, filtered, and the solvent was removed. The residue was transmitted to a silica gel column using 0-4% gradient elution methanol / methylene chloride, resulting in DLin-M-C3MA (0.31 g) as a colorless oil.
<sup>1</sup>HNMR: (CDC1<sub>3</sub>) δ. 0.87 (t; J = 6.9Hz; 6H); 1.82 (m; 2H);
<td> 2.03</td><td>(m;</td><td>8H); 2.33</td><td>(t; J = 7.4Hz; 2H);</td><td> 2.43</td><td>(s; 3H); 2.62</td><td>(t;</td>
<td>J = 7.</td><td>1Hz;</td><td>2H); 2.75</td><td>(t; J = 6.4Hz; 4H);</td><td> 4.84</td><td>(p; J = 6.3Hz;</td><td>IH);</td>
<td> 5.35</td><td>(m;</td><td>8H)</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td>
<img file="MX338780B_D0282.tif" />
DLin-M-C3-EA; as described for DLin-M-C3-MA using ethylamine.
<td></td><td><sup>1</sup>HNMR:</td><td>(CDCI3) δ.0.87 (t; J = 6.</td><td>8Hz;</td><td>6H); 1.10 (t;</td><td>J = 7.</td><td>1Hz;</td>
<td>3H);</td><td> 1.82</td><td>(p; J = 7.3Hz; 2H); 2.03</td><td>(m;</td><td>8H); 2.33 (t;</td><td>J = 7.</td><td>4Hz;</td>
<td>2H);</td><td> 2.65</td><td>(q; J = 7.0Hz; 4H); 2.62</td><td>(t;</td><td>J = 7.lHz; 2H);</td><td> 2.75</td><td>(t;</td>
J = 6.4Hz; 4H); 4.84 (p; J = 6.3Hz; IH); 5.33 (m; 8H)
253
<img file="MX338780B_D0283.tif" />
IMPI <sup>, NST,</sup>7 MEXICAN OWNER of industrial PROPERTY
<img file="MX338780B_D0284.tif" />
<img file="MX338780B_D0285.tif" />
DLin-M-C3-IPA
<img file="MX338780B_D0286.tif" />
DLin-M-C3-IPA; as described for DLin-M-C3-MA using isopropylamine.
<td></td><td colspan="2"><sup>1</sup>HNMR: (CDC1<sub>3</sub>) δ.0.87 (t; J = 6.8Hz; 6H); 1.03 (d; J = 6.2Hz;</td>
<td>6H);</td><td> 1.78</td><td>(p; J = 7.3Hz; 2H); 2.03 (m; 8H); 2.32 (t; J = 7.4Hz;</td>
<td>2H);</td><td> 2.60</td><td>(t; J = 7.3Hz; 2H); 2.77 (m; 5H); 4.84 (p; J = 6.2Hz;</td>
1 HOUR); 5.34 (m; 8H)
DLin-M-C3-DEA (ED50 = 0.3)
-------- = \ / = ν- \ ζ \
DLin-M-C3-DEA; as described for DLin-M-C3-MA using diethylamine.
DLin-M-C3-DIPA (ED50 = 4.5)
<img file="MX338780B_D0287.tif" />
DLin-M-C3-DIPA; as described for DLin-M-C3-MA using diisopropylamine.
254
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF LA'ROPN.DaU
INDUSTRIAL
DLin-M-C3-MIPA
<img file="MX338780B_D0288.tif" />
DLin-M-C3-MIPA; as described for DLin-M-C3-MA using methylisopropylamine.
DLin-M-C3-EIPA
<img file="MX338780B_D0289.tif" />
DLin-M-C3-EIPA; as described for DLin-M-C3-MA using ethylisopropylamine.
<sup>X</sup>HNMR: (CDC1<sub>3</sub>) δ.0.87 (t; J = 6.8Hz; 6H); 0.94 (d; J = 6.2Hz; 15 6H); 0.99 (t; J = 7.1Hz; 3H); 1.71 (m; 2H); 2.03 (m; 8H); 2.30 (t; J = 7.3Hz; 2H); 2.37 (m; 2H); 2.43 (q; J = 7.1Hz; 2H); 2.75 (t; J = 6.4Hz; 4H); 2.90 (m; 1H); 4.84 (m; 1H); 5.34 (m; 8H)
DLin-M-C3-MEA
<img file="MX338780B_D0290.tif" />
DLin-M-C3-MEA; as described for DLin-M-C3-MA using methylethylamine.
<img file="MX338780B_D0291.tif" />
255
ΙΜΡΪ
Mexican INSTITUTE OF LA l'ROr'lLbz-.O
<td><sup>X</sup>HNMR: (CDCls) δ.</td><td>0.87 (t; J = 6.9Hz; 6H)</td><td>; 1-02 (t;</td><td>J = 7</td><td>.2Hz; 3H);</td>
<td>1.77 (m; 2H); 2.</td><td>03 (m; 8H); 2.19 (s;</td><td>3H); 2.30</td><td>(m;</td><td>4H); 2.39</td>
<td>(q; J = 7.2Hz; 2H)</td><td>; 2.75 (t; J = 6.5Hz;</td><td>4H); 4.84</td><td>(m;</td><td>1 HOUR); 5.34</td>
(m; 8H)
Example 19: Synthesis of 2,2-Dilinoleyl-5-dimethylaminomethyl [1,3] -dioxane (DLin-K6S-Cl-DMA)
LiBr
Acetone
l.Mg, ether II
2. Ethyl formate
KOH
X ^ vA-XXXXX = XX = XXX \ X
------------ OHCO
IV
III
Pyridinium chlorochromate
0 ^ \ / ----------------------- Toluene
Tso-py
CH (CH<sub>2</sub>CH<sub>2</sub>OH)<sub>3</sub>
Ζ-θΖ ^ ΧχχΧχΧχ ^ = χχ = χ ^ χ ^^
VI (CH<sub>3</sub>SW<sub>2</sub>)<sub>2</sub>OR
Et<sub>3</sub>N
Dimethylamine ^ θΑχζ ^ ΑΧ ^ ζ ^ χ == χχ = χ ^ χχχ \
DLin-K6S-Cl-DMA
VII
one. Synthesis of Linoleyl (II) Bromide
A mixture of linoleyl methane sulfonate (26.6g, 77.2mmol) and lithium bromide (30.5g, 350mmol) in acetone (350mL) was stirred under nitrogen for two days. The resulting suspension was filtered and the solid was washed with acetone. The filtrate and wash were combined and the solvent was evaporated.
<img file="MX338780B_D0292.tif" />
256
<img file="MX338780B_D0293.tif" />
The resulting residue was treated with water (300 mL). The aqueous phase was extracted with ether (3x150 mL). The combined ether phase was washed with water (200 mL), brine (200 mL), and then dried over Na<sub>2</sub>SW<sub>4</sub> anhydrous. The solvent was evaporated to provide 29.8g of yellowish oil. The crude product was purified by chromatography on silica gel columns (230-400 mesh, 700 mL) eluted with hexanes. This provided
20.8 g (82%) of linoleyl (II) bromide.
2. Dilinoleylmethyl (III) Format Synthesis
To a suspension of Mg filings (1.64g, 67.4 mmol) with a crystal of iodine in 500 mL of anhydrous ether in nitrogen was added to a solution of linoleyl bromide (II, 18.5g, 56.1 mmol) in 250 mL of ether anhydrous at room temperature. The resulting mixture was refluxed under nitrogen overnight. The mixture was cooled to room temperature. Ethyl format (4.24g, 57.2 mmol) was added dropwise to the hazy nitrogen mixture. After addition, the mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. The mixture was treated with 10% aqueous H solution<sub>2</sub>SW<sub>4</sub> (250 mL). The ether phase was separated and the aqueous phase was extracted with ether (150 mL). The combined organic phase was washed with water (400 mL), brine (300 mL), and then dried over Na<sub>2</sub>SW<sub>4</sub> anhydrous. Evaporation of the solvent provided 17.8 g of a yellowish acid as the crude product (III). The raw product is
<img file="MX338780B_D0294.tif" />
<img file="MX338780B_D0295.tif" />
257 used directly additional.
in the next step
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF PROPERTY
INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX338780B_D0296.tif" />
no purification
3. Synthesis of Dilinoleyl methanol (IV)
The above crude dilinoleylmethyl format (III, 17.8g, 0.71mmol) and KOH (3.75g) were stirred in 85% EtOH at room temperature under nitrogen overnight. After completing the reaction, most of the solvent was evaporated. The resulting mixture was treated with 150 mL of 5% HCI solution.
The aqueous phase was extracted with ether (2x150 mL). The combined ether extract was washed with water (2 x 100 mL), brine (100 mL), and then dried over Na2SO<sub>4</sub> anhydrous. Evaporation of the solvent provided 20.0 g of dilinoleyl methanol (IV) as a yellowish oil. The crude product was purified by column chromatography on silica gel (230-400 mesh, 700 mL) eluted with 0-5% gradient ethyl acetate in hexanes. This provided 9.6 g of dilinoleyl methanol (IV).
Four. Synthesis of dilinoleyl ketone (V)
To a mixture of dilinoleyl methanol (4.0g, 7.2 mmol) and anhydrous potassium carbonate (0.4g) in 100 mL of CH<sub>2</sub>C1<sub>2</sub> added to pyridinium chlorochromate (PCC, 4.0g, 19 mmol).
The resulting suspension was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours. Then ether (300 mL) was added into the mixture and the resulting brown suspension was filtered through a \ s & P · '2-' ·
MEXICAN INSTITUTE '
PROPERTY 3 ^ 3323
INDUSTRIAL
258
ΙΜΡΙ pad of silica gel (150 mL). The silica gel pad was then washed with ether (3 x 75 mL). The ether filtrate and the washes were combined. Solvent evaporation provided 5.1 g of an oily residue as a crude product. The crude product was purified by column chromatography on silica gel (230-400 mesh, 200 mL) eluted with 0-4% ethyl acetate in hexanes. This provided 3.0 g (79%) of dilinoleyl ketone (V).
5. Synthesis of 2,2-dilinoleyl-5-hydroxymethyl) - [1,3] dioxane (VI)
A mixture of dilinoleyl ketone (V, 1.05 g, 2.0 mmol), 2-hydroxymethyl-l, 3-propanediol (490 mg, 4.2 mmol) and pyridinium ptoluenesulfonate (100 mg) in 150 mL of toluene was refluxed in argon overnight with a Dean-Stark tube to remove water. The resulting mixture was cooled to room temperature. The organic phase was washed with water (2 x 100 mL), brine (100 mL) and then dried in Na2SO<sub>4 </sub>anhydrous. Evaporation of the solvent resulted in a pale oil (1.2 g). The crude product was purified by chromatography on silica gel columns (230-400 mesh, 100 mL) with 0-5% gradient of methanol in dichloromethane as eluent. This provided 0.93 g of pure VI as a pale oil.
<img file="MX338780B_D0297.tif" />
259
IMPI ^ instituto mexicana oelafrotiehao industrial '.pp'ssr
6. Synthesis of 2,2-Dilinoleyl-5-methanesulfonylmethyl [1,3] -dioxane (VII)
To a solution of 2,2-dilinoleyl-5-hydroxymethyl) - [1,3] dioxane (VI, 0.93 g, 1.5 mmol) and dry triethylamine (290 mg, 2.9 mmol) in 50 mL of anhydrous CH2CI2 was added methanesulfonyl anhydride (400 mg, 2.3 mmol) in nitrogen. The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight.
The organic phase was washed with water (2 x 75 mL), brine (75 mL) and then dried in Na<sub>2</sub>SW<sub>4</sub> anhydrous. The solvent was evaporated to provide 1.0 g of pale oil. The crude product was used in the next step without further purification.
7. Synthesis of 2,2-Dilinoleyl-5-dimethylaminomethyl- [1,3] dioxane (DLin-K6S-Cl-DMA)
To the above crude material (VII, 1.0 g) in nitrogen, 20 mL of dimethylamine in THF (2.0 M) was added. The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature for 7 mins. An oily residue was obtained after evaporation of the solvent. Column chromatography on silica gel (230-400 mesh, 100 mL) with 0-3% methanol gradient in chloroform as eluent resulted in 150 mg of DLin-K6S-Cl-DMA product as a pale oil.<sup>1</sup>H NMR (400 MHz, CDC1<sub>3</sub>) δ: 5.24-5.51 (8, m, 4x CH = CH), 4.04 (2H, dd, 2 x OCH)), 3.75 (2H, dd OCH), 2.72.9 (2H, br, NCH<sub>2</sub>), 2.78 (4H, t, 2 x C = C-CH<sub>2</sub>-C = C), 2.57 (6H, s, 2 x NCH<sub>3</sub>), 1.95-2.17 (9H, q, 4 x CH<sub>2</sub> allylic and CH), 1.67-
<img file="MX338780B_D0298.tif" />
260
<img file="MX338780B_D0299.tif" />
IMPI
<img file="MX338780B_D0300.tif" />
<img file="MX338780B_D0301.tif" />
1.95 (2Η, m, CH<sub>2</sub>), 1.54-1.65 (4H, m, 2 x CH<sub>2</sub>), 1.22-1.45 (32H,
m), 0.90 (6H, t, 2 x CH<sub>3</sub>) ppm.
Example 20: Synthesis of 2,2-Dilinoleyl-5-dimethylaminobutyl [1,3] -dioxane (DLin-K6S-C4-DMA)
This compound was synthesized as a pale oil in a manner similar to that of Example 19 where 2-hydroxymethyl 1,3-propanediol was replaced by 2-hydroxybutyl-1,3-propanediol. <sup>1</sup>H NMR (400 MHz, CDC1<sub>3</sub>) δ: 5.24-5.45 (8, m, 4x CH = CH), 3.79 (2H, dd, 2 x OCH)), 3.50 (2H, dd OCH), 2.76 (4H, t, 2 x C = C-CH<sub>2</sub>-C = C), 2.37 (2H, t, NCH<sub>2</sub>), 2.31 (6H, s, 2 x NCH<sub>3</sub>), 2.04 (8H, q, 4 x CH<sub>2</sub> allyl), 1.63-1.90 (3H, m,), 1.45-1.62 (4H, m, 2 x CH<sub>2</sub>), 1.22-1.45 (36H, m), 0.90 (6H, t, x CH<sub>3</sub>) ppm.
Example 21: Synthesis of 2,2-Dilinoleyl-5-dimethylaminoethyl [1,3] -dioxane (DLin-K6S-C2-DMA)
This compound was synthesized as a pale oil in a manner similar to that of Example 19 where 2-hydroxymethyl 1,3-propanediol was replaced with 2-hydroxyethyl-1,3261
IMPI • MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY
<img file="MX338780B_D0302.tif" />
propanediol. <sup>1</sup>H NMR (400 MHz, CDC1<sub>3</sub>) δ: 5.25-5.45 (8, m, 4x CH = CH), 3.87 (2H, dd, 2 x OCH)), 3.55 (2H, dd OCH), 2.75 (4H, t, 2 x C = C-CH<sub>2</sub>-C = C), 2.45-2.60 (2H, br, NCH<sub>2</sub>), 2.40 (6H, s, 2 x NCH<sub>3</sub>), 2.03 (8H, q, 4 x CH<sub>2</sub> allyl), 1.73-1.86 (1H, m), 1.56-1.72 (6H, m, 2 x CH<sub>2</sub>), 1.22-1.45 (32H, m), 0.90 (6H, t, x CH<sub>3</sub>) ppm.
Example 22: Synthesis of 2,2-dilinoleyl-4- (2-dimethylaminoethyl) - [1,3] -dioxane (DLin-K6A-C2-DMA)
O OH O
I
LÍA1H4
<img file="MX338780B_D0303.tif" />
Toluene
<img file="MX338780B_D0304.tif" />
one. Synthesis of 1,3,5-pentanotriol (II)
Diethyl 3-hydroxyglutarate (I, 1.0 was added dropwise
<td>g, 4.9 mmol)</td><td>in THF</td><td>anhydrous</td><td> (10</td><td>mL) a</td><td>a</td><td>suspension</td><td>of</td>
<td>LÍAIH4 in THF</td><td>anhydrous</td><td>(110 mL)</td><td>in</td><td colspan="2">nitrogen</td><td>with a bath</td><td>of</td>
<td colspan="2">cold water. Behind the</td><td>addition,</td><td>the</td><td>bathroom</td><td>I know</td><td>removed and</td><td>the</td>
suspension was stirred at room temperature for 2 days. The
262
ΙΜΡΡ ~
MEXICAN INSTITUTE Γζ *
OF INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY
<img file="MX338780B_D0305.tif" />
Resulting mixture was quenched by adding 13 mL of brine very slowly with an ice-water bath. A white suspension resulted and the mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. The solid was filtered and washed with THF. The filtrate and wash were combined and the solvent was evaporated to provide 0.70 g of pale oil. Column chromatography of the crude product (230-400 mesh S1O2, 100 mL, 0-12% methanol in chloroform gradient) provided 0.54 g of II as a colorless oil.
2. Synthesis of 2,2-dilinoleyl-4- (2-hydroxyethyl) - [1,3] dioxane (IV)
A mixture of dilinoleyl ketone (III, 0.80g, 1.5mmol), 1,3,5-pentanotriol (II, 0.54g, 4.5mmol) and pyridinium ptoluenesulfonate (60mg) in 150mL of toluene was refluxed in nitrogen overnight with a Dean-Stark tube to remove water. The resulting mixture was cooled to room temperature. The organic phase was washed with water (2 x 75 mL), brine (75 mL) and then dried in Na2SC> 4 anhydrous. Evaporation of the solvent resulted in a pale oil (1.1 g). The crude product was purified by chromatography on silica gel columns (230-400 mesh, 75 mL) with 0-3% gradient of methanol in dichloromethane as eluent. This provided 0.75 g (79%) of pure IV as a colorless oil.
IMPI
263
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF PROPERTY
INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX338780B_D0306.tif" />
3. Synthesis of 2,2-dilinoleyl-4- (2-methanesulfonylethyl) [1,3] -dioxane (V)
To a solution of 2,2-dilinoleyl-4- (2-hydroxyethyl) [1, 3] -dioxane (IV, 0.75 g, 1.2 mmol) and dry triethylamine (0.58 g, 5.7 mmol) in 40 mL of CH2CI2 Anhydrous methanesulfonyl anhydride (0.50 g, 2.9 mmol) in nitrogen was added. The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. The organic phase was washed with water (2 x 50 mL), brine (50 mL) and then dried in Na<sub>2</sub>SW<sub>4</sub> anhydrous. The solvent was evaporated to provide 0.80 g of pale oil as a crude product. The crude product was used in the next step without further purification.
Four. Synthesis of 2,2-dilinoleyl-4- (2-dimethylaminoethyl) - [1,3] dioxane (DLin-K6A-C2-DMA)
To the above crude material (V, 0.80 g) in nitrogen, 15 mL of dimethylamine in THF (2.0 M) was added. The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature for 6 min. The solid was filtered. An oily residue was obtained after evaporation of the solvent. Column chromatography on silica gel (230-400 mesh, 100 mL) with 0-6% gradient of methanol in dichloromethane as eluent resulted in 0.70 g of the product DLin-K6A-C2-DMA as a pale oil.<sup>1</sup>H NMR (400 MHz, CDC1<sub>3</sub>) δ: 5.28-5.45 (8m, 4x CH = CH), 3.85-4.0 (2H, m, 2 x OCH), 3.78 (IH, dd, OCH), 2.78 (4H, t, 2 x C = C264
IMPI
INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX338780B_D0307.tif" />
CH<sub>2</sub>-C = C), 2.55-2.90 (2H, br, NCH<sub>2</sub>), 2.47 (6H, s, 2 x NCH<sub>3</sub>) ,
2.05 (8H, q, 4 x CH<sub>2</sub> allyl), 1.65-1.90 (4H, m, CH<sub>2</sub>), 1,471.65 (4H, m, CH<sub>2</sub>), 1.1-1.65 (36H, m), 0.90 (6H, t, 2 x CH<sub>3</sub>) ppm.
Example 23: Synthesis of 2,2-dilinoleyl-4- (3dimethylaminopropyl) - [1,3] -dioxane (DLin-K6A-C3-DMA)
III l¡aih<sub>4</sub>
<img file="MX338780B_D0308.tif" />
----------------
<img file="MX338780B_D0309.tif" />
<img file="MX338780B_D0310.tif" />
DLin-K6A-C3-DMA
<img file="MX338780B_D0311.tif" />
Dimethylamide
one. Synthesis of 1,3,6-hexanotriol (II)
Diethyl β-ketoadipate (I, 1.86 g, 8.6 mmol) was added dropwise to a suspension of LiAlH<sub>4</sub> in anhydrous THF (90 mL) in argon with an ice-water bath. After addition, the bath was removed and the suspension was stirred at room temperature for 2 days. The resulting mixture was quenched by adding 10 mL of brine very slowly with an ice-water bath. It resulted in a white suspension and the
<img file="MX338780B_D0312.tif" />
The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. The solid was filtered and washed with THF followed by EtOH (2 x 50 mL). The filtrate and wash were combined and the solvent was evaporated to provide 0.90 g of pale oil. Column chromatography of the crude product (230-400 SiO mesh<sub>2</sub>, 100 mL, 0-10% gradient methanol in dichloromethane) provided 0.70 g of II as a colorless oil.
2. Synthesis of 2,2-dilinoleyl-4- (3-hydroxypropyl) - [1,3] dioxane (IV)
A mixture of dilinoleyl ketone (III, 1.80g, 3.4mmol), 1,3,6-hexanotriol (II, 0.50g, 3.7mmol) and pyridinium ptoluenesulfonate (100mg) in 120mL of toluene was refluxed in nitrogen for 3 hours with a Dean-Stark tube to remove the water. The resulting mixture was cooled to room temperature. The organic phase was washed with water (2 x 50 mL), brine (50 mL) and then dried in Na<sub>2</sub>SW<sub>4 </sub>anhydrous. Evaporation of the solvent resulted in a pale oil (2.0 g). The crude product was purified by chromatography on silica gel columns (230-400 mesh, 50 mL) with 0-3% gradient of methanol in dichloromethane as eluent. This provided 0.90 g (41%) of pure IV as a colorless oil.
3. Synthesis of 2,2-dilinoleyl-4- (3-methanesulfonylpropyl) [1,3] -dioxane (V)
266
IMPI
INSTITUTO MEXICANO OE LA ΡΚΰ? ΙΤΟΛΟ INTUSTP.IAL
<img file="MX338780B_D0313.tif" />
To a solution of 2,2-dilinoleyl-4- (3-hydroxypropyl) [1,3] -dioxane (IV, 0.97 g, 1.5 mmol) and dry triethylamine (0.44 g, 4.3 mmol) in 60 mL of CH2CI2 Anhydrous methanesulfonyl anhydride (0.60 g, 3.5 mmol) in argon was added. The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. The organic phase was washed with water (2 x 30 mL), brine (30 mL), and dried over anhydrous MgSO4. The solvent was evaporated to provide 1.1 g of pale oil as a crude product. The crude product was used in the next step without further purification.
Four. Synthesis of 2,2-dilinoleyl-4- (3-dimethylaminopropyl) [1,3] -dioxane (DLin-K6A-C3-DMA)
To the above crude material (V, 1.1 g) in argon, mL of dimethylamine in THF (2.0 M) was added. The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature for 5 min. The solid was filtered. An oily residue was obtained after evaporation of the solvent. Column chromatography on silica gel (230-400 mesh, 40 mL) with 0-7% methanol in dichloromethane gradient as eluent resulted in 0.85 g of DLin-K6A-C3-DMA product as a pale oil.<sup>1</sup>H NMR (400
<td>MHz, CDCI3)</td><td>1 δ: 5</td><td> .25-5</td><td> .45</td><td>(8, m, 4 x CH = CH),</td><td> 3.7-4.0</td><td>(3H, m, 3</td>
<td>x OCH),</td><td> 2.77</td><td>(4H,</td><td>t,</td><td>2 x C = C-CH<sub>2</sub>-C = C),</td><td> 2.5-2.8</td><td>(2H, br,</td>
<td>NCH<sub>2</sub>), 2.5</td><td>(6H,</td><td>s, 2</td><td>X</td><td>NCH<sub>3</sub>), 2.05 (8H, q,</td><td>4 x CH<sub>2</sub></td><td>allylic),</td>
1.65-1.90 (4H, m, 2 x CH<sub>2</sub>), 1.40-1.65 (4H, m, 2 x CH<sub>2</sub>) , 1.1267
MP
JST! LUTO MEXICANO US THE PROPERTY
INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX338780B_D0314.tif" />
1.65 (38H, m), 0.90 (6H, t, 2 x CH<sub>3</sub>) ppm.
Example 24: Synthesis of 2,2-Diaraquidonyl-4- (2dimethylaminoethyl) - [1,3] -dioxalane (DAra-K5-C2 - DMA) bear<sub>2</sub>ch<sub>3</sub>
MgBr<sub>2</sub> , Br
<img file="MX338780B_D0315.tif" />
H<sub>3</sub>CO<sub>2</sub>SW<sub>v</sub> vn
Dimethylamine
<img file="MX338780B_D0316.tif" />
DAra-K5-C2-DMA
one. Synthesis of Araquidonyl Bromide (II)
A mixture of arachidonyl methane sulfonate (1.0 g,
2.7 mmol) and magnesium bromide (2.2 g, 12 mmol) in anhydrous ether (40 mL) were stirred under argon for two days. The resulting suspension was filtered and the solid was washed with ether (2x10) mL). The filtrate and wash were combined and the solvent was evaporated. The resulting residue was treated with
IMPI
Ά
268 hexanes (50 mL). The solid was filtered and the solvent was evaporated, resulting in an oily residue. The crude product was purified by chromatography on silica gel columns (230-400 mesh, 30 mL) eluted with hexanes. This provided 1 g of arachidonyl (II) bromide as a colorless oil.
MEXICAN INSTITUTE f <OF INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY
2. Synthesis of Diarachidonylmethyl (III) Format
To a solution of arachidonyl bromide (II, 1 g, 3 mmol) in anhydrous ether (30 mL) was added Mg filings (78 mg, 3.2 mmol) followed by a crystal of iodine. The resulting mixture was refluxed under nitrogen for 10 hours. The mixture was cooled to room temperature. Ethyl format (0.25 mL) was added to the hazy nitrogen mixture and the resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. 2 0 mL of 10% aqueous H2SO4 solution was added to the reaction. The ether phase was separated and the aqueous phase was extracted with ether (30 mL). The combined organic phase was washed with water (2 x 25 mL), brine (25 mL), and then dried over Na2SO<sub>4</sub> anhydrous. Evaporation of the solvent provided 1.1 g of a pale acid as the crude product (III). The crude product was purified by chromatography on silica gel columns (230-400 mesh, 40 mL) eluted with
0-3% gradient of ethyl acetate in hexanes. This provided 0.43 g (40%) of diaraquidonylmethyl (III) format as a pale oil.
269
MÍXICANO INSTITUTE I heard the RRDHÍDAD
INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX338780B_D0317.tif" />
3. Synthesis of diaraquidonyl methanol (IV)
The above diaraquidonylmethyl format (III, 0.43 g, 0.71 mmol) and KOH (100 mg) were stirred in 95% EtOH (20 mL) at room temperature under nitrogen overnight. After completing the reaction, most of the solvent was evaporated. The resulting mixture was treated with 20 mL of 2M HCI solution. The aqueous phase was extracted with ether (2x30 mL). The combined ether extract was washed with water (2 x 25 mL), brine (25 mL), and then dried over Na<sub>2</sub>SO4 anhydrous. Evaporation of the solvent provided 0.44 g of IV as a pale oil. The crude product was purified by column chromatography on silica gel (230-400 mesh, 40 mL) eluted with 0-5% gradient ethyl acetate in hexanes. This provided 0.41 g of diaraquidonylmethyl methanol (IV) as a colorless oil.
Four. Synthesis of diaraquidonyl ketone (V)
To a mixture of diaraquidonyl methanol (IV, 0.41 g, 0.71 mmol) and anhydrous potassium carbonate (0.05g) in 10 mL of CH2CI2 were added to pyridinium chlorochromate (PCC, 0.50 g, 2.3 mmol). The resulting suspension was stirred at room temperature for 90 min. Then ether (50 mL) was added into the mixture and the resulting brown suspension was filtered through a pad of floresil (30 mL). The pad was then washed with ether (3 x 30 mL). The ether filtrate and the washes were combined. Solvent evaporation provided 0.40 g
270
ΙΜΡΙ
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OE INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY
<img file="MX338780B_D0318.tif" />
of an oily residue as a crude product. The crude product was purified by column chromatography on silica gel (230-400 mesh, 10 mL) eluted with 0-3% ether in hexanes.
This provided 0.30 g (75%) of diaraquidonyl ketone (V). <sup>X</sup>H NMR (400 MHz, CDC1<sub>3</sub>) δ: 5.3-5.5 (16H, m, 8 x CH = CH), 2.82 (12H, t, 6 x C = C-CH<sub>2</sub>-C = C), 2.40 (4H, t, 2 x CO-CH<sub>2</sub>), 2.08 (8H, m, 4 x CH<sub>2</sub> allyl), 1.25-1.65 (20H, m), 0.90 (6H, t, 2 x CH<sub>3</sub>) ppm.
5. Synthesis of 2,2-Diaraquidonyl-4- (2-hydroxyethyl) - [1,3] dioxalane (VI)
A mixture of diaraquidonyl ketone (V, 0.30 g, 0.52 mmol), 1,2,4-butanothriol (0.25 g, 2.4 mmol) and pyridinium ptoluenesulfonate (20 mg) in 60 mL of toluene was refluxed in argon during night with a Dean-Stark tube to remove water. The resulting mixture was cooled to room temperature. The organic phase was washed with water (2 x 30 mL), brine (30 mL) and then dried in Na<sub>2</sub>SC> 4 anhydrous. Evaporation of the solvent resulted in a yellowish oily residue. The crude product was purified by chromatography on silica gel columns (230-400 mesh, 40 mL) with 0-2% methanol in dichloromethane as the eluent. This provided 0.29 g (84%) of pure VI as a pale oil.
6. Synthesis of 2,2-Diaraquidonyl-4- (2-methanesulfonylethyl) 271
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE 'OF THE PROPERTY
INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX338780B_D0319.tif" />
[1,3] -dioxalan (VII)
To a solution of 2,2-diaraquidonyl-4- (2-hydroxyethyl) [1,3] -dioxalan (VI, 0.29 g, 0.43 mmol) and dry triethylamine (254 mg, 2.5 mmol) in 20 mL of CH<sub>2</sub>C1<sub>2</sub> Anhydrous methanesulfonyl anhydride (0.20 g, 1.1 mmol) in nitrogen was added. The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. The mixture was diluted with 30 mL of CH<sub>2</sub>C1<sub>2</sub>. The organic phase was washed with water (2 x 25 mL), brine (25 mL) and dried over anhydrous MgSO4. The solvent was evaporated to provide 0.30 g of pale oil. The crude product was used in the next step without further purification.
7. Synthesis of 2,2-Diaraquidonyl-4- (2-dimethylaminoethyl) [1,3] -dioxalane (DAra-K5-C2 - DMA)
To the above crude material (VII, 0.30 g) in argon, 15 mL of dimethylamine in THF (2.0 M) was added. The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature for 6 min. An oily residue was obtained after evaporation of the solvent. Column chromatography on silica gel (230-400 mesh, 40 mL) with 0-5% gradient of methanol in dichloromethane as eluant resulted in 0.18 g of the DAra-K5-C2DMA product as a pale oil.<sup>1</sup>H NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3) δ: 5.3-5.5 (16H, m, 8 x CH = CH), 4.0-4.17 (2H, m, 2 x OCH), 3.49 (1H, t,
OCH), 2.65-2.85 (14H, m, 6 x C = C-CH<sub>2</sub>-C = C, NCH<sub>2</sub>), 2.55 (6H, s, br, 2 x NCH<sub>3</sub>), 2.06 (8H, m, 4 x CH<sub>2</sub> allylic), 1.80-1.92 (2H,
272
IMPI
INDUSTRIAL m, CH<sub>2</sub>), 1.4-1.75 (4H, m, 2 x CH<sub>2</sub>), 1.22-1.45 (20H, m), 0.90 (6H, t, 2 x CH3) ppm.
Example 25: Synthesis of 2,2-Didocosahexaenoyl-4- (2-dimethylaminoethyl) - [1,3] -dioxalane (DDha-K5-C2 — DMA)
<img file="MX338780B_D0320.tif" />
HOCH<sub>2</sub>CH (OH) CH<sub>2</sub>CH<sub>2</sub>OH .Br
OHCO | l.Mg, ether II
2. Ethyl format
<img file="MX338780B_D0321.tif" />
EtjN
VI (CHjSO<sub>2</sub>)<sub>2</sub>OR
H<sub>3</sub>CO<sub>2</sub>SW
<img file="MX338780B_D0322.tif" />
VII
Dimethylamine
I
<img file="MX338780B_D0323.tif" />
DDha-K5-C2-D \ lA
one. Synthesis of Didocosahexaenoyl (II) Bromide
A mixture of docosahexaenoyl methanesulfonate (2.0g, 5.1mmol) and magnesium bromide (4.3g, 23mmol) in anhydrous ether (100mL) was stirred under argon overnight. The resulting suspension was filtered and the solid was washed with ether (2x30 mL). The filtrate and wash were combined and the solvent was
273 evaporated. The resulting residue was purified by column chromatography on silica gel (230-400 mesh, 40 mL) eluted with hexanes. This provided 2.2 g of docosahexaenoyl (II) bromide as a colorless oil.
IMPI,
MEXICAN INSTITUTE fa,
OF THE PROPERTY
INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX338780B_D0324.tif" />
2. Synthesis of Didocosahexaenoyl (III) Format
To a solution of docosahexaenoyl bromide (II, 2.2 g, 6.0 mmol) in anhydrous ether (60 mL) was added Mg filings (145 mg, 6.0 mmol) followed by a crystal of iodine. The resulting mixture was refluxed under argon for 5 hours. The mixture was cooled to room temperature. Ethyl format (0.50 mL) was added to the nebulous argon mixture and the resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. To the reaction was added 40 mL of 5% aqueous H2SO4 solution. The ether phase was separated and the aqueous phase was extracted with ether (50 mL). The combined organic phase was washed with water (2 x 50 mL), brine (50 mL), and then dried over anhydrous MgSO4. Solvent evaporation provided 2.3 g of a yellowish acid as the crude product (III). The crude product was purified by chromatography on silica gel columns (230-400 mesh, 50 mL) eluted with
0-7% gradient of ethyl acetate in hexanes. This provided 1.38 g (65%) of Didocosahexaenoyl methyl format (III) as a pale oil.
274
Mexicano. Mexican Institute PE THE PROPERTY
<img file="MX338780B_D0325.tif" />
3. Synthesis of Didocosahexaenoyl methanol (IV)
Didocosahexaenoyl methyl format (III, 1.38 g, 2.1 mmol) and KOH (300 mg) were stirred in 90% EtOH (70 mL) at room temperature under nitrogen for 90 min. After completing the reaction, most of the solvent was evaporated. The resulting mixture was treated with 60 mL of 2M HCI solution. The aqueous phase was extracted with ether (2x75 mL). The combined ether extract was washed with water (2 x 50 mL), brine (50 mL), and dried over anhydrous MgSO4. Evaporation of the solvent provided 1.18 g of IV as a yellowish oil. The crude product was purified by chromatography on silica gel columns (230-400 mesh, 50 mL) eluted with 0-6% gradient ethyl acetate in hexanes. This provided
1.0 g of Didocosahexaenoyl methanol (IV) as a colorless oil.
Four. Synthesis of Didocosahexaenoyl Ketone (V)
To a mixture of Didocosahexaenoyl methanol (IV, 1.2 g, 1.9 mmol) and anhydrous potassium carbonate (O.lg) in 30 mL of CH2CI2 were added to pyridinium chlorochromate (PCC, 1.05 g, 4.8 mmol). The resulting suspension was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours. Then ether (120 mL) was added into the mixture and the resulting brown suspension was filtered through a pad of silica gel (75 mL). The pad was then washed with ether (3 x 75 mL). Ether filtering and
275
IMPIí
MEXICAN INSTITUTE t ....
OF PROPERTY Vj '-'- lisx INDUSTRIAL' * «-—
<img file="MX338780B_D0326.tif" />
washes were combined. Solvent evaporation provided 1.3 g of an oily residue as a crude product. The crude product was purified by chromatography on silica gel columns (230-400 mesh, 40 mL) eluted with 0-3% ethyl acetate in hexanes. This provided 0.83 g (69%) of Didocosahexaenoyl ketone (V).
5. Synthesis of 2,2-Didocosahexaenoyl -4- (2-hydroxyethyl) [1,3] -dioxalan (VI)
A mixture of diaraquidonyl ketone (V, 0.43 g, 0.69 mmol), 1,2,4-butanotriol (0.35 g, 3.3 mmol) and pyridinium ptoluenesulfonate (50 mg) in 75 mL of toluene was refluxed in argon during night with a Dean-Stark tube to remove water. The resulting mixture was cooled to room temperature. The organic phase was washed with water (2 x 30 mL), brine (30 mL), and dried over anhydrous MgSO4. Evaporation of the solvent resulted in a yellowish oily residue. The crude product was purified by chromatography on silica gel columns (230-400 mesh, 40 mL) with 0-2% methanol in dichloromethane as the eluent. This provided 0.43 g (95%) of pure VI as a pale oil.
6. Synthesis of 2,2-Didocosahexaenoyl -4- (2methanesulfonylethyl) - [1,3] -dioxalan (VII)
To a solution of 2,2-Didocosahexaenoyl-4- (2276
IMPI
Ph THE INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY hydroxyethyl) - [1,3] -dioxalan (VI, 0.42 g, 0.59 mmol) and dry triethylamine (300 mg, 2.9 mmol) in 50 mL of anhydrous CH2CI2 anhydride methanesulfonyl (0.25 g, 1.4 mmol) was added in nitrogen. The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. The organic phase was washed with water (2 x 25 mL), brine (25 mL) and dried over anhydrous MgSO4. The solvent was evaporated to provide 0.43 g of pale oil. The crude product was used in the next step without further purification.
7. Synthesis of 2,2-Didocosahexaenoyl-4- (2-dimethylaminoethyl) [1, 3] -dioxalan (DDha-K5-C2 - DMA)
To the above crude material (VII, 0.43 g) in argon, 15 mL of dimethylamine in THF (2.0 M) was added. The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature for 6 min. An oily residue was obtained after evaporation of the solvent. Column chromatography on silica gel (230-400 mesh, 40 mL) with 0-5% gradient of methanol in dichloromethane as eluent resulted in 0.31 g of the product DDha-K5-C2DMA as a yellowish oil.<sup>X</sup>H NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3) δ: 5.25-5.45 (24H, m, 12 x CH = CH), 4.05-4.17 (2H, m, 2 x OCH),
3.50 (1H, t, OCH), 2.87-3.15 (2H, br., NCH<sub>2</sub>) 2.73-2.87 (20H, m, 10 x C = C-CH<sub>2</sub>-C = C), 2.65 (6H, s, br, 2 x NCH<sub>3</sub>), 2.06 (8H, m, 4 x CH<sub>2</sub> allylic), 2.0-2.2 (2H, m, CH<sub>2</sub>), 1.75-1.95 (2H, m,
CH<sub>2</sub>), 1.3-1.65 (8H, m, 4 x CH<sub>2</sub>), 0.90 (6H, t, 2 x CH<sub>3</sub>) ppm.
IMPI
<img file="MX338780B_D0327.tif" />
277
<img file="MX338780B_D0328.tif" />
Example 26: Synthesis of Dilinoleil 2- (2-Dimethylaminoethyl) malonate (DLin-MAL-C2-DMA)
<img file="MX338780B_D0329.tif" />
Oh
CH<sub>2</sub>(COC1)<sub>2</sub>
<img file="MX338780B_D0330.tif" />
II
l.NaH
2. (CH<sub>3</sub>)<sub>2</sub>NCH<sub>2</sub>CH<sub>2</sub>Cl
DL¡n-MAL-C2-DMA
one. Synthesis of Dilinoleil malonate (II)
Malonyl dichloride (1.36 g, 9.3 mmol) in argon at 0-5 ° C was added dropwise to a solution of linoneyl alcohol (I, 5.0 g, 19 mmol) in anhydrous CH2CI2 (70 mL). The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature for 6 hours. The mixture was diluted with 50 mL of CH<sub>2</sub>C1<sub>2</sub>. The organic phase was washed with water (3 x 75 mL), brine (75 mL) and dried in Na<sub>2</sub>SW<sub>4</sub> anhydrous. Evaporation of the solvent gave a brown oily residue (5.8 g). The crude product was purified by column chromatography on silica gel (230-400 mesh, 200 mL) eluted with 0-4% gradient in hexanes as eluant. This provided 3.1 g (55%) of pure II as a colorless oil.<sup>1</sup>H NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3) δ: 5.25-5.45 (8, m, 4x CH = CH), 4.13 (4H, t, 2 x OCH<sub>2</sub>), 3.35 (2H, s, CO-CH<sub>2</sub>-CO),
2.78 (4H, t, 2 x C = C-CH<sub>2</sub>-C = C), 2.05 (8H, q, 4 x CH<sub>2</sub> allylic),
278
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY
<img file="MX338780B_D0331.tif" />
1.55-1.65 (4H, m, CH<sub>2</sub>), 1.2-1.4 (32H, m), 0.90 (6H, t, 2 x
CH<sub>3</sub>) ppm.
2. Synthesis of Dilinoleil 2- (2-Dimethylaminoethyl) -malonate (DLin-MAL-C2-DMA)
Dilinoleyl malonate (II, 0.50 g, 0.83 mmol) in argon was added to a suspension of NaH (0.17g, 60%, 4.1 mmol) in anhydrous benzene (40 mL). The resulting suspension was stirred at room temperature for 60 min. To the resulting mixture, N, N-dimethylamimoethyl chloride hydrochloride (0.12 g, 0.83 mmol) was added in one portion and the resulting mixture was refluxed under argon for 2 days. The organic phase was washed with water (3 x 20 mL), brine (2x25 mL) and dried in Na<sub>2</sub>SW<sub>4</sub> anhydrous. Evaporation of the solvent gave a pale oily residue (0.50 g). Column chromatography on silica gel (230-400 mesh, 40 mL) with 0-4% methanol in dichloromethane as the eluent resulted in 0.13 g of the DLin-MAL-C2-DMA product as a pale oil.<sup>3</sup>H NMR (400 MHz, CDC1<sub>3</sub>) δ: 5.25-5.40 (8, m, 4 x
CH = CH), 4.05-4.20 (4H, m, 2 x OCH<sub>2</sub>), 3.47 (IH, t, CO-CH-CO),
2.75 (4H, t, 2 x C = C-CH<sub>2</sub>-C = C), 2.35-2.9 (6H, br, 2 x NCH<sub>3</sub>) ,
2.15-2.35 (2H, br, NCH<sub>2</sub>), 2.05 (8H, q, 4 x CH<sub>2</sub> allyl), 1,551.65 (4H, m, CH<sub>2</sub>), 1.2-1.45 (32H, m), 0.90 (6H, t, 2 x CH<sub>3</sub>) ppm.
279
<img file="MX338780B_D0332.tif" />
Example 27: Synthesis of Dilinoleil 2- (2-Dimethylaminoethyl) malonate (TetraLin-MAL-C2-DMA)
This compound was synthesized as a pale oil in a manner similar to that of Example 26 where linoleyl alcohol was replaced by dilinoleyl methanol. <sup>1</sup>H NMR (400 MHz, CDC1<sub>3</sub>) δ: 5.15-5.50 (16, m, 8 x CH = CH), 4.89 (2H, quintet), 3.46 (1H, t, CO-CH-CO), 3.08-3.2 (2H, m), 2.8-2.85 (6H, 2s), 2.78 (8H, t, 4 x C = C-CH<sub>2</sub>-C = C), 2.35-2.48 (2H, br,
NCH<sub>2</sub>), 2.05 (16H, q, 8 x CH<sub>2</sub> allylic), 1.45-1.65 (8H, m, CH<sub>2</sub>), 1.2-1.45 (64H, m), 0.90 (12H, t, 2 x CH<sub>3</sub>) ppm.
Example 28: Synthesis of 4-Dimethylamino-butyric acid 1octadeca-6,9,12-trienyl-nonadeca-7,10,13-trienyl ester (00514)
280 or'
ΙΜΡΙ
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY
<img file="MX338780B_D0333.tif" />
MgBr<sub>2</sub>diethyl ether
005-8
1.Mg
<img file="MX338780B_D0334.tif" />
005-9B
<img file="MX338780B_D0335.tif" />
005-14
005-12
Compounds 005-8 to 005-12 were synthesized in a similar manner to those in Example 19.
In an argon atmosphere, to a round-bottom flask loaded with DLen (y) -MeOH (005-12, 262 mg, 0.5 mmol), 4-dimethylaminobutyric acid hydrochloride (lOlmg, 0.6 mmol), and 4- (dimethylamino) pyridine (13 mg) in dichloromethane (5 mL) dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (134 mg) was added. After the mixture was stirred for 16 h at room temperature, the solvent was evaporated and the residue was taken up in diethyl ether. The white precipitate was discarded by filtration. Filtering
281
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY
<img file="MX338780B_D0336.tif" />
it was concentrated to dryness (0.4 g oil). The residue was purified by chromatography on silica gel columns (230-400 mesh, 50 mL) eluted with 2% to 3% methanol in dichloromethane. Fractions containing the pure product were combined and concentrated. The residue was passed through a layer of silica gel (2 mm) washed with hexanes (6 mL). The filtrate was then concentrated and dried under high vacuum for 1 h. This provided 166 mg (0.26 mmol, 53%) of 005-14 as a slightly light yellow oil. <sup>1</sup>H NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3) δ: 5.41-5.26 (m, 12H, CH = CH), 4.83 (quintet, J = 6 Hz, IH), 2.77 (similar to t, J = 5.2 Hz, 8H), 2.29 ( t, J = 7.6 Hz, 2H), 2.25 (t, J = 7.6, 2H), 2.18 (s, 6H), 2.02 (similar to q, J = 6.8 Hz, 8H),
1.75 (quintet-like, J = 7.6 Hz, 2H), 1.48 (m, 4H), 1,371.20 (m, 24H), 0.86 (t, J = 6.8 Hz, 6H) ppm.
Example 29: Synthesis of 5-Dimethylamino-pentanoic acid 1octadeca-6,9,12-trienyl-nonadeca-7,10,13-trienyl ester (00523)
<img file="MX338780B_D0337.tif" />
005-12
<img file="MX338780B_D0338.tif" />
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY
<img file="MX338780B_D0339.tif" />
Step 1, 005-21:
In an argon atmosphere, to a round-bottom flask loaded with DLen (y) -MeOH (005-12, 262 mg, 0.5 mmol), 5-bromovaleric acid (181 mg, 1.0 mmol) and 4- (dimethylamino) pyridine ( 30 mg) in dichloromethane (10 mL) dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (227 mg) was added. After the mixture was stirred for 16 h at room temperature, the solvent was evaporated and the residue was taken up in hexanes. The white precipitate was discarded by filtration. The filtrate was concentrated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography on silica gel columns (230-400 mesh, 50 mL) eluted with acetate in hexanes (0-2%). Fractions containing the pure product were combined and concentrated. This provided 290 mg (0.42 mmol, 84%) of 005-21 as a slightly yellow oil.
IMPI
<img file="MX338780B_D0340.tif" />
283
Step 2, 005-23:
Dimethylamine (2M in THF, 10 mL) was added to 005-21 (290 mg). The solution was stirred at room temperature for 6 days. Excess amine and solvent were evaporated. The crude product was purified by chromatography on silica gel columns (230-400 mesh, 50 mL) with methanol in dichloromethane (13%). Fractions containing the product were combined and concentrated. The residual oil was passed through a layer of celite and washed with hexanes (6 mL). The filtrate was then concentrated and dried under high vacuum for 2 h. This provided 204 mg (0.31 mmol, 74%) of 005-23 as a slightly yellow oil.<sup>X</sup>H NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3) or: 5,435.30 (m, 12H, CH = CH), 4.84 (quintet, J = 6 Hz, 1H), 2.77 (similar to t, J = 5.2 Hz, 8H), 2.39- 2.28 (m, 4H), 2.28 (s, 6H), 2.06 (similar to q, J = 6.8 Hz, 8H), 1.66 (similar to quintet,
J = 7.2 Hz, 2H), 1.60-1.48 (m, 6H), 1.41-1.24 (m, 24H), 0.90 (t, 6H, J = 6.8 Hz) ppm.
Example 30: Synthesis of [2 - (2,2-Di-octadeca-6,9,12-trienyl [1,3] dioxolan-4-yl) -ethyl] -dimethylamine (005-31)
<img file="MX338780B_D0341.tif" />
Step 1, 005-28:
To a mixture of dilinolenyl (and) methanol (IV, 550 mg, 1.05 mmol) and anhydrous potassium carbonate (58 mg) in 25 mL of CH2C12 were added to pyridinium chlorochromate (PCC, 566 mg, 2.63 mmol, 2.5 equiv. ). The resulting suspension was stirred at room temperature for 90 min. Then ether (100 mL) was added into the mixture and the resulting brown suspension was filtered through a pad of silica gel (150 mL). The silica gel pad was then washed with ether (3 x 50 mL). The ether filtrate and washes are
<img file="MX338780B_D0342.tif" />
285 combined. Evaporation of the solvent provided 510 mg of an oily residue as a crude product. The crude product was purified by chromatography on silica gel columns (230-400 mesh, 50 mL) eluted with 0-3% ethyl acetate in hexanes. This provided 344g (63%) of the title product (005-28).
Step 2, 005-29:
A mixture of 005-28 (344 mg, 0.66 mmol), 1,2,4-butanothriol (349 mg, 3.2 mmol) and pyridinium p-toluenesulfonate (30 mg) in 50 mL of toluene were heated under reflux in argon overnight. with a Dean-Stark tube to remove water. The resulting mixture was cooled to room temperature. The organic phase was washed with water (30 mL) (butantriol is not soluble in toluene, so the solution is poured and the triol is left behind), brine (30 mL) and dried in Na2S0<sub>4</sub>anhydrous. Evaporation of the solvent resulted in a yellowish oily residue. The crude product was purified by column chromatography on silica gel (230-400 mesh, 40 mL) eluted with 04% ethyl acetate in hexanes. Fractions containing the pure product were combined and concentrated. This provided 337 mg (83%) of pure 005-29 as a colorless oil.
Step 3, 005-30:
286
IMPI
IMS-IT'JTO MEXICAN PROPERTY
INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX338780B_D0343.tif" />
To a solution of 005-29 (337 mg, 0.55 mmol) and dry triethylamine (300 mg, 2 mmol) in 30 mL of anhydrous CH2CI2 was added anhydrous methanesulfonyl (310 mg, 1.78 mmol) in nitrogen. The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. The mixture was diluted with 30 mL of CH2CI2. The organic phase was washed with water (2 x 25 mL), brine (25 mL) and dried in anhydrous MgSCh. The solvent was evaporated to provide 377g of the desired product as a clear, colorless oil (99%). The product was pure enough and used in the next step without further purification.
Step 4, 005-31:
To 005-30 (377 mg) in argon, 15 mL of dimethylamine in THF (2.0 M) was added. The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature for 6 min. An oily residue was obtained after evaporation of the solvent. Column chromatography on silica gel (230-400 mesh, 40 mL) was eluted with 3% methanol in dichloromethane. Fractions containing the pure product were combined and concentrated to provide 314 mg of the title product (005-31) as a pale pale oil.<sup>1</sup>H NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3) δ: 5.41-5.26 (m, 12H, CH = CH), 4.06 (m, 1H), 4.01 (dd, 1H, J = 7.5, 7.5 Hz), 3.45 (dd, 1H, J = 7.5, 7.5 Hz), 2.77 (similar to t, J = 5.6 Hz, 8H),
2.36 (m, 1H), 2.26 (m, 1H), 2.19 (s, 6H), 2.02 (similar to q,
J. JL τ
INSTITU EX M EX IC ANOJ
D £ THE PROPERTY <»***. & '
INDUSTRIAL '** «_ * ·' '**
287
J = 6.8 Hz, 8H), 1.78 (m, 1H), 1.67 (m, 1H), 1.60-1.51 (m, 4H), 1.38-1.21 (m, 24H), 0.86 (t, 6H, J = 6.8 Hz ) ppm.
Example 31: Synthesis of 4- (2-Methyl-aziridin-l-yl) butyric acid l-octadeca-9,12-dienyl-nonadeca-10,13-dienyl ester (005-18)
<img file="MX338780B_D0344.tif" />
001-17
005-13
005-18
Step 1, 005-13: In an argon atmosphere, to a round bottom flask loaded with DLin) -MeOH (001-17, 528.9 mg,
0.5 mmol), 4- (dimethylamino) pyridine (25 mg) in dichloromethane (10 mL), dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (268 mg) was added. After the mixture was stirred for 16 h at room temperature, the solvent was evaporated and the residue was taken up in diethyl ether. The white precipitate (DCU) was discarded by filtration. The filtrate was concentrated and the resulting oily residue was purified by chromatography on silica gel columns (230-400 mesh, 50 mL) eluted with 0 to 1% acetate
288
IMP
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF PROPERTY
INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX338780B_D0345.tif" />
ethyl in hexanes. This provided 0.44 g (65%) of 005-13 as a colorless oil.
Step 2, 005-18: A mixture of 005-13 (0.44 g, 0.65 mmol), 2-methylaziridine (148 mg, 2.6 mmol, tech. 90%), Cs<sub>2</sub>CO3 (2.6 mmol) and TBAI (2.4 mmol) in acetonitrile (10 mL) were stirred in Ar for 4 days. After the solvent was removed, hexanes and water were added to the residue. The two phases were separated followed by extraction of the aqueous phase with hexanes (X 2). The combined organic phase was dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated to dryness. The resulting oily residue was purified by chromatography on silica gel columns (230-400 mesh, 50 mL) eluted with 1% to 3% methanol in dichloromethane. The fractions containing the product were combined and concentrated (200 mg of oil). This was further purified by chromatography on silica gel columns (230-400 mesh, 50 mL) eluted with a gradient of ethyl acetate in hexanes (5% -20%). Fractions containing the pure product were combined and concentrated. This provided 96 mg (33%) of 005-18 as a colorless oil.<sup>X</sup>H NMR (400 MHz, CDC1<sub>3</sub>) δ: 5.43-5.30 (m, 8H, CH = CH), 4.87 (quintet, J = 6 Hz, 1H), 2.78 (similar at, J = 6 Hz, 4H), 2.39 (similar at, J = 7.8 Hz , 2H), 2.26 (similar to t, 2H), 2.06 (similar to q, J = 6.8 Hz, 8H), 1.89 (similar to quintet, J = 7.2 Hz, 2H), 1,561.48 (m, 5H), 1.41- 1.24 (m, 38H), 1.18 (d, J = 5.2 Hz, 3H), 0.90 (t, 6H, J = 6.8 Hz) ppm.
<img file="MX338780B_D0346.tif" />
289
<img file="MX338780B_D0347.tif" />
Example 32: Synthesis of 2,2-Dilinoleyl-5-dimethylaminomethyl [1,3] -dioxane (DLin-K6S-Cl-DMA)
<img file="MX338780B_D0348.tif" />
CH (CH<sub>2</sub>CH<sub>2</sub>OH)<sub>3</sub><sup>H0</sup>vz \ _<sub>or</sub>/ \ x ^ --- ~ XV -------------
<img file="MX338780B_D0349.tif" />
v
VI (CH<sub>3</sub>SW<sub>2</sub>)<sub>2</sub>OR
Et<sub>3</sub>N
Dimethylamine
<img file="MX338780B_D0350.tif" />
DL¡n-K6S-Cl-DMA
VII
8. Synthesis of Linoleyl (II) Bromide
A mixture of linoleyl methane sulfonate (26.6g, 77.2mmol) and lithium bromide (30.5g, 350mmol) in acetone (350mL) was stirred under nitrogen for two days. The resulting suspension was filtered and the solid was washed with acetone. The filtrate and wash were combined and the solvent was evaporated. The resulting residue was treated with water (300 mL). The aqueous phase was extracted with ether (3x150 mL). The combined ether phase was washed with water (200 mL), brine (200 mL), and then dried over Na<sub>2</sub>SO4 anhydrous. The solvent was evaporated to provide 29.8g of yellowish oil. The raw product
290
ΙΜΡΪ
Mexican Institute of Industrial Property
<img file="MX338780B_D0351.tif" />
purified by chromatography on silica gel columns (230-400 mesh, 700 mL) eluted with hexanes. This provided
20.8 g (82%) of linoleyl (II) bromide.
9. Dilinoleylmethyl (III) Format Synthesis
To a suspension of Mg filings (1.64g, 67.4 mmol) with a crystal of iodine in 500 mL of anhydrous ether in nitrogen was added to a solution of linoleyl bromide (II, 18.5g, 56.1 mmol) in 250 mL of ether anhydrous at room temperature. The resulting mixture was refluxed under nitrogen overnight. The mixture was cooled to room temperature. Ethyl format (4.24g, 57.2 mmol) was added dropwise to the hazy nitrogen mixture. After addition, the mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. The mixture was treated with 10% aqueous H2SO4 solution (250 mL).
The ether phase was separated and the aqueous phase was extracted with ether (150 mL). The combined organic phase was washed with water (400 mL), brine (300 mL), and then dried over Na2SO<sub>4</sub> anhydrous. Evaporation of the solvent provided 17.8 g of a yellowish acid as the crude product (III). The crude product was used directly in the next step without further purification.
10. Synthesis of Dilinoleyl methanol (IV)
The previous crude dilinoleylmethyl format (III,
<img file="MX338780B_D0352.tif" />
291
<img file="MX338780B_D0353.tif" />
17.8g, 0.71mmol) and KOH (3.75g) were stirred in 85% EtOH at room temperature under nitrogen overnight. After completing the reaction, most of the solvent was evaporated. The resulting mixture was treated with 150 mL of 5% HCI solution.
The aqueous phase was extracted with ether (2x150 mL). The combined ether extract was washed with water (2 x 100 mL), brine (100 mL), and then dried over Na<sub>2</sub>SO4 anhydrous. Evaporation of the solvent provided 20.0 g of dilinoleyl methanol (IV) as a yellowish oil. The crude product was purified by column chromatography on silica gel (230-400 mesh, 700 mL) eluted with 0-5% gradient ethyl acetate in hexanes. This provided 9.6 g of dilinoleyl methanol (IV).
eleven. Synthesis of dilinoleyl ketone (V)
To a mixture of dilinoleyl methanol (4.0g, 7.2 mmol) and anhydrous potassium carbonate (0.4g) in 100 mL of CH<sub>2</sub>C1<sub>2</sub> added to pyridinium chlorochromate (PCC, 4.0g, 19 mmol). The resulting suspension was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours. Then ether (300 mL) was added to the mixture and the resulting brown suspension was filtered through a pad of silica gel (150 mL). The silica gel pad was then washed with ether (3 x 75 mL). The ether filtrate and the washes were combined. Solvent evaporation provided 5.1 g of an oily residue as a crude product. The crude product was purified by column chromatography
292
Mexican INSTITUTE OF PROPERTY
INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX338780B_D0354.tif" />
on silica gel (230-400 mesh, 200 mL) eluted with 0-4% ethyl acetate in hexanes. This provided 3.0 g (79%) of dilinoleyl ketone (V).
12. Synthesis of 2,2-dilinoleyl-5-hydroxymethyl) - [1,3] dioxane (VI)
A mixture of dilinoleyl ketone (V, 1.05 g, 2.0 mmol), 2-hydroxymethyl-l, 3-propanediol (490 mg, 4.2 mmol) and pyridinium ptoluenesulfonate (100 mg) in 150 mL of toluene was refluxed in argon overnight with a Dean-Stark tube to remove water. The resulting mixture was cooled to room temperature. The organic phase was washed with water (2 x 100 mL), brine (100 mL) and then dried in Na2SC> 4 anhydrous. Evaporation of the solvent resulted in a pale oil (1.2 g). The crude product was purified by chromatography on silica gel columns (230-400 mesh, 100 mL) with 0-5% gradient of methanol in dichloromethane as eluent. This provided 0.93 g of pure VI as a pale oil.
13. Synthesis of 2,2-Dilinoleyl-5-methanesulfonylmethyl- [1,3] dioxane (VII)
To a solution of 2,2-dilinoleyl-5-hydroxymethyl) - [1,3] dioxane (VI, 0.93 g, 1.5 mmol) and dry triethylamine (290 mg, 2.9 mmol) in 50 mL of anhydrous CH2CI2 was added methanesulfonyl
293
ΙΜΡΪ
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY
<img file="MX338780B_D0355.tif" />
anhydride (400 mg, 2.3 mmol) in nitrogen. The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. The organic phase was washed with water (2 x 75 mL), brine (75 mL) and then dried in Na2SO<sub>4</sub> anhydrous. The solvent was evaporated to provide 1.0 g of pale oil. The crude product was used in the next step without further purification.
14. Synthesis of 2,2-Dilinoleyl-5-dimethylaminomethyl- [1,3] dioxane (DLin-K6S-Cl-DMA)
To the above crude material (VII, 1.0 g) in nitrogen, 20 mL of dimethylamine in THF (2.0 M) was added. The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature for 7 mins. An oily residue was obtained after evaporation of the solvent. Column chromatography on silica gel (230-400 mesh, 100 mL) with 0-3% methanol gradient in chloroform as eluent resulted in 150 mg of DLin-K6S-Cl-DMA product as a pale oil.<sup>1</sup>H NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3) δ: 5.24-5.51 (8, m, 4x CH = CH), 4.04 (2H, dd, 2 x OCH)), 3.75 (2Η, dd OCH), 2.72.9 (2Η, br, NCH<sub>2</sub>), 2.78 (4Η, t, 2 x C = C-CH<sub>2</sub>-C = C), 2.57 (6H, s, 2 x NCH<sub>3</sub>), 1.95-2.17 (9H, q, 4 x CH<sub>2</sub> allyl and CH), 1,671.95 (2H, m, CH<sub>2</sub>), 1.54-1.65 (4H, m, 2 X CH<sub>2</sub>), 1.22-1.45 (32H,
m), 0.90 (6H, t, 2 x CH3) ppm.
Example 33: Synthesis of 2,2-Dilinoleyl-5-dimethylaminobutyl [1,3] -dioxane (DLin-K6S-C4-DMA)
294
<img file="MX338780B_D0356.tif" />
<img file="MX338780B_D0357.tif" />
This compound was synthesized as a pale oil in a manner similar to that of Example 32 where 2-hydroxymethyl 1,3-propanediol was replaced with 2-hydroxybutyl-1,3 propanediol. <sup>1</sup>H NMR (400 MHz, CDC1<sub>3</sub>) δ: 5.24-5.45 (8, m, 4x CH = CH), 3.79 (2H, dd, 2 x OCH)), 3.50 (2H, dd OCH), 2.76 (4H, t, 2 x C = C-CH<sub>2</sub>-C = C), 2.37 (2H, t, NCH<sub>2</sub>), 2.31 (6H, s, 2 x
NCH<sub>3</sub>), 2.04 (8H, q, 4 x CH<sub>2</sub> allyl), 1.63-1.90 (3H, m,), 1.45-1.62 (4H, m, 2 x CH<sub>2</sub>), 1.22-1.45 (36H, m), 0.90 (6H, t, x CH<sub>3</sub>) ppm.
Example 34: Synthesis of 2,2-Dilinoleyl-5-dimethylaminoethyl [1,3] -dioxane (DLin-K6S-C2-DMA)
This compound was synthesized as a pale oil in a manner similar to that of Example 32 where 2-hydroxymethyl 1,3-propanediol was replaced by 2-hydroxyethyl-1,3 propanediol. <sup>1</sup>H NMR (400 MHz, CDC1<sub>3</sub>) δ: 5.25-5.45 (8, m, 4x CH = CH), 3.87 (2H, dd, 2 x OCH)), 3.55 (2H, dd OCH), 2.75 (4H, t, 2 x C = C-CH<sub>2</sub>-C = C), 2.45-2.60 (2H, br, NCH<sub>2</sub>), 2.40 (6H, s, 2 x NCH<sub>3</sub>), 2.03 (8H, q, 4 x CH<sub>2</sub> allyl), 1.73-1.86 (1H, m),
295
ΙΜΡΙ
MEXICAN INSTITUTE O ?. THE PROPERTY
INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX338780B_D0358.tif" />
1.56-1.72 (6H, m, 2 x CH<sub>2</sub>), 1.22-1.45 (32H, m), 0.90 (6H, t, x CH3) ppm.
Example 35: Synthesis of 2,2-dilinoleyl-4- (2-dimethylaminoethyl) - [1,3] -dioxalane (DLin-K6A-C2-DMA) or oh or
<img file="MX338780B_D0359.tif" />
I
LiAlH,
Oh
<img file="MX338780B_D0360.tif" />
Oh
II
Toluene
TsO-Py
HO. ZN
V¿V \ / \ y<sup>z</sup>\/<sup>TO</sup>\ = / \ = / v / ^
IV
III (CHjS0<sub>2</sub>)<sub>2</sub>OR
<img file="MX338780B_D0361.tif" />
DLin-K6A-C2-DMA Dimethylamine V
5. Synthesis of 1,3,5-pentanotriol (II)
Diethyl 3-hydroxyglutarate (I, 1.0 was added dropwise
<td>g, 4.</td><td>9 mmol)</td><td>in THF</td><td>anhydrous</td><td> (10</td><td>mL) a</td><td>a</td><td>suspension</td><td>of</td>
<td>LiAlH<sub>4</sub></td><td>in THF</td><td>anhydrous</td><td>(110 mL)</td><td>in</td><td colspan="2">nitrogen</td><td>with a bath</td><td>of</td>
<td>Water</td><td colspan="2">cold. Behind the</td><td>addition,</td><td>the</td><td>bathroom</td><td>I know</td><td>removed and</td><td>the</td>
suspension was stirred at room temperature for 2 days. The resulting mixture was quenched by adding 13 mL of brine very slowly with an ice-water bath. A white suspension resulted and the mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. The solid was filtered and washed with THF. Filtering and washing were combined and the
296
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE L £ THE INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY
<img file="MX338780B_D0362.tif" />
Solvent was evaporated to provide 0.70 g of pale oil. Column chromatography of the crude product (230-400 mesh S1O2, 100 mL, 0-12% methanol in chloroform gradient) provided 0.54 g of II as a colorless oil.
6. Synthesis of 2,2-dilinoleyl-4- (2-hydroxyethyl) - [1,3] dioxane (IV)
A mixture of dilinoleyl ketone (III, 0.80g, 1.5mmol), 1,3,5-pentanotriol (II, 0.54g, 4.5mmol) and pyridinium ptoluenesulfonate (60mg) in 150mL of toluene was refluxed in nitrogen overnight with a Dean-Stark tube to remove water. The resulting mixture was cooled to room temperature. The organic phase was washed with water (2 x 75 mL), brine (75 mL) and then dried in Na2SO<sub>4</sub> anhydrous. Evaporation of the solvent resulted in a pale oil (1.1 g). The crude product was purified by chromatography on silica gel columns (230-400 mesh, 75 mL) with 0-3% gradient of methanol in dichloromethane as eluent. This provided 0.75 g (79%) of pure IV as a colorless oil.
7. Synthesis of 2,2-dilinoleyl-4- (2-methanesulfonylethyl) [1,3] -dioxane (V)
To a solution of 2,2-dilinoleyl-4- (2-hydroxyethyl) [1,3] -dioxane (IV, 0.75 g, 1.2 mmol) and dry triethylamine
<img file="MX338780B_D0363.tif" />
297 i
inst; . VTO MtX ¡CANO OF INDIO ERIAL PROPERTY
<img file="MX338780B_D0364.tif" />
(0.58 g, 5.7 mmol) in 40 mL of anhydrous CH2CI2 anhydrous methanesulfonyl (0.50 g, 2.9 mmol) in nitrogen was added. The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. The organic phase was washed with water (2 x 50 mL), brine (50 mL) and then dried in Na<sub>2</sub>SW<sub>4</sub> anhydrous. The solvent was evaporated to provide 0.80 g of pale oil as a crude product. The crude product was used in the next step without further purification.
8. Synthesis of 2,2-dilinoleyl-4- (2-dimethylaminoethyl) - [1,3] dioxane (DLin-K6A-C2 — DMA)
To the above crude material (V, 0.80 g) in nitrogen, 15 mL of dimethylamine in THF (2.0 M) was added. The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature for 6 min. The solid was filtered. An oily residue was obtained after evaporation of the solvent. Column chromatography on silica gel (230-400 mesh, 100 mL) with 0-6% gradient of methanol in dichloromethane as eluent resulted in 0.70 g of the product DLin-K6A-C2-DMA as a pale oil.<sup>1</sup>H NMR (400 MHz, CDC1<sub>3</sub>) δ: 5.28-5.45 (8, m, 4x CH = CH), 3.85-4.0 (2H, m, 2 x OCH), 3.78 (IH, dd, OCH), 2.78 (4H, t, 2 x C = CCH<sub>2</sub>-C = C), 2.55-2.90 (2H, br, NCH<sub>2</sub>), 2.47 (6H, s, 2 x NCH<sub>3</sub>) ,
2.05 (8H, q, 4 x CH<sub>2</sub> allyl), 1.65-1.90 (4H, m, CH<sub>2</sub>), 1,471.65 (4H, m, CH<sub>2</sub>), 1.1-1.65 (36H, m), 0.90 (6H, t, 2 x CH<sub>3</sub>) ppm.
298
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY
<img file="MX338780B_D0365.tif" />
Example 36: Synthesis of 2,2-dilinoleyl-4- (3dimethylaminopropyl) - [1,3] -dioxane (DLin-K6A-C3-DMA)
LiAlH<sub>4</sub>
<img file="MX338780B_D0366.tif" />
<img file="MX338780B_D0367.tif" />
DL¡n-K6A-C3-DMA
<img file="MX338780B_D0368.tif" />
5. Synthesis of 1,3,6-hexanotriol (II)
Diethyl β-ketoadipate (I, 1.86 g,
8.6 mmol) to a LiAlH suspension<sub>4</sub> in anhydrous THF (90 mL) in argon with an ice-water bath. After addition, the bath was removed and the suspension was stirred at room temperature for 2 days. The resulting mixture was quenched by adding 10 mL of brine very slowly with an ice-water bath. A white suspension resulted and the mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. The solid was filtered and washed with THF followed by EtOH (2 x 50 mL). The filtrate and wash were combined and the solvent was evaporated to provide 0.90 g of pale oil. Column chromatography of the crude product (230-400 mesh S1O2, 100 mL, 0-10% gradient of methanol in dichloromethane)
<img file="MX338780B_D0369.tif" />
ψ «&.
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF PROPERTY
<img file="MX338780B_D0370.tif" />
provided 0.70 g of II as a colorless oil.
6. Synthesis of 2,2-dilinoleyl-4- (3-hydroxypropyl) - [1,3] dioxane (IV)
A mixture of dilinoleyl ketone (III, 1.80g, 3.4mmol), 1,3,6-hexanotriol (II, 0.50g, 3.7mmol) and pyridinium ptoluenesulfonate (100mg) in 120mL of toluene was refluxed in nitrogen for 3 hours with a Dean-Stark tube to remove the water. The resulting mixture was cooled to room temperature. The organic phase was washed with water (2 x 50 mL), brine (50 mL) and then dried in Na<sub>2</sub>SW<sub>4 </sub>anhydrous. Evaporation of the solvent resulted in a pale oil (2.0 g). The crude product was purified by chromatography on silica gel columns (230-400 mesh, 50 mL) with 0-3% gradient of methanol in dichloromethane as eluent. This provided 0.90 g (41%) of pure IV as a colorless oil.
7. Synthesis of 2,2-dilinoleyl-4- (3-methanesulfonylpropyl) [1,3] -dioxane (V)
To a solution of 2,2-dilinoleyl-4- (3-hydroxypropyl) [1,3] -dioxane (IV, 0.97 g, 1.5 mmol) and dry triethylamine (0.44 g, 4.3 mmol) in 60 mL of CH<sub>2</sub>C1<sub>2</sub> Anhydrous methanesulfonyl anhydride (0.60 g, 3.5 mmol) in argon was added. The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature during the
<img file="MX338780B_D0371.tif" />
I ΜΡ ϊ
MEXICAN INSTITUTE ,,.,,
OF OWN! -),
J00 INDUSTRIAL “to —-—- night. The organic phase was washed with water (2 x 30 mL), brine (30 mL), and dried over anhydrous MgSO4. The solvent was evaporated to provide 1.1 g of pale oil as a crude product. The crude product was used in the next step without further purification.
8. Synthesis of 2,2-dilinoleyl-4- (3-dimethylaminopropyl) [1,3] -dioxane (DLin-K6A-C3-DMA)
To the above crude material (V, 1.1 g) in argon, 20 mL of dimethylamine in THF (2.0 M) was added. The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature for 5 min. The solid was filtered. An oily residue was obtained after evaporation of the solvent. Silica gel column chromatography (mesh
<td> 230-400, 40</td><td>mL) with</td><td> 0-7%</td><td>gradient of</td><td>methanol</td><td>in</td>
<td>dichloromethane</td><td colspan="2">as eluent gave</td><td>as a result</td><td>0.85 g</td><td>of the</td>
<td>product DLin-</td><td>K6A-C3-DMA</td><td>as a</td><td>pale oil.</td><td><sup>X</sup>H NMR</td><td> (400</td>
<td>MHz, CDC1<sub>3</sub>) δ:</td><td> 5.25-5.45</td><td>(8, m, 4</td><td>x CH = CH), 3.7-4</td><td>.0 (3H,</td><td>m, 3</td>
<td>x OCH), 2.77</td><td>(4H, t,</td><td>2 x C = C</td><td>-CH<sub>2</sub>-C = C), 2.5-2</td><td>.8 (2H,</td><td>br,</td>
NCH<sub>2</sub>), 2.5 (6H, s, 2 x NCH<sub>3</sub>), 2.05 (8H, q, 4 x CH<sub>2</sub> allyl), 1.65-1.90 (4H, m, 2 x CH<sub>2</sub>), 1.40-1.65 (4H, m, 2 x CH<sub>2</sub>), 1.11.65 (38H, m), 0.90 (6H, t, 2 x CH<sub>3</sub>) ppm.
Example 37: Synthesis of 2,2-Diaraquidonyl-4- (2-dimethylaminoethyl) - [1,3] -dioxalane (DAra-K5-C2-DMA)
301
IMPI _
MEXICAN INSTITUTE I,,
OF PROPERTY i. • eon'.t-AiS
INDUSTRIAL
BEAR<sub>2</sub>CH<sub>3</sub>
MgBr.
ether, Br
l.Mg, ether II
Ethyl formate
<img file="MX338780B_D0372.tif" />
H<sub>3</sub>CO<sub>2</sub>S (\
VII
Dimethylamine z<sup>N</sup>
<img file="MX338780B_D0373.tif" />
DAra-K5-C2-DMA
8. Synthesis of Araquidonyl Bromide (II)
A mixture of arachidonyl methane sulfonate (1.0 g,
2.7 mmol) and magnesium bromide (2.2 g, 12 mmol) in anhydrous ether (40 mL) were stirred under argon for two days. The resulting suspension was filtered and the solid was washed with ether (2x10) mL). The filtrate and wash were combined and the solvent was evaporated. The resulting residue was treated with hexanes (50 mL). The solid was filtered and the solvent was evaporated, resulting in an oily residue. The crude product was purified by chromatography on silica gel columns (230-400 mesh, 30 mL) eluted with hexanes. This provided g of arachidonyl (II) bromide as a colorless oil.
302
<img file="MX338780B_D0374.tif" />
MEXICAN INSTITUTE PE LA PRO? ¡R.DAO INDUSTRIAL
9. Synthesis of Diarachidonylmethyl (III) Format
To a solution of arachidonyl bromide (II, 1 g, 3 mmol) in anhydrous ether (30 mL) was added Mg filings (78 mg, 3.2 mmol) followed by a crystal of iodine. The resulting mixture was refluxed under nitrogen for 10 hours. The mixture was cooled to room temperature. Ethyl format (0.25 mL) was added to the hazy nitrogen mixture and the resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. To the reaction was added 20 mL of 10% aqueous H2SO4 solution. The ether phase was separated and the aqueous phase was extracted with ether (30 mL). The combined organic phase was washed with water (2 x 25 mL), brine (25 mL), and then dried over Na2SO<sub>4</sub> anhydrous. Evaporation of the solvent provided 1 g of a pale acid as crude product (III). The crude product was purified by chromatography on silica gel columns (230-400 mesh, 40 mL) eluted with
0-3% gradient of ethyl acetate in hexanes. This provided 0.43 g (40%) of diaraquidonylmethyl (III) format as a pale oil.
10. Synthesis of diaraquidonyl methanol (IV)
The above diaraquidonylmethyl format (III, 0.43 g, 0.71 mmol) and KOH (100 mg) were stirred in 95% EtOH (20 mL) at room temperature under nitrogen overnight. After completing the reaction, most of the solvent was evaporated. The
IMPI
303
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF PROPERTY
INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX338780B_D0375.tif" />
Resulting mixture was treated with 20 mL of 2M HCI solution. The aqueous phase was extracted with ether (2x30 mL). The combined ether extract was washed with water (2 x 25 mL), brine (25 mL), and then dried over Na<sub>2</sub>SW<sub>4</sub> anhydrous. Evaporation of the solvent provided 0.44 g of IV as a pale oil. The crude product was purified by column chromatography on silica gel (230-400 mesh, 40 mL) eluted with 0-5% gradient ethyl acetate in hexanes. This provided 0.41 g of diaraquidonylmethyl methanol (IV) as a colorless oil.
eleven. Synthesis of diaraquidonyl ketone (V)
To a mixture of diaraquidonyl methanol (IV, 0.41 g, 0.71 mmol) and anhydrous potassium carbonate (0.05g) in 10 mL of CH<sub>2</sub>C1<sub>2</sub> pyridinium chlorochromate (PCC, 0.50 g, 2.3 mmol) were added. The resulting suspension was stirred at room temperature for 90 min. Then ether (50 mL) was added into the mixture and the resulting brown suspension was filtered through a pad of floresil (30 mL). The pad was then washed with ether (3 x 30 mL). The ether filtrate and the washes were combined. Solvent evaporation provided 0.40 g of an oily residue as a crude product. The crude product was purified by column chromatography on silica gel (230-400 mesh, 10 mL) eluted with 0-3% ether in hexanes. This provided 0.30 g (75%) of diaraquidonyl ketone (V).<sup>1</sup>H
NMR (400 MHz, CDC1<sub>3</sub>) δ: 5.3-5.5 (16H, m, 8 x CH = CH), 2.82
304
ΙΜΡΙ
INSTi ~ '/' D VkXUANO t / E LA ??. U? ÍEDaP INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX338780B_D0376.tif" />
(12H, t, 6 x C = C-CH<sub>2</sub>-C = C), 2.40 (4H, t, 2 x CO-CH<sub>2</sub>), 2.08 (8H, m, 4 x CH<sub>2</sub> allyl), 1.25-1.65 (20H, m), 0.90 (6H, t, 2 x CH<sub>3</sub>) ppm.
12. Synthesis of 2,2-Diaraquidonyl-4- (2-hydroxyethyl) - [1,3] dioxalane (VI)
A mixture of diaraquidonyl ketone (V, 0.30g, 0.52mmol), 1,2,4-butanetriol (0.25g, 2.4mmol) and pyridinium ptoluenesulfonate (20mg) in 60 mL of toluene was refluxed under argon overnight. with a Dean-Stark tube to remove water. The resulting mixture was cooled to room temperature. The organic phase was washed with water (2 x 30 mL), brine (30 mL) and then dried in Na<sub>2</sub>SW<sub>4 </sub>anhydrous. Evaporation of the solvent resulted in a yellowish oily residue. The crude product was purified by chromatography on silica gel columns (230-400 mesh, 40 mL) with 0-2% methanol in dichloromethane as the eluent. This provided 0.29 g (84%) of pure VI as a pale oil.
13. Synthesis of 2,2-Diaraquidonyl-4- (2-methanesulfonylethyl) [1,3] -dioxalane (VII)
To a solution of 2,2-diaraquidonyl-4- (2-hydroxyethyl) [1,3] -dioxalan (VI, 0.29 g, 0.43 mmol) and dry triethylamine (254 mg, 2.5 mmol) in 20 mL of CH<sub>2</sub>C1<sub>2</sub> Anhydrous methanesulfonyl anhydride (0.20 g, 1.1 mmol) in nitrogen was added. The
305
ΙΜ.ΡΙ
MEXICAN INSTITUTE
FROM THE j-iScsS PROPERTY?
Resulting mixture was stirred overnight. The organic diluted mixture was washed with water (2 dried in anhydrous MgSO4, provide 0.30 g of acei used in the next step without
INDt-o lk * room temperature during the 30 mL of CH2CI2. Phase x 25 mL), brine (25 mL) and the solvent was evaporated for pale tea. The crude product is further purified.
14. Synthesis of 2,2-Diaraquidonyl-4- (2-dimethylaminoethyl) [1,3] -dioxalane (DAra-K5-C2 - DMA)
To the above crude material (VII, 0.30 g) in argon, 15 mL of dimethylamine in THF (2.0 M) was added. The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature for 6 min. An oily residue was obtained after evaporation of the solvent. Column chromatography on silica gel (230-400 mesh, 40 mL) with 0-5% gradient of methanol in dichloromethane as eluant resulted in 0.18 g of the DAra-K5-C2DMA product as a pale oil.<sup>1</sup>H NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3) δ: 5.3-5.5 (16H, m, 8 x CH = CH), 4.0-4.17 (2H, m, 2 x OCH), 3.49 (1H, t, OCH), 2.65-2.85 (14H, m, 6 x C = C-CH<sub>2</sub>-C = C, NCH<sub>2</sub>), 2.55 (6H, s, br, 2 x NCH<sub>3</sub>), 2.06 (8H, m, 4 x CH<sub>2</sub> allyl), 1.80-1.92 (2H, m, CH<sub>2</sub>), 1.4-1.75 (4H, m, 2 x CH<sub>2</sub>), 1.22-1.45 (20H, m), 0.90 (6H, t, 2 x CH<sub>3</sub>) ppm.
Example 38: Synthesis of 2,2-Didocosahexaenoyl-4- (2-dimethylaminoethyl) - [1,3] -dioxalane (DDha-K5-C2 — DMA)
306
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY
<img file="MX338780B_D0377.tif" />
__________ MgBr<sub>2 t</sub> θ<sub>Γ</sub>
I ether 1
I l.Mg, ether II '2. Ethyl formate
<img file="MX338780B_D0378.tif" />
H<sub>3</sub>CO<sub>2</sub>SW
<img file="MX338780B_D0379.tif" />
VII
Dimethylamine
<img file="MX338780B_D0380.tif" />
DDha-K5-C2-DMA
8. Synthesis of Didocosahexaenoyl (II) Bromide
A mixture of docosahexaenoyl methanesulfonate (2.0g, 5.1mmol) and magnesium bromide (4.3g, 23mmol) in anhydrous ether (100mL) was stirred under argon overnight. The resulting suspension was filtered and the solid was washed with ether (2x30 mL). The filtrate and wash were combined and the solvent was evaporated. The resulting residue was purified by column chromatography on silica gel (230-400 mesh, 40 mL) eluted with hexanes. This provided 2.2 g of docosahexaenoyl (II) bromide as a colorless oil.
<img file="MX338780B_D0381.tif" />
307
9. Synthesis of Didocosahexaenoyl (III) Format
To a solution of docosahexaenoyl bromide (II, 2.2 g, 6.0 mmol) in anhydrous ether (60 mL) was added Mg filings (145 mg, 6.0 mmol) followed by a crystal of iodine. The resulting mixture was refluxed under argon for 5 hours. The mixture was cooled to room temperature. Ethyl format (0.50 mL) was added to the nebulous argon mixture and the resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. To the reaction was added 40 mL of 5% aqueous H2SO4 solution. The ether phase was separated and the aqueous phase was extracted with ether (50 mL). The combined organic phase was washed with water (2 x 50 mL), brine (50 mL), and then dried over MgSC> 4 anhydrous. Solvent evaporation provided 2.3 g of a yellowish acid as the crude product (III). The crude product was purified by chromatography on silica gel columns (230-400 mesh, 50 mL) eluted with 0-7% gradient ethyl acetate in hexanes. This provided 1.38 g (65%) of Didocosahexaenoyl methyl format (III) as a pale oil.
10. Synthesis of Didocosahexaenoyl methanol (IV)
Didocosahexaenoyl methyl format (III, 1.38 g, 2.1 mmol) and KOH (300 mg) were stirred in 90% EtOH (70 mL) at room temperature under nitrogen for 90 min. After completing the reaction, most of the solvent was evaporated. The
<img file="MX338780B_D0382.tif" />
Resulting mixture was treated with 60 mL of 2M HCI solution. The aqueous phase was extracted with ether (2x75 mL). The combined ether extract was washed with water (2 x 50 mL), brine (50 mL), and dried over MgSO<sub>4</sub> anhydrous. Evaporation of the solvent provided 1.18 g of IV as a yellowish oil. The crude product was purified by chromatography on silica gel columns (230-400 mesh, 50 mL) eluted with 0-6% gradient ethyl acetate in hexanes. This provided
1.0 g of Didocosahexaenoyl methanol (IV) as a colorless oil.
II. Synthesis of Didocosahexaenoyl Ketone (V)
To a mixture of Didocosahexaenoyl methanol (IV, 1.2 g, 1.9 mmol) and anhydrous potassium carbonate (O. lg) in 30 mL of CH2CI2 were added to pyridinium chlorochromate (PCC, 1.05 g,
4.8 mmol). The resulting suspension was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours. Then ether (120 mL) was added into the mixture and the resulting brown suspension was filtered through a pad of silica gel (75 mL). The pad was then washed with ether (3 x 75 mL). The ether filtrate and the washes were combined. Solvent evaporation provided 1.3 g of an oily residue as a crude product. The crude product was purified by chromatography on silica gel columns (230-400 mesh, 40 mL) eluted with 0-3% ethyl acetate in hexanes. This provided 0.83 g (69%) of
ΜΡΙ
<img file="MX338780B_D0383.tif" />
309
Didocosahexaenoyl ketone (V).
12. Synthesis of 2,2-Didocosahexaenoyl -4- (2-hydroxyethyl) [1,3] -dioxalan (VI)
A mixture of diaraquidonyl ketone (V, 0.43g, 0.69mmol), 1,2,4-butanotriol (0.35g, 3.3mmol) and pyridinium ptoluenesulfonate (50mg) in 75mL of toluene were refluxed under argon overnight. with a Dean-Stark tube to remove water. The resulting mixture was cooled to room temperature. The organic phase was washed with water (2 x 30 mL), brine (30 mL) and dried over MgSO<sub>4 </sub>anhydrous. Evaporation of the solvent resulted in a yellowish oily residue. The crude product was purified by chromatography on silica gel columns (230-400 mesh, 40 mL) with 0-2% methanol in dichloromethane as the eluent. This provided 0.43 g (95%) of pure VI as a pale oil.
13. Synthesis of 2,2-Didocosahexaenoyl -4- (2raetanosulfonylethyl) - [1,3] -dioxalan (VII)
To a solution of 2,2-Didocosahexaenoyl-4- (2hydroxyethyl) - [1,3] -dioxalan (VI, 0.42 g, 0.59 mmol) and dry triethylamine (300 mg, 2.9 mmol) in 50 mL of anhydrous CH2CI2 was added anhydrous methanesulfonyl (0.25 g, 1.4 mmol) in nitrogen. The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. The organic phase is
IMPI
<img file="MX338780B_D0384.tif" />
310 washed with water (2 x 25 mL), brine (25 mL) and dried in
MgS0<sub>4</sub> anhydrous. The solvent was evaporated to provide 0.43 g of pale oil. The crude product was used in the next step without further purification.
14. Synthesis of
2,2-Didocosahexaenoyl-4- (2-dimethylaminoethyl) - [1,3] -dioxalane (DDha-K5-C2 — DMA)
To the above crude material (VII, 0.43 g) in argon, 15 mL of dimethylamine in THF (2.0 M) was added. The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature for 6 min. An oily residue was obtained after evaporation of the solvent. Column chromatography on silica gel (230-400 mesh, 40 mL) with 0-5% gradient of methanol in dichloromethane as eluent resulted in 0.31 g of the product DDha-K5-C2DMA as a yellowish oil.<sup>X</sup>H NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3) δ: 5.25-5.45 (24H, m, 12 x CH = CH), 4.05-4.17 (2H, m, 2 x OCH),
3.50 (IH, t, OCH), 2.87-3.15 (2H, br., NCH<sub>2</sub>) 2.73-2.87 (20H, m, 10 x C = C-CH<sub>2</sub>-C = C), 2.65 (6H, s, br, 2 x NCH<sub>3</sub>), 2.06 (8H, m, x CH<sub>2</sub> allylic), 2.0-2.2 (2H, m, CH<sub>2</sub>), 1.75-1.95 (2H, m,
CH<sub>2</sub>), 1.3-1.65 (8H, m, 4 x CH<sub>2</sub>), 0.90 (6H, t, 2 x CH<sub>3</sub>) ppm.
Example 39: Synthesis of 4-Dimethylamino-butyric acid 1octadeca-6,9,12-trienyl-nonadeca-7,10,13-trienyl ester (00514)
<img file="MX338780B_D0385.tif" />
311
<img file="MX338780B_D0386.tif" />
MgBra, diethyl ether
005-8
<img file="MX338780B_D0387.tif" />
Br
<img file="MX338780B_D0388.tif" />
<img file="MX338780B_D0389.tif" />
In an argon atmosphere, to a round-bottom flask loaded with DLen (y) -MeOH (005-12, 262 mg, 0.5 mmol), 4-dimethylaminobutyric acid hydrochloride (lOlmg, 0.6 mmol), and 4- (dimethylamino) pyridine (13 mg) in dichloromethane (5 mL) dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (134 mg) was added. After the mixture was stirred for 16 h at room temperature, the solvent was evaporated and the residue was taken up in diethyl ether. The white precipitate was discarded by filtration. The filtrate was concentrated to dryness (0.4 g oil). The residue was purified by chromatography on silica gel columns.
<img file="MX338780B_D0390.tif" />
ΙΜΙ
Λ
312
MEXICAN INSTITUTE '♦> OF INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY (230-400 mesh, 50 mL) eluted with 2% to 3% methanol in dichloromethane. Fractions containing the pure product were combined and concentrated. The residue was passed through a layer of silica gel (2 mm) washed with hexanes (6 mL). The filtrate was then concentrated and dried in a high vacuum for 1 h. This provided 166 mg (0.26 mmol, 53%) of 005-14 as a slightly light yellow oil.<sup>1</sup>H NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3) δ: 5.41-5.26 (m, 12H, CH = CH), 4.83 (quintet, J = 6 Hz, 1H), 2.77 (similar to t, J = 5.2 Hz, 8H), 2.29 ( t, J = 7.6 Hz, 2H), 2.25 (t, J = 7.6, 2H), 2.18 (s, 6H), 2.02 (similar to q, J = 6.8 Hz, 8H),
1.75 (quintet-like, J = 7.6 Hz, 2H), 1.48 (m, 4H), 1,371.20 (m, 24H), 0.86 (t, J = 6.8 Hz, 6H) ppm.
Example 40: Synthesis of 5-Dimethylamino-pentanoic acid 1octadeca-6,9,12-trienyl-nonadeca-7,10,13-trienyl ester (005 -
23)
313
<img file="MX338780B_D0391.tif" />
005-12
<img file="MX338780B_D0392.tif" />
IMPI
INSTITUTE M f./.CAN!)
OF THE PROPERTY
IN3'J5T ':?. L
<img file="MX338780B_D0393.tif" />
Step 1, 005-21:
In an argon atmosphere, to a round-bottom flask loaded with DLen (y) -MeOH (005-12, 262 mg, 0.5 mmol), 5-bromovaleric acid (181 mg, 1.0 mmol) and 4- (dimethylamino) pyridine 15 (30 mg) in dichloromethane (10 mL) dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (227 mg) was added. After the mixture was stirred for 16 h at room temperature, the solvent was evaporated and the residue was taken up in hexanes. The white precipitate was discarded by filtration. The filtrate was concentrated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography on silica gel columns (230-400 mesh, 50 mL) eluted with acetate in hexanes (0-2%). Fractions containing the pure product were combined and concentrated. This provided 290 mg (0.42 mmol, 84%) of 005-21 as a slightly oil
IMPI
<img file="MX338780B_D0394.tif" />
314 yellow
Step 2, 005-23:
Dimethylamine (2M in THF, 10 mL) was added to 005-21 (290 mg). The solution was stirred at room temperature for 6 days. Excess amine and solvent were evaporated. The crude product was purified by chromatography on silica gel columns (230-400 mesh, 50 mL) with methanol in dichloromethane (13%). Fractions containing the product were combined and concentrated. The residual oil was passed through a layer of celite and washed with hexanes (6 mL). The filtrate was then concentrated and dried under high vacuum for 2 h. This provided 204 mg (0.31 mmol, 74%) of 005-23 as a slightly yellow oil.<sup>X</sup>H NMR (400 MHz, CDC1<sub>3</sub>) δ: 5.435.30 (m, 12H, CH = CH), 4.84 (quintet, J = 6 Hz, 1H), 2.77 (similar to t, J = 5.2 Hz, 8H), 2.39-2.28 (m, 4H), 2.28 (s, 6H), 2.06 (similar to q, J = 6.8 Hz, 8H), 1.66 (similar to quintet, J = 7.2 Hz, 2H), 1.60-1.48 (m, 6H), 1.41-1.24 (m, 24H ), 0.90 (t, 6H, J = 6.8 Hz) ppm.
Example 41: Synthesis of [2- (2,2-Di-octadeca-6,9,12-trienyl [1,3] dioxolan-4-yl) ethyl] -dimethylamine (005-31)
315
Step 1, 005-28:
<img file="MX338780B_D0395.tif" />
To a mixture of dilinolenyl (γ) methanol (IV, 550 mg, 1.05 mmol) and anhydrous potassium carbonate (58 mg) in 25 mL of CH2C12 were added to pyridinium chlorochromate (PCC, 566 mg, 2.63 mmol, 2.5 equiv. ). The resulting suspension was stirred at room temperature for 90 min. Then ether (100 mL) was added into the mixture and the resulting brown suspension was filtered through a pad of silica gel (150 mL). The silica gel pad was then washed with ether (3 x 50 mL). The ether filtrate and the washes were combined. The
316
<img file="MX338780B_D0396.tif" />
Solvent evaporation provided 510 mg of an oily residue as a crude product. The crude product was purified by chromatography on silica gel columns (230-400 mesh, 50 mL) eluted with 0-3% ethyl acetate in hexanes. This provided 344g (63%) of the title product (005-28).
Step 2, 005-29:
A mixture of 005-28 (344 mg, 0.66 mmol), 1,2,4-butanothriol (349 mg, 3.2 mmol) and pyridinium p-toluenesulfonate (30 mg) in 50 mL of toluene were heated under reflux in argon overnight. with a Dean-Stark tube to remove water. The resulting mixture was cooled to room temperature. The organic phase was washed with water (30 mL) (butantriol is not soluble in toluene, so the solution is poured and the triol is left behind), brine (30 mL) and dried in Na<sub>2</sub>S0<sub>4</sub>anhydrous. Evaporation of the solvent resulted in a yellowish oily residue. The crude product was purified by column chromatography on silica gel (230-400 mesh, 40 mL) eluted with 04% ethyl acetate in hexanes. Fractions containing the pure product were combined and concentrated. This provided 337 mg (83%) of pure 005-29 as a colorless oil.
Step 3, 005-30:
To a solution of 005-29 (337 mg, 0.55 mmol) and χ ί
Ο Υ ',' Χ '
317
FROM ί TO «OPIÉDA ñ INDUSTRIAL dry triethylamine (300 mg, 2 mmol) in 30 mL of anhydrous CH2CI2, methanesulfonyl anhydride (310 mg, 1.78 mmol) in nitrogen was added. The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. The mixture was diluted with 30 mL of CH2CI2. The organic phase was washed with water (2 x 25 mL), brine (25 mL) and dried over anhydrous MgSO4. The solvent was evaporated to provide 377g of the desired product as a clear, colorless oil (99%). The product was pure enough and used in the next step without further purification.
Step 4, 005-31:
To 005-30 (377 mg) in argon, 15 mL of dimethylamine in THF (2.0 M) was added. The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature for 6 min. An oily residue was obtained after evaporation of the solvent. Column chromatography on silica gel (230-400 mesh, 40 mL) was eluted with 3% methanol in dichloromethane. The fections containing the pure product were combined and concentrated to provide 314 mg of the title product (005-31) as a pale pale oil.<sup>1</sup>H NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3) δ: 5.41-5.26 (m, 12H, CH = CH), 4.06 (m, 1H), 4.01 (dd, 1H, J = 7.5, 7.5 Hz), 3.45 (dd, 1H, J = 7.5, 7.5 Hz), 2.77 (similar to t, J = 5.6 Hz, 8H), 2.36 (m, 1H), 2.26 (m, 1H), 2.19 (s, 6H), 2.02 (similar to q,
J = 6.8 Hz, 8H), 1.78 (m, 1H), 1.67 (m, 1H)
1.60-1.51 (m, 4H),
318
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE
OF INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY
<img file="MX338780B_D0397.tif" />
1.38-1.21 (m, 24H), 0.86 (t, 6H, J = 6.8 Hz) ppm.
Example 42: Synthesis of 4- (2-Methyl-aziridin-l-yl) butyric acid l-octadeca-9,12-dienyl-nonadeca-10,13-dienyl ester (005-18)
<img file="MX338780B_D0398.tif" />
001-17
005-13
005-18
Step 1, 005-13: In an argon atmosphere, to a round bottom flask loaded with DLin) -MeOH (001-17, 528.9 mg, 0.5 mmol), 4- (dimethylamino ) pyridine (25 mg) in dichloromethane (10 mL) dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (268 mg) was added. After the mixture was stirred for 16 h at room temperature, the solvent was evaporated and the residue was taken up in diethyl ether. The white precipitate (DCU) was discarded by filtration. The filtrate was concentrated and the resulting oily residue was purified by chromatography on silica gel columns (230-400 mesh, 50 mL) eluted with 0 to 1% ethyl acetate in hexanes. This provided 0.44 g (65%) of 005-13
319
IMPI • ΝίΤίΤ.Τ'ν 'ZICA-ΝΠ S> ¿' _Λ Μ, Λ'ΧαΧ, (NWKTÍLAl.
<img file="MX338780B_D0399.tif" />
like a colorless oil.
Step 2, 005-18: A mixture of 005-13 (0.44 g, 0.65 mmol), 2-methylaziridine (148 mg, 2.6 mmol, tech. 90%), CS2CO3 (2.6 mmol), and TBAI (2.4 mmol) in acetonitrllo (10 mL) was stirred in Ar for 4 days. After the solvent was removed, hexanes and water were added to the residue. The two phases were separated followed by extraction of the aqueous phase with hexanes (X 2). The combined organic phase was dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated to dryness. The resulting oily residue was purified by chromatography on silica gel columns (230-400 mesh, 50 mL) eluted with 1% to 3% methanol in dichloromethane. The fractions containing the product were combined and concentrated (200 mg of oil). This was purified again by chromatography on silica gel columns (230-400 mesh, 50 mL) eluted with a gradient of ethyl acetate in hexanes (5% -20%). Fractions containing the pure product were combined and concentrated. This provided 96 mg (33%) of 005-18 as a colorless oil. <sup>1</sup>H NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3) δ: 5.43-5.30 (m, 8H, CH = CH), 4.87 (quintet, J = 6
Hz, IH), 2.78 (similar at, J = 6 Hz, 4H), 2.39 (similar at, J = 7.8 Hz, 2H), 2.26 (similar at, 2H), 2.06 (similar to q,
J = 6.8 Hz, 8H), 1.89 (quintet-like, J = 7.2 Hz, 2H), 1,561.48 (m, 5H), 1.41-1.24 (m, 38H), 1.18 (d, J = 5.2 Hz, 3H ), 0.90 (t, 6H, J = 6.8 Hz) ppm.
320
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY
<img file="MX338780B_D0400.tif" />
Example 43: Synthesis of 4-Dimethylamino-but-2-enoic acid 1octadeca-9,12-dienyl-nonadeca-10,13-dienyl ester (005-34)
<img file="MX338780B_D0401.tif" />
001-17
<img file="MX338780B_D0402.tif" />
005-32
005-34
Step 1, 005-32: In an argon atmosphere, to a round bottom flask loaded with DLin-MeOH (001-17, 528.9 mg, lmmol), 4 bromochrotonic acid (330 mg, 2mmol) and 4 (dimethylamino ) pyridine (49 mg) in dichloromethane (10 mL) dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (454 mg, 2.2 mmol) was added. After the mixture was stirred for 16 h at room temperature, the precipitate was removed by filtration and the solid was washed with dichloromethane. 4bromochrotonic acid (165 mg), 4- (dimethylamino) pyridine (15 mg) and finally dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (250 mg) were added to the filtrate. After the mixture was stirred for 16 h at room temperature, the solvent was evaporated and the residue was taken up in hexanes. The
<img file="MX338780B_D0403.tif" />
321
<img file="MX338780B_D0404.tif" />
White precipitate (DCU) was discarded by filtration. The filtrate was concentrated and the resulting oily residue (587 mg) was used in the next step without further purification.
Step 2, 005-34: To 005-32 (587 mg) in argon, 7 mL of dimethylamine in THF (2.0 M) was added. The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 min. The resulting oily residue was obtained by evaporation of the solvent and purified by chromatography on silica gel columns (230-400 mesh, 40 mL) eluted with 100 mL of dichloromethane, 1% to 3% methanol in dichloromethane. The fractions containing the pure product were combined and concentrated to provide a brownish oil (XD-005-34, 69 mg, 11% of
DLin-MeOH, 001-17). <sup>3</sup>H NMR (600 MHz, CDC1<sub>3</sub>) δ: 6.92 (dt, J = 6.2 Hz, 15.7 Hz, 1H), 5.97 (d, J = 15.7 Hz), 5.41-5.31 (8H, m, CH = CH), 4.93 (quintet, J = 6.7 Hz, 1H), 3.07 (dd, J = ll Hz,
6.2 Hz, 2H), 2.78 (t, J = 6.9 Hz, 4H), 2.27 (s, 6H), 2.05 (m,
8H), 1.58-1.52 (m, 4H), 1.39-1.24 (m, 36H), 0.90 (t, 6H,
J = 6.8 Hz) ppm.
The various modalities described above can be combined to provide additional modalities. All US patents, US patent application publications, foreign patents, foreign patent applications and non-patent publications referenced in this specification and / or listed in the Application Data Sheet are
322 they incorporate wholeness.
<img file="MX338780B_D0405.tif" />
hereby for reference in your
Aspects of the modalities can be modified, if necessary to employ concepts from various patents, applications and publications, to provide still other additional modalities.
These and other changes can be made to the modalities in view of the detailed description above. In general, in the claims that follow, the terms used will not be construed to limit the claims to the specific modalities described in the specification and the claims, but will be interpreted as including all possible modalities together with the entire scope of the equivalent to those that correspond to these claims. Accordingly, the claims are not limited by the description.
323
INSTITUTO MEXICA ajo
OF THE INDUSTRIAL PECHIEAO
<img file="MX338780B_D0406.tif" />
Contents294
432 sheets
Sheet 1 Sheet 2 Sheet 3 Sheet 4 Sheet 5 Sheet 6 Sheet 7 Sheet 8 Sheet 9 Sheet 10 Sheet 11 Sheet 12 Sheet 13 Sheet 14 Sheet 15 Sheet 16 Sheet 17 Sheet 18 Sheet 19 Sheet 20 Sheet 21 Sheet 22 Sheet 23 Sheet 24 Sheet 25 Sheet 26 Sheet 27 Sheet 28 Sheet 29 Sheet 30 Sheet 31 Sheet 32 Sheet 33 Sheet 34 Sheet 35 Sheet 36 Sheet 37 Sheet 38 Sheet 39 Sheet 40 Sheet 41 Sheet 42 Sheet 43 Sheet 44 Sheet 45 Sheet 46 Sheet 47 Sheet 48 Sheet 49 Sheet 50 Sheet 51 Sheet 52 Sheet 53 Sheet 54 Sheet 55 Sheet 56 Sheet 57 Sheet 58 Sheet 59 Sheet 60 Sheet 61 Sheet 62 Sheet 63 Sheet 64 Sheet 65 Sheet 66 Sheet 67 Sheet 68 Sheet 69 Sheet 70 Sheet 71 Sheet 72 Sheet 73 Sheet 74 Sheet 75 Sheet 76 Sheet 77 Sheet 78 Sheet 79 Sheet 80 Sheet 81 Sheet 82 Sheet 83 Sheet 84 Sheet 85 Sheet 86 Sheet 87 Sheet 88 Sheet 89 Sheet 90 Sheet 91 Sheet 92 Sheet 93 Sheet 94 Sheet 95 Sheet 96 Sheet 97 Sheet 98 Sheet 99 Sheet 100 Sheet 101 Sheet 102 Sheet 103 Sheet 104 Sheet 105 Sheet 106 Sheet 107 Sheet 108 Sheet 109 Sheet 110 Sheet 111 Sheet 112 Sheet 113 Sheet 114 Sheet 115 Sheet 116 Sheet 117 Sheet 118 Sheet 119 Sheet 120 Sheet 121 Sheet 122 Sheet 123 Sheet 124 Sheet 125 Sheet 126 Sheet 127 Sheet 128 Sheet 129 Sheet 130 Sheet 131 Sheet 132 Sheet 133 Sheet 134 Sheet 135 Sheet 136 Sheet 137 Sheet 138 Sheet 139 Sheet 140 Sheet 141 Sheet 142 Sheet 143 Sheet 144 Sheet 145 Sheet 146 Sheet 147 Sheet 148 Sheet 149 Sheet 150 Sheet 151 Sheet 152 Sheet 153 Sheet 154 Sheet 155 Sheet 156 Sheet 157 Sheet 158 Sheet 159 Sheet 160 Sheet 161 Sheet 162 Sheet 163 Sheet 164 Sheet 165 Sheet 166 Sheet 167 Sheet 168 Sheet 169 Sheet 170 Sheet 171 Sheet 172 Sheet 173 Sheet 174 Sheet 175 Sheet 176 Sheet 177 Sheet 178 Sheet 179 Sheet 180 Sheet 181 Sheet 182 Sheet 183 Sheet 184 Sheet 185 Sheet 186 Sheet 187 Sheet 188 Sheet 189 Sheet 190 Sheet 191 Sheet 192 Sheet 193 Sheet 194 Sheet 195 Sheet 196 Sheet 197 Sheet 198 Sheet 199 Sheet 200 Sheet 201 Sheet 202 Sheet 203 Sheet 204 Sheet 205 Sheet 206 Sheet 207 Sheet 208 Sheet 209 Sheet 210 Sheet 211 Sheet 212 Sheet 213 Sheet 214 Sheet 215 Sheet 216 Sheet 217 Sheet 218 Sheet 219 Sheet 220 Sheet 221 Sheet 222 Sheet 223 Sheet 224 Sheet 225 Sheet 226 Sheet 227 Sheet 228 Sheet 229 Sheet 230 Sheet 231 Sheet 232 Sheet 233 Sheet 234 Sheet 235 Sheet 236 Sheet 237 Sheet 238 Sheet 239 Sheet 240 Sheet 241 Sheet 242 Sheet 243 Sheet 244 Sheet 245 Sheet 246 Sheet 247 Sheet 248 Sheet 249 Sheet 250 Sheet 251 Sheet 252 Sheet 253 Sheet 254 Sheet 255 Sheet 256 Sheet 257 Sheet 258 Sheet 259 Sheet 260 Sheet 261 Sheet 262 Sheet 263 Sheet 264 Sheet 265 Sheet 266 Sheet 267 Sheet 268 Sheet 269 Sheet 270 Sheet 271 Sheet 272 Sheet 273 Sheet 274 Sheet 275 Sheet 276 Sheet 277 Sheet 278 Sheet 279 Sheet 280 Sheet 281 Sheet 282 Sheet 283 Sheet 284 Sheet 285 Sheet 286 Sheet 287 Sheet 288 Sheet 289 Sheet 290 Sheet 291 Sheet 292 Sheet 293 Sheet 294 Sheet 295 Sheet 296 Sheet 297 Sheet 298 Sheet 299 Sheet 300 Sheet 301 Sheet 302 Sheet 303 Sheet 304 Sheet 305 Sheet 306 Sheet 307 Sheet 308 Sheet 309 Sheet 310 Sheet 311 Sheet 312 Sheet 313 Sheet 314 Sheet 315 Sheet 316 Sheet 317 Sheet 318 Sheet 319 Sheet 320 Sheet 321 Sheet 322 Sheet 323 Sheet 324 Sheet 325 Sheet 326 Sheet 327 Sheet 328 Sheet 329 Sheet 330 Sheet 331 Sheet 332 Sheet 333 Sheet 334 Sheet 335 Sheet 336 Sheet 337 Sheet 338 Sheet 339 Sheet 340 Sheet 341 Sheet 342 Sheet 343 Sheet 344 Sheet 345 Sheet 346 Sheet 347 Sheet 348 Sheet 349 Sheet 350 Sheet 351 Sheet 352 Sheet 353 Sheet 354 Sheet 355 Sheet 356 Sheet 357 Sheet 358 Sheet 359 Sheet 360 Sheet 361 Sheet 362 Sheet 363 Sheet 364 Sheet 365 Sheet 366 Sheet 367 Sheet 368 Sheet 369 Sheet 370 Sheet 371 Sheet 372 Sheet 373 Sheet 374 Sheet 375 Sheet 376 Sheet 377 Sheet 378 Sheet 379 Sheet 380 Sheet 381 Sheet 382 Sheet 383 Sheet 384 Sheet 385 Sheet 386 Sheet 387 Sheet 388 Sheet 389 Sheet 390 Sheet 391 Sheet 392 Sheet 393 Sheet 394 Sheet 395 Sheet 396 Sheet 397 Sheet 398 Sheet 399 Sheet 400 Sheet 401 Sheet 402 Sheet 403 Sheet 404 Sheet 405 Sheet 406 Sheet 407 Sheet 408 Sheet 409 Sheet 410 Sheet 411 Sheet 412 Sheet 413 Sheet 414 Sheet 415 Sheet 416 Sheet 417 Sheet 418 Sheet 419 Sheet 420 Sheet 421 Sheet 422 Sheet 423 Sheet 424 Sheet 425 Sheet 426 Sheet 427 Sheet 428 Sheet 429 Sheet 430 Sheet 431 Sheet 432
222 members in 20 offices
Priority claims13
| Document | Office | Kind | Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| 61113179 | United States of America | – | |
| 11317908 | United States of America | P | |
| 61154350 | United States of America | – | |
| 15435009 | United States of America | P | |
| 61171439 | United States of America | – | |
| 17143909 | United States of America | P | |
| 61185438 | United States of America | – | |
| 18543809 | United States of America | P | |
| 61225898 | United States of America | – | |
| 22589809 | United States of America | P | |
| 61234098 | United States of America | – | |
| 23409809 | United States of America | P | |
| 2009063927 | United States of America | W |
Members222
| Document | Office | Kind | |
|---|---|---|---|
| AU2009313201A1 | Australia | A1 | |
| AU2009313205A1 | Australia | A1 | |
| AU2009313206A1 | Australia | A1 | |
| CA2743135A1 | Canada | A1 | |
| CA2743136A1 | Canada | A1 | |
| CA2743139A1 | Canada | A1 | |
| CA3029724A1 | Canada | A1 | |
| CA3033577A1 | Canada | A1 | |
| CA3039251A1 | Canada | A1 | |
| CA3220821A1 | Canada | A1 | |
| WO2010054384A1 | World Intellectual Property Organization (WIPO) | A1 | |
| WO2010054401A1 | World Intellectual Property Organization (WIPO) | A1 | |
| WO2010054405A1 | World Intellectual Property Organization (WIPO) | A1 | |
| WO2010054406A1 | World Intellectual Property Organization (WIPO) | A1 | |
| MX2011004973A | Mexico | A | |
| MX2011004974A | Mexico | A | |
| IL212801A0 | Israel | A0 | |
| IL212801D0 | Israel | D0 | |
| IL212802A0 | Israel | A0 | |
| IL212802D0 | Israel | D0 | |
| KR20110091866A | Republic of Korea | A | |
| EP2355658A1 | European Patent Office (EPO) | A1 | |
| EP2355851A1 | European Patent Office (EPO) | A1 | |
| KR20110097823A | Republic of Korea | A | |
| EP2367571A1 | European Patent Office (EPO) | A1 | |
| CN102281899A | China | A | |
| US2011311582A1 | United States of America | A1 | |
| US2011311583A1 | United States of America | A1 | |
| US2012027796A1 | United States of America | A1 | |
| CN102361650A | China | A | |
| US2012058144A1 | United States of America | A1 | |
| EP2355658A4 | European Patent Office (EPO) | A4 | |
| JP2012508261A | Japan | A | |
| JP2012508263A | Japan | A | |
| JP2012508264A | Japan | A | |
| US2012095075A1 | United States of America | A1 | |
| EA201170554A1 | Eurasian Patent Organization (EAPO) | A1 | |
| EA201170553A1 | Eurasian Patent Organization (EAPO) | A1 | |
| EP2355851A4 | European Patent Office (EPO) | A4 | |
| EP2367571A4 | European Patent Office (EPO) | A4 | |
| SG195653A1 | Singapore | A1 | |
| US8722082B2 | United States of America | B2 | |
| NZ608756A | New Zealand | A | |
| US8999351B2 | United States of America | B2 | |
| JP2015078229A | Japan | A | |
| NZ608754A | New Zealand | A | |
| IL212801A | Israel | A | |
| IL212802A | Israel | A | |
| IL238884A0 | Israel | A0 | |
| IL238884D0 | Israel | D0 | |
| IL238885A0 | Israel | A0 | |
| IL238885D0 | Israel | D0 | |
| CN102281899B | China | B | |
| JP5747282B2 | Japan | B2 | |
| JP5774486B2 | Japan | B2 | |
| US2015265708A1 | United States of America | A1 | |
| US9186325B2 | United States of America | B2 | |
| JP2015214560A | Japan | A | |
| CN105152939A | China | A | |
| JP5832898B2 | Japan | B2 | |
| US9220683B2 | United States of America | B2 | |
| JP2016047832A | Japan | A | |
| CN102361650B | China | B | |
| MX338780BThis record | Mexico | B | |
| AU2009313206B2 | Australia | B2 | |
| AU2009313201B2 | Australia | B2 | |
| AU2009313205B2 | Australia | B2 | |
| CN105709229A | China | A | |
| JP2016128498A | Japan | A | |
| US2016199485A1 | United States of America | A1 | |
| US2016213785A1 | United States of America | A1 | |
| AU2016208434A1 | Australia | A1 | |
| AU2016208436A1 | Australia | A1 | |
| AU2016216582A1 | Australia | A1 | |
| IL247646A0 | Israel | A0 | |
| IL247646D0 | Israel | D0 | |
| IL247647A0 | Israel | A0 | |
| IL247647D0 | Israel | D0 | |
| MX347860B | Mexico | B | |
| US9682139B2 | United States of America | B2 | |
| US9707292B2 | United States of America | B2 | |
| KR20170089976A | Republic of Korea | A | |
| EP3207944A1 | European Patent Office (EPO) | A1 | |
| JP6189461B2 | Japan | B2 | |
| US9764036B2 | United States of America | B2 | |
| EP2355658B1 | European Patent Office (EPO) | B1 | |
| MX351819B | Mexico | B | |
| EP3238738A1 | European Patent Office (EPO) | A1 | |
| JP2017197576A | Japan | A | |
| AU2017254919A1 | Australia | A1 | |
| KR20170143016A | Republic of Korea | A | |
| AU2016208434B2 | Australia | B2 | |
| AU2017279739A1 | Australia | A1 | |
| JP2018012724A | Japan | A | |
| JP6273234B2 | Japan | B2 | |
| US2018043009A1 | United States of America | A1 | |
| EP3284482A1 | European Patent Office (EPO) | A1 | |
| AU2018201038A1 | Australia | A1 | |
| US2018064807A1 | United States of America | A1 | |
| EP2355851B1 | European Patent Office (EPO) | B1 |
1 legal event, as the office reported them to INPADOC
Events
| Event | Code | |
|---|---|---|
| Grant or registrationFG | FG |
Numbers
- Publication
- 338780
- Application
- 4973
Titles2
- Spanish
- LIPIDOS Y COMPOSICIONES NOVEDOSAS PARA EL SUMINISTRO DE TERAPEUTICOS.
- English
- NOVEL LIPIDS AND COMPOSITIONS FOR THE DELIVERY OF THERAPEUTICS.
Classification
- CPC, 57
- A61K9/1272
- A61K47/10
- A61K47/44
- C07C217/46
- A61K31/7088
- A61K31/7105
- A61K31/713
- A61K39/00
- A61K47/18
- A61K47/20
- A61K47/22
- A61K47/28
- A61K48/0033
- C12N15/111
- A61K2039/55561
- A61K2039/55555
- C12N2310/14
- C12N2310/3515
- C12N2320/32
- C07D319/06
- C07D317/28
- C07D203/10
- C07D317/44
- C07D317/46
- C07D317/72
- C07D405/12
- C07D491/056
- C07D491/113
- A61P33/00
- A61P35/00
- A61P37/04
- Y02A50/30
- A61K39/39
- C07C271/20
- C07C271/12
- C07C251/78
- C07C323/25
- C07C237/16
- C07C251/38
- C07C229/08
- C07C229/30
- C12N15/113
- A61K9/5123
- C07C323/27
- C07C211/21
- C07C279/04
- C07C259/06
- C07C327/06
- C07C219/10
- C07F9/091
- C07C305/14
- C07C311/11
- C07C307/06
- C07F9/1651
- C07D211/72
- A61K47/24
- A61K2039/53
- IPC, 7
- C07C229 30
- A61K31 7088
- A61K31 7105
- A61K47 44
- C07D203 08
- C12N15 85
- C12N5 071